MGC Manager
User’s Guide Vol. I
Version 7.5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Regulatory Notices
United States Federal Communication
Canadian Department of Communications (EC)
Commission (FCC)
Part 15: Class A Statement. This equipment has
been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Test limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the instruction manuals, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his
or her own expense.
Polycom Inc., declares that the MGC-50 and
MGC-100 with NET-2/4/8 cards are in conformity with
the following relevant harmonized standards:
EN 60950: 1992 Including Amendments 1,2,3 & 4
EN 55022: 1994
EN 50082: 1997
Following the provisions of the Council Directive
1999/EC on radio and telecommunication terminal
equipment and the recognition of its conformity.
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified
equipment. This certification means that the
equipment meets telecommunication network
protective, operational and safety requirements as
prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment
Technical Requirements document(s). The
Department does not guarantee the equipment will
operate to the user's satisfaction.
Part 68: Network Registration Number. This
equipment is registered with the FCC in accordance
with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. This equipment is
identified by the FCC registration number.
If requested, the FCC registration Number and REN
must be provided to the telephone company.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure
that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities
of the local telecommunications company. The
equipment must also be installed using an acceptable
method of connection. The customer should be
aware that compliance with the above conditions may
not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment malfunctions, may give
the telecommunications company causes to request
the user to disconnect the equipment.
Any repairs to this equipment must be carried out by
Polycom Inc., or our designated agent. This
stipulation is required by the FCC and applies during
and after the warranty period.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the
electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe
system, if present, are connected together. This
precaution may be particularly important in rural
areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such
connections themselves, but should contact the
appropriate electric inspection authority, or
electrician, as appropriate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
System Requirements ...........................................................................1-1
Prerequisites .........................................................................................1-1
About the MGC Manager User’s Guides .............................................1-2
Maintenance ...............................................................................2-13
MGC Manager Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Starting the MGC Manager Application ..............................................3-1
The MGC Manager Main Window ......................................................3-2
Additional Windows .....................................................................3-4
Participants Queue Window ..................................................3-6
MGC Manager Window View Modes .................................................3-7
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Connecting to an MCU ..................................................................... 3-21
Using Default Templates to Start a Conference ................................ 3-25
Loading the User Defined Default Set to the MGC
Manager Application ......................................................................... 3-36
Commands Shortcut Keys ................................................................. 3-38
Setting Up Conferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
About Conferences .............................................................................. 4-2
Conference Scheduling Methods ......................................................... 4-3
Scheduled Conferences ................................................................ 4-3
On Going Conferences .......................................................... 4-3
Reservations .......................................................................... 4-3
On-Demand (Reservation-less) Conferencing ............................. 4-4
Ad Hoc Conferencing ............................................................ 4-4
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Meeting Rooms ......................................................................4-4
Conference Types ................................................................................4-6
Entry Queue .........................................................................................4-7
Entry Queue Access .............................................................4-11
Conference IVR Access .......................................................4-14
Direct Dialing and Access ...................................................4-15
Operator Attended Conference ............................................4-17
Unattended Conference ........................................................4-19
Conference Media Types ...................................................................4-20
Audio Only Conferences ............................................................4-20
Video Conferences .....................................................................4-21
Video Session Types ............................................................4-21
Video Conference Parameters ..............................................4-23
Highest Common Mechanism .............................................4-24
Additional Video Conference Types ...................................4-25
Defining a New Audio Only Conference ...................................4-34
Defining a New Video Conference ............................................4-35
Conference General Parameters ...........................................4-37
Conference Settings .............................................................4-44
Defining Advanced Conference Settings .............................4-53
Defining Advanced Media Settings .....................................4-57
Participants ...........................................................................4-65
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Video Sources ..................................................................... 4-71
Resource Force .................................................................... 4-82
Meet Me Per Conference ..................................................... 4-84
Recording ............................................................................ 4-84
Completing the Conference Definition ............................... 4-86
Resolving Scheduling Conflicts .......................................... 4-86
Connecting to an On Going Conference ........................................... 4-89
Defined H.323 Participants Dial-in ........................................... 4-90
Simple Dial-In Settings (No Gatekeeper) ........................... 4-90
Simple Dial-In Settings (With Gatekeeper) ........................ 4-91
Advanced Dial-In ................................................................ 4-92
SIP Connections ......................................................................... 4-94
Dial-in Scenario—SIP Environment ................................... 4-94
Direct Dial-in Scenario—SIP Environment ........................ 4-96
Dial-out Scenario—SIP Environment ................................. 4-96
Quality of Service for IP Participants ............................... 4-125
General Monitoring ............................................................................. 5-2
Using the Main Window Panes for Monitoring .......................... 5-3
Listing Conference Properties ............................................... 5-4
Viewing On Going Conference Status .................................. 5-4
Listing On Going Conference Participants in the Status Pane .... 5-7
Listing On Going Conference Participants in the Monitoring
Pane .............................................................................................. 5-8
MGC Manager Icons ................................................................. 5-10
Additional Participant Statuses ........................................... 5-19
Participant’s Audio Status ................................................... 5-20
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Connecting Auto-Detect Participants ..................................5-56
Naming Undefined Dial-in Participants .....................................6-13
Moving Participants Between Conferences ...............................6-15
Designating an Exclusive Speaker .............................................6-18
Changing a Participant’s Status to Conference Chairperson ......6-19
Designating a VIP Participant ....................................................6-21
Modifying a Participant’s User Defined Properties ...................6-22
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Blocking/Unblocking Audio ...................................................... 6-29
Enabling/Disabling Auto Gain Control (AGC) ......................... 6-31
Controlling Video Layout .......................................................... 6-33
Session ................................................................................. 6-36
Setting the Auto Video Layout ............................................ 6-37
Modifying Video Layouts in Lecture Mode Settings .......... 6-38
Broadcasting Annex D Still Video Image (Slide) ..................... 6-72
Printing Conference Data .......................................................... 6-75
Managing Question-and-Answer Sessions ................................ 6-81
Controlling Q&A Queues with the Toolbar ........................ 6-81
Adding Questioners to Q&A Queues .................................. 6-82
Changing a Participant’s Position in the Q&A Queue ........ 6-83
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Allowing Participant Questions ...........................................6-84
Ending Participant Questions ...............................................6-86
Removing Participants from the Q&A Queue .....................6-87
Operations Performed During On Going Gateway Sessions ...........6-103
Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Defining a Meet Me Conference ..........................................................7-2
Meeting Rooms ..................................................................................7-14
Defining a New Meeting Room .................................................7-15
Managing Meeting Rooms .................................................................7-22
Listing Meeting Rooms ..............................................................7-22
Meeting Room Icons ..................................................................7-23
Meeting Room Right-Click Functions .................................7-24
Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended
Conferencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Conference Numeric ID Routing ...........................................8-5
Password Routing ..................................................................8-5
Conference Entry ..........................................................................8-6
Defining a New Entry Queue ...............................................................8-7
Listing Entry Queues ..................................................................8-17
Connecting to the Entry Queue ..................................................8-19
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
ISDN Participants ................................................................ 8-19
H.323 Participant ................................................................. 8-19
SIP Participants ................................................................... 8-21
Using Participants Queue Filters ......................................... 8-42
The Attended Participants Dialog Box ...................................... 8-47
Attended Participants Management ................................................... 8-59
Moving a Participant to the Home Conference ................... 8-62
Placing a Participant On Hold ............................................. 8-65
Performing Operations using Shortcut Keys ............................. 8-67
Moving a Participant Interactively ............................................ 8-68
Moving a Participant to the Operator Conference by
Double-Clicking the Participant’s Icon ..................................... 8-68
Moving Multiple Participants to the Home Conference ............ 8-69
Conference Reservations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Defining a New Reservation ............................................................... 9-3
Completing the Reservation Definition ................................. 9-7
Listing the Current Reservations ......................................................... 9-8
Reservations Icons ....................................................................... 9-8
Deleting a Reservation ...................................................................... 9-10
Rescheduling Reservations ............................................................... 9-11
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Scheduling a Conference Reservation from a Reservation Template
(Database) ..........................................................................................9-13
Lecture Mode Definition ............................................................10-2
Lecture Mode Monitoring ..........................................................10-5
Presentation Mode .............................................................................10-9
Setting the Presentation Mode for a Conference ......................10-10
Presentation Mode Monitoring .................................................10-12
Enabling the Presentation Mode during an On Going
Lecture Show ...................................................................................10-14
Lecture Show Monitoring ........................................................10-16
Click&View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Returning to the Conference Layout ........................................11-22
Getting Help .............................................................................11-23
Returning to the Previous Screen .............................................11-24
Requesting Operator Assistance ...............................................11-25
Appendix A: Disconnection Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Appendix B: Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
Before You Begin
The MGC Manager application is designed to set up and monitor multipoint
video conferences, and to perform system configuration activities for the
MGC Multipoint Control Units (MCUs) to which it connects. MGC
Manager is consists of a user-provided PC workstation, equipped with a
®
®
®
®
Windows 98 , Windows NT , Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating
system, and of the MGC Manager software. The PC can connect to the
MGC unit via LAN, Internet, dial-up modem or RS-232 interface.
System Requirements
The MGC Manager application can be installed in an environment that
meets the following requirements:
•
•
IBM PC compatible computer Pentium II, 400 MHz CPU or higher
Minimum 64 MB RAM (recommended 64 MB)
®
®
®
®
•
Windows 98 , Windows ME , Windows NT , Windows 2000 or
®
Windows XP operating system
•
•
Modem (optional)
Network capabilities - TCP/IP
Prerequisites
This manual assumes the user has the following knowledge:
®
®
®
•
•
Familiarity with Windows 98 , Windows NT , Windows 2000 , or
Windows XP operating systems and interface
Basic knowledge of video conferencing concepts and terminology
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 - Before You Begin
About the MGC Manager User’s Guides
The MGC Manager User Guides documentation set includes the following
volumes:
•
•
•
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume II
MGC Manager User’s Guide - VoicePlus Edition
The content of these volumes is listed below.
The VoicePlus Edition includes information required to use the MGC
VoicePlus (Audio Only) features.
In addition to the User’s Guides, the MGC kit includes:
MGC Administrator’s Guide, MGC Getting Started Guide, MGC-25 Getting
Started Guide, MGC+ Getting Started Guide, MGC Hardware and Installation
Manual and MGC+ Hardware and Installation Manual.
Listed below are chapters and topics included in the volumes of the current
user guides.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Chapter 1 - Before You Begin
Provides a general description of MGC unit system requirements and
prerequisites. Lists and briefly describes the chapters that comprise the MGC
Manager User’s Guides.
Chapter 2 - MGC Manager Overview
Provides a general description of the MGC unit and its main features.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
Contains introductory information about the MGC Manager application and
describes the application's main window, menus, and toolbars. Includes step-
by-step instructions for connecting to an MCU.
Chapter 4 - Setting up Conferences
Includes a general description of video conference types, functions and
parameters. Describes participant roles and parameters. Provides step-by-step
instructions for setting up and starting an On Going Conference, as well as
instructions for defining new participants.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Describes options available during On Going Conferences for general
monitoring, conference level monitoring and participant monitoring.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
A description of operations that can be performed during an On Going
Conference.
Chapter 7 - Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms
Describes the methods for reservation-less conferencing and how to define
Meet Me conferences. Describes how to monitor On Going Meet Me
conferences and how to set up and monitor Meeting Room conferences.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences and Attended
Conferencing
Describes Entry Queues and Operator conferences. Includes step-by-step
instructions for setting up Entry Queues and Operator conferences. Lists all
the Attended Conferencing options.
Chapter 9 - Conference Reservations
Describes how to define and schedule conference Reservations and recurring
conferences.
Chapter 10 - Lecture Mode and Presentation Options
Describes and includes step-by-step instructions for setting up and monitoring
Lecture Mode, Presentation Mode and Lecture Show conferences.
Chapter 11 - Click&View
Describes how to activate and use the Click&View application.
Appendix A - Disconnection Causes
Lists the various disconnection causes according to the Q.931 standard.
Appendix B - Glossary
Lists and describes terms frequently used in the MGC Manager User’s Guides
and terms related to video conferencing.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume II
Chapter 1 - Advanced Conference Settings
Describes advanced video conferencing features. Includes step-by-step
instructions for setting up large Video Switching conferences, auto detection
of participant line rate, LSD – Far End Camera Control (FECC), simple and
Star Cascading conferences, Dual Stream modes, encryption, automatic
extension of conference duration and more.
Chapter 2 - IVR and Entry Queue Services
Describes how to define IVR Message Services and Entry Queue Services,
how to download voice messages to the Audio+ card and how to check the
status of messages in the MCU memory.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 - Before You Begin
Chapter 3 - Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication
Describes Ad Hoc conferencing and external database authentication,
including different scenarios and authentication procedures. Includes
instructions on how to define Profiles and set up Entry Queues for Ad Hoc
conferencing.
Chapter 4 - AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences
Describes the Greet and Guide mode and options. Includes step-by-step
instructions for setting up AV Message Services and Greet and Guide
conferences, and their monitoring and management.
Chapter 5 - H.243 Conferences
Includes step-by-step instructions for setting up and monitoring Cascading
conferences according to H.243. In addition, this chapter describes how to set
up and monitor the H.243 Chair Control (a part of the H.243 standard).
Chapter 6 - Using a Database
Describes the database file which must be registered in the ODBC of the
operator’s workstation during the installation procedure. Includes a
description of the registration procedure for both Access and SQL databases;
how to log into the Database Manager application; how to define and modify
databases and participant and general system defaults; how to set up
permissions and users.
Chapter 7 - Database Templates
Describes how to use the database tables and how to define conference and
participant templates.
Chapter 8 - Templates Handling
Describes the operations that can be performed using conference and
participant templates.
Chapter 9 - Call Detail Records (CDR) Utility
Includes the information required to view conference details. Describes how
to retrieve and archive the conference records, and how to export the records
to an external billing program.
Appendix A - CDR File Fields
Lists and briefly describes the CDR utility information fields.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
MGC Manager User’s Guide - VoicePlus Edition
Chapter 1 - Overview
Provides a general description of the MGC unit’s main audio features, system
requirements and prerequisites.
Chapter 2 - Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences and
Reservations
Includes step-by-step instructions for setting up On Going Audio Only
Conferences and Reservations, and for defining Audio Only participants.
Chapter 3 - Monitoring Audio Only Conferences
Describes the information provided by the MGC Manager when monitoring
an On Going Audio Only conference.
Chapter 4 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
Describes the operations that can be performed during an On Going Audio
Only conference.
Chapter 5 - Meeting Rooms and Entry Queues
Includes step-by-step instructions for setting up Audio Only Meeting Rooms
and Entry Queues.
Chapter 6 - IVR and Entry Queue Services
Provides a general description of IVR and Entry Queue Service usage.
Includes step-by-step instructions for defining new IVR and Entry Queue
Services, downloading the voice message files to the Audio+ card and
printing the DTMF codes defined in the IVR Message Service.
Chapter 7 - Attended Conferencing
Describes Operator conferences and Attended Participant Management.
Chapter 8 - Recording
Describes how to record using the ReadiRecorder and the Prairie Systems
utility.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 - Before You Begin
Conventions
When learning the MGC Manager application, it is important for you to
correctly interpret the terms and conventions used in this Guide:
•
•
•
•
•
•
“Choose” or “Double-click” is used when you need to activate a menu
command or a command button in the dialog box.
“Select” or “Click” is used to highlight a part of the window, dialog box
or menu that you want to be changed with your next action.
“Right-click” is used when you press and release the right mouse button
to open a pop-up menu.
“Choose OK” means that you can either click the OK button with the
mouse, or press the <Enter> key on the keyboard.
Keyboard keys appear in capital letters, between these two symbols < >.
For example, the Shift key appears as <Shift>.
The plus sign (+) between two key names indicates that you must press
and hold down one key while pressing down the second key. For
example, “press <Alt>+<P>” means that you press and hold down the
Alt key while you press the P key.
•
•
•
Bold type appearing in the text or in a procedure indicates the word or
the character that you should type into a text box. Bold type is also used
to indicate the name of a menu item or command that you should select.
Italic type appearing in the text or in a procedure indicates the name of
an icon, a menu, a dialog box or a field from which an option should be
selected or into which parameters should be entered.
Tips and notes are indicated by an icon and appear in a special format on
a gray background. For example:
This is an example of the type of note that you encounter in this User Guide.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
MGC Manager Overview
In multipoint video conferencing, several audio and video endpoints can
simultaneously participate in a conference, having established
communications by connecting to the Multipoint Control Unit (MCU).
The MGC unit can connect the endpoints via ISDN, T1-CAS, IP, ATM and
serial connections (MPI), allowing participants from any deployed network
to participate in a conference, without the need for external gateways and
other equipment.
Figure 2-1 shows a basic multipoint conferencing scheme and connection
types.
Figure 2-1: Multipoint Video Conferencing using MGC
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 - MGC Manager Overview
MCU Management
The MGC unit is controlled by the MGC Manager application installed on a
customer-provided computer or server. The application works with the
following operating systems: Windows 98 R / ME R / NT R / 2000 R / XP R .
The operator’s workstation connects to the MGC unit using:
•
•
•
•
Ethernet LAN (other than the LAN used for conferencing)
TCP/IP Internet
RS-232
Dial-up modem
Up to 30 local or remote MGC Manager workstations can connect to a single
MGC unit simultaneously. A single operator can control multiple MGC units
and conferences. The MGC unit can also be controlled through a Web
browser via the MGC WebCommander application. Using the MGC Personal
Scheduler add-on, conferences can be scheduled from the MCU in
Microsoft’s Outlook.
Figure 2-2 illustrates the MGC Manager system components.
Figure 2-2: MGC Manager - MCU Connection
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
MGC System Main Features
This section briefly describes the main features of the MGC system.
Universal Transcoding
For each endpoint connected to a conference, the MGC's Universal
Transcoding gateway automatically resolves: audio compression, video
protocol, video resolution, frame rate, bandwidth, and T.120 transfer rate. The
gateway then performs any necessary translations “on the fly”. This capability
makes the connection fast and seamless for multipoint calls, and ensures that
each endpoint operates at their optimal capability.
Figure 2-3 shows an example of a transcoding scheme.
Figure 2-3: Transcoding performed by the MGC unit
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 - MGC Manager Overview
Dynamic Continuous Presence
The dynamic Continuous Presence capability of the MGC system enables
user friendly viewing flexibility and conference interaction. This type of
video session offers multiple viewing options and window layouts for video
conferencing.
Continuous Presence for video conferencing is available in three modes:
•
•
•
Classic
Quad Views
Software
The Continuous Presence Classic mode offers 21 layouts to accommodate
different numbers of participants and conference settings. Figure 2-4 shows
these layouts.
Figure 2-4: Continuous Presence Classic Mode - Video Layouts
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The Continuous Presence Quad Views mode offers three additional window
layouts for larger conferences with more than 10 participants, for example:
4x4, 2+8, 1+12. Figure 2-5 shows these layouts.
Figure 2-5: Continuous Presence Quad Views - Additional Video Layouts
For conferences with more participants than display windows, the MGC's
dynamic video mix capability allows the site mix (which sites can be seen) to
be modified throughout the conference. The video layout can be defined
during conference definition (reservation stage) or changed during an On
Going Conference, allowing participants to view different screen layouts of
other conference participants. These layout options provide greater flexibility
when displaying a large number of participants and help maximize the
effectiveness of the video conference.
When Continuous Presence Classic or Quad Views conferences are set to
Auto Layout, the MGC system automatically selects the conference layout
based on the number of currently connected participants in the conference.
In addition, when video participants are connected or disconnected, the
conference video layout automatically adjusts to reflect the changed number
of participants. The selected video layout is not affected by the Audio Only
participants, when they connect or disconnect to or from the conference.
The Continuous Presence - Software (Software CP) is a software solution for
IP only conferences that resembles Continuous Presence but saves video card
resources. In Software CP, only two types of video layouts are available: 2x1
and 2x2, and the Lecture Mode options are disabled.
For system requirements and a detailed description of this feature, refer to the
MGC Manager User’s Guide Volume II, Chapter 1, “Advanced Conference
Settings”.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 - MGC Manager Overview
Multiple Switching Modes
Switching between video participants can be performed using these features:
Voice activation
Operator-force via the MGC Manager to and/or the MGC
•
•
WebCommander
•
•
Selecting certain participant display windows as fixed and others as
voice-activated
Lecture Mode and Lecture Show - The lecturer is viewed in full screen
by all conference participants, while the audience is “scanned” for the
speaker’s view.
•
Presentation Mode - available in Continuous Presence conferences.
When the speaker’s presentation extends beyond a predefined time, that
speaker becomes the lecturer and the conference switches to Lecture
Mode.
You can select multiple switching options at the reservation stage or during
the On Going Conference.
IVR-Enabled Conferencing
The Interactive Voice Response (IVR) is a software module that automates
the connection process and lets participants and chairpersons perform various
operations during the On Going Conference. By combining the input of the
caller with the menu-driven scripts (DTMF codes), participants can call the
conference dial-in number and use a touch-tone telephone or the endpoint’s
remote control to interact with the conferencing system.
The Entry Queue Service is a subset of the IVR Service, and it can be used in
conjunction with IVR for routing dial-in participants. An Entry Queue
Service must be used in Ad Hoc (reservation-less) conferencing. This allows
callers to initiate an On Going Conference without prior scheduling, based on
conference parameters taken from a Profile that was assigned to the Entry
Queue. This service also enables the system to verify the participant’s right to
start an Ad Hoc conference or to join an On Going Conference. Using a set of
voice prompts, the system routes the callers from the Entry Queue to the
appropriate conference.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The IVR service enables the following operations that let operators facilitate
and manage conferencing:
•
•
Personally guide individual participants to the conference
Monitor all participants who are currently waiting in the Entry Queue
and IVR Queue regardless of their conference association
•
Assist participants in the Entry Queue, IVR queue, or during the
conference
•
•
Conduct Voting sessions
Control Question and Answer sessions
Using IVR and DTMF codes, participants and chairpersons can perform
various management operations during a conference, for example:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Request personal assistance
Request assistance for conference (Chairperson)
Lock or unlock conferences to dial- in participants (Chairperson)
Adjust the participant’s broadcasting and listening audio volume (All)
Mute or unmute the participant’s audio channel (All)
Mute all participants except the requesting participant (Chairperson)
Cancel the Exclusive Speaker mode (Chairperson)
Mute “Meet Me” dial-in participants upon their connection to the
conference (Chairperson)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change the conference password (Chairperson)
Place the conference on-hold (Chairperson)
Reinstate an on-hold conference (Chairperson)
Manage a Question-and-Answer session (Chairperson)
Conduct a Voting session (Chairperson)
Play the Help menu
Enable or disable the Roll Call feature (Chairperson)
Request a Roll Call and stop the Roll Call names review (Chairperson)
End (manually terminate) the Conference (Chairperson)
The IVR software module requires the installation of the Audio+ card in the
MCU. For a detailed description of the IVR module, refer to the MGC
Manager User’s Guide Volume II, Chapter 2.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 - MGC Manager Overview
Entry Queue
An Entry Queue is a special routing lobby to which one or several dial-in
numbers are assigned. When callers dial this number, they access this Entry
Queue where they wait to be routed and connected to the conference. The
following Entry Queue options are available:
Unattended Entry Queue
Both video and audio participants (including IP phones) connect to the Entry
Queue and, using voice prompts, are routed to their conference according to
the conference numeric ID or password (depending on the MCU
configuration) they submit. This process is automatic, unless the participant
requires help. Depending on the Entry Queue service configuration, operator
assistance may be available to all participants during the connection process.
Attended Entry Queue
Dial-in participants are personally greeted by an operator (in an Operator
conference) who accompanies them to their conference.
Ad Hoc-enabled Entry Queue
An On Going Conference is initiated from an Entry Queue that is configured
to support Ad Hoc (reservation-less) conferencing. The conference is created
according to the Profile assigned to the Ad Hoc-enabled Entry Queue.
For a detailed description of this feature, refer to the MGC Manager User’s
Guide Volume II, Chapter 3, “Ad-Hoc Conferencing and External Database
Authentication”.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Video+ Features
The Video+ board supports the following features and enhancements:
•
•
•
Ability to run conferences across Video+ cards without fragmentation
H.264, H.263 and H.261 video protocol for high quality transmission
Conference On Port (COP) mode - Continuous Presence video layouts
may be viewed by all participants while using only one video port,
increasing the number of participants in a video conference
•
•
Click&View application - an endpoint application that lets participants
select their personal video layout from their endpoints via DTMF codes
Continuous Presence video layouts for large conferences (10 or more
participants)
•
•
•
•
Improved image quality in Continuous Presence conferences
Improved latency in large Continuous Presence conferences
Choice of a personal video layout for participant
Visual effects for video display (background color, window border color
and speaker indication color)
•
•
Enhanced video quality through the use of 4CIF video resolution
Full size window for speaker view in asymmetrical Continuous Presence
layouts
Encryption
Encryption is available at the MCU conference and participant level, based on
AES 128 Media Encryption and DH 1024 Key Exchange standards.
Encryption is supported in all types of audio and video conferences with
ISDN and IP participants. ISDN and IP encrypted participants require more
resources than non-encrypted participants. Whether the participant’s
connection to a conference is encrypted or non-encrypted depends on the
encryption setting of the conference or the Entry Queue as well as on the
participant’s own encryption setting.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 - MGC Manager Overview
Conferencing Capabilities and Options
Conference Reservations Features
MGC Manager provides the following options:
•
Conferences can be reserved and scheduled ahead of time (Reservations)
or set up to start immediately (On Going Conferences)
•
•
Conference resources are defined and reserved during conference setup
Recurrent conferences can be scheduled in advance (a reservation can
include recurrent conferences)
•
•
•
The central reservations database is easily accessed
MGC Manager displays all the defined reservations for multiple MCUs
Reservation-less features: Ad Hoc conferencing and Meeting Rooms
Conference Setup Features
The following options are available when setting up conferences:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Dial-in for undefined participants
Dial-in with automatic line rate detection for defined participants
Meet Me per Conference
Meeting Rooms
Dial-out (manual or automatic)
Automatic line rate detection for undefined dial-out participants
On-demand conferencing
Entry Queue access (using one dial-in number for all conferences)
Interactive Voice Response (IVR) software module for moderated
conference access
•
Greet and Guide with manual or automatic guidance to conferences
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Conference Management and Monitoring Features
MGC Manager provides capabilities for management and monitoring of
participants and conferences, including the following:
•
Lecture Mode, Lecture Show or Presentation Mode in Continuous
Presence conferences
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Far End Camera Control (FECC/LSD) in video conferences
H.243 Cascading conferences
H.243 Chair Control for video conferences
Streaming of video and data according to endpoint type (Dual Stream)
Management and monitoring of Voting and Q&A sessions
Automatic termination of idle (no participants) conferences
Automatic extension of conference duration
Control of listening and broadcasting audio volume for individual
participants
•
•
Automatic detection and muting of noisy line participants (SilenceIT)
Auto Gain Control (AGC) noise and audio volume regulation for
individual participants
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Advanced control and greetings for attended conferences
Conference control via DTMF codes from user’s endpoint or telephone
Entry, exit and end-of-conference alert tones
Media encryption
Modification of certain conference properties
Option to add new participants during conference
Display of all defined reservations for multiple MCUs
Easily accessed Call Detail Records (CDR)
Cut, copy & paste and/or multiple drag & drop of participants
Active display of all system resources
Active display of all conferences and participants from multiple MCUs
Real-time monitoring of each participant’s connection status and
properties
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 - MGC Manager Overview
MGC Unit Advantages
The MGC unit provides the following advantages:
Connectivity
To provide the flexibility to set up multi-network conferences or to use the
MGC unit as a multi-network gateway, the MGC unit can be connected with
the following telecommunication lines:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ISDN T1 lines
ISDN E1 lines
Leased lines E1/T1
T1-CAS lines
ATM (FVC) 25 & 155 Mbit/s
IP Networks - LAN (H.323 and SIP)
V.35/RS-449/EIA-530
Serial connection (MPI)
Scalable Architecture
You can increase capacities of the MGC unit by adding ports, software
modules or other capabilities as needed, with no performance degradation or
capacity bottlenecks. All MGC ports are centrally controlled, so each port has
universal access to all system resources.
As a result, system management is simplified and resources can be used
efficiently and at a lower cost.
Reliability
The powerful telecom architecture allows the MGC unit to ensure continuous
multipoint service for all calls, even in the most rigorous conferencing
environments. The MGC architecture includes:
•
Automatic resource allocation
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
•
•
Redundant power supplies (in the MGC-100 & MGC+100 only). The
MGC-100 can be equipped with up to three load-sharing, redundant
power supplies. A fully loaded system requires only two power supplies
– the third power supply is available in the event of a failure in one of the
units
Front-accessible hardware modules for ease of maintenance (MGC-100/
MGC-50 & MGC+100/MGC+50)
Maintenance
The MGC unit offers the following advanced maintenance features that
minimize downtime and the need for human intervention:
•
On-line diagnostics that continuously monitor system and network
failures
•
Universal slot architecture that allows all functional modules to fit into
any slot (MGC-100/MGC-50 & MGC+100/MGC+50)
•
•
•
•
Front-accessible modules
Hot-swappable modules (MGC-100/MGC-50 & MGC+100/MGC+50)
Self-configuring modules
LED status lights on the front panel of all modules (MGC-100/MGC-50
& MGC+100/MGC+50), or status indications on the LCD window
(MGC-25)
•
•
Notifications to the MGC Manager to ensure fast problem isolation and
resolution
Software updates via the Internet or intranet
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 - MGC Manager Overview
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
MGC Manager Basics
The MGC Manager is a Windows-based, operator controlled interface,
installed on a user-provided PC.
Starting the MGC Manager Application
At the end of the MGC Manager software installation, the MGC Manager
application folder is added to the Programs menu, under the Start menu.
To start the MGC Manager Application:
1. Click the Start -> Programs menu.
2. Click the MGC Manager ver 7.5 folder, and then click the MGC
Manager ver 7.5 icon.
The MGC Manager main window opens.
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
The MGC Manager Main Window
When you open the MGC Manager application, the main window is
displayed.
Main Menu
Toolbars
Browser pane
Status pane
Monitor pane
Status bar
Memory
Port Indicator
Indicators
Figure 3-1: MGC Manager Main Window
You can display the Main window and any other window (such as template
lists and databases) in various ways. The MGC Manager maintains the last
display each time it is opened.
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The MGC Manager main window is divided into the following sections:
Table 3-1: MGC Manager Main Window Details
Window Item
Description
Main Menu bar
Toolbars
Displays titles of available menus.
The MGC Manager has several toolbars for performing
commonly used tasks. The toolbars are displayed in the
default positions, but can be moved (drag and drop)
anywhere in the window. The MGC Manager maintains
their last positions when the application is closed and
restarted.
Browser pane
Status pane
Displays the MCUs defined in the MGC Manager. Each
MCU tree can be expanded, to display options for setting
up and managing conferences and configuring the MCU.
Displays status information for the MCU’s cards, On Going
Conferences, Reservations, Meeting Rooms and
conference participants. It provides options for managing
conferences and the MCU cards.
Monitor pane
Status bar
Displays details of several conferences and participants
simultaneously. Enables you to view the name, type and
status of conferences or participants, and provides
management options for the monitored items.
Displays the memory utilization indicators and the
communication port between the MCU and the MGC
Manager. The P. Mem column displays the usage of RAM,
measured by Partition. The R. Mem column displays the
usage of RAM, measured by Region. The Frag column
displays the largest free consecutive buffer in the region
where MCMS is loaded.
The Port column identifies the port to which the MGC
Manager is connected. Port 80 is the default port when the
server is set to be accessed from both the local Intranet
and the Internet.
Note: These indicators are enabled if the Display MCU
Memory option (File -> Preferences) is selected.
For details, see “Showing and Hiding the Memory
Indicators” on page 3-10.
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
Additional Windows
The MGC Manager uses several windows to present information. If multiple
windows are open at a time and a window is hidden behind another one, it can
be accessed by clicking on the Window menu. For details, see “Multiple
Window Display” on page 3-12. The additional windows display Template
lists. Templates contain conference and participant settings for repeated use
when similar properties are needed.
The various template windows can be placed alongside or on top of the main
window, allowing you to work simultaneously with the template windows and
the main window. There are two categories of templates: database templates
and Polycom proprietary templates. Each category is displayed in a separate
window.
Database Template Windows
Microsoft Access or SQL databases can be used to organize conference and
participant templates. Conference templates and participant templates are
displayed in two separate windows.
•
Reservations in Database Window
The Reservations in Database window displays the list of currently
available Reservation Templates stored in the database. This window is
used to initiate On Going conferences or conferences that automatically
start at a predetermined time. This window automatically opens the first
time the MGC Manager application is started and remains open until it is
closed.
Figure 3-2: Reservations in Database Window
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
•
Participants in Database Window
The Participants in Database window displays the list of currently
available Participant Templates stored in the database. This window is
used to add participant definitions to a Reservation or to an On Going
Conference. You open this window from the Database menu.
Figure 3-3: Participants in Database Window
Polycom Proprietary Template Windows
Polycom template files are proprietary tools used for organizing templates.
The template files are organized into two types: Reservation templates files
and Participant templates files.
•
Reservation Templates File
The Reservation templates file is a repository of templates that are used
to initiate an On Going Conference or a Reservation that will
automatically start at a predefined date and time. The Reservation
Templates (ResTemplates) File window opens from the Templates menu.
Figure 3-4: Reservation Templates File Window
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
•
Participant Templates File
The Participant templates file contains all the information required to
define a participant in a conference, and is used to add participants to
conferences without having to define their parameters individually. The
Participant template (UserTemplates) file opens from the Templates
menu.
Figure 3-5: Participant Templates File Window
Participants Queue Window
The Participants Queue window contains a list of the participants who are
waiting for an Operator. This window automatically opens the first time you
start the MGC Manager, and remains open until you close it.
You can open this window manually by clicking the Participants Queue
button
on the Main toolbar.
Figure 3-6: Participants Queue Window
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
MGC Manager Window View Modes
You can change the view of the MGC Manager Main window by toggling
between the horizontal and the vertical view. When switching between the
views, you are required to restart the MGC Manager application. The default
window layout setting is the Vertical View.
Selecting the View Mode
In Horizontal View, the Browser pane is displayed along the left side of the
window, and the Monitor pane is displayed underneath it along the bottom of
the window.
Figure 3-7: MGC Manager Main Window - Horizontal View
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
In Vertical View, the Browser pane is displayed in full-length along the left
side of the window and the Monitor pane is displayed beside it, below the
Status pane.
Figure 3-8: MGC Manager Main Window - Vertical View
You can resize the Main window panes to display the information as you
choose. When the application is restarted, the panes retain the selected layout
until you change it again.
For more details, see “Resizing the Window Panes” on page 3-11.
To modify the main window view mode:
1. On the View menu, click Vertical View (if Horizontal View is displayed)
or Horizontal View (if Vertical View is displayed).
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Alternatively, on the toolbar, click the Change View Mode icon
A warning message is displayed, indicating that the MGC Manager
application must be restarted.
.
2. Click OK to restart the MGC Manager application.
When you restart the MGC Manager application, you may be required to
log on depending on your application settings if a logon record is
created. See “Connecting to an MCU” on page 3-21.
Showing and Hiding the Toolbars
By default, all toolbars are displayed below the main menu. You can show or
hide them as needed.
To show or hide a toolbar:
•
On the View menu click the name of the toolbar to show or hide.
A check mark is placed next to the toolbar name on the menu to indicate
its display, and is removed when the toolbar is hidden.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
Showing and Hiding the Status Bar
The Status bar is displayed along the bottom of the Main window by default.
To show or hide the Status bar:
•
On the View menu, click Status Bar. If the Status Bar is not currently
displayed, a check mark is placed next to Status Bar on the View menu
and the Status Bar is displayed. If the Status Bar is currently displayed,
the check mark next to Status Bar on the View menu is removed, and the
Status Bar disappears.
Showing and Hiding the Memory Indicators
The Memory Indicators are displayed in the Status bar at the bottom of the
Main window.
To show or hide the Memory Indicators:
•
On the File menu, select Preferences, and then select Display MCU
Memory. If the Memory Indicators are not currently displayed, a check
mark is placed next to the Display MCU Memory option and the Memory
Indicators are displayed. If the Memory Indicators are currently
displayed, the check mark next to the Display MCU Memory option is
removed, and the Memory Indicators disappear.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Resizing the Window Panes
The Main window is made up of three panes. Each pane can be resized
vertically or horizontally by dragging one of its sizing handles either up or
down or side to side. This feature allows you to set the pane’s size to best
display additional information. It is especially useful when you have a long
list of MCUs or when you monitor many conferences and participants.
Dragging the
Monitor pane
edge
Dragging the
Browser pane
edge
Figure 3-9: Resizing Window Panes
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
Multiple Window Display
You can display the application windows in various ways.
To change the display of multiple windows:
•
On the Window menu, click Cascade, Tile Horizontally, or Tile
Vertically.
Window
Display
Options
The open windows are displayed in the selected view as, in the Cascade
view shown in Figure 3-10:
Figure 3-10: Application Windows in Cascade View
This display enables you to view multiple windows simultaneously,
although only one window can be active at a time.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The MGC Manager Main Menu
The MGC Manager main menu bar provides the following options:
Table 3-2: MGC Manager Main Menu Options
Menu Name
Description
File
For creating or clearing a Login Record, downloading the
MCU software, displaying or hiding the MCU Memory
Indicators and exiting the application.
Edit
Used to Cut or Copy participants.
View
Allows you to display or hide the status bar, toolbars and
change the Main window View mode.
Template
Database
Directory
Allows you to create new conference or participant
templates, or open existing templates in Polycom’s
proprietary format.
Provides options for logging into the Database Manager
module and for handling conference templates and
participant templates stored in the database.
Allows you to open Public or Personal LDAP directories,
and configure the Directory setting.
Options
Window
Help
For defining the general system parameters and defaults.
For managing the currently opened window(s).
To access help.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
The MGC Manager uses several toolbars to provide quick access to functions.
These are the Main, Conference, Participant, Participants Queue, Participant
Queue Filter and Q & A toolbars.
You can hide/display each toolbar and can move each one anywhere on the
screen, even outside the MGC Manager window. For details, see “Showing
and Hiding the Toolbars” on page 3-9.
To move a toolbar to a different location:
•
Click the edge of the desired toolbar and drag it to the new location
Main Toolbar
The Main toolbar appears as follows:
Table 3-3: MGC Manager Main Toolbar Buttons
Button
Function
Description
New
Creates a new Participant or Reservation
Template file in the Polycom proprietary format.
Open
Opens an existing Participant or Reservation
Template file.
Save
Saves the changes made to a Participant or
Reservation Template file or to the database.
-
-
-
Not in use.
Not in use.
Not in use.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 3-3: MGC Manager Main Toolbar Buttons (Continued)
Button
Function
Description
Refresh
Refreshes the database to reflect all the changes
made to the database User Tables by all the
connected workstations.
-
Not in use.
About
-
Opens the MGC Manager About window.
Not in use.
Indications log Opens the Indications Log (Event Collector)
window
window that displays the events collected by the
system when the Event Indication option is
enabled.
Indications
log
configuration
Opens the Indications Configuration window
letting you configure the events that the system
displays.
Viewing
modes
Toggle to enable switching between Vertical and
Horizontal display view modes.
Participants
Queue
Opens the Participants Queue in its own window.
Conference Toolbar
The Conference toolbar is enabled when you click an On Going Conference
icon.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
The Conference toolbar contains the following buttons:
Table 3-4: Conference Toolbar Buttons
Button
Function
Description
Add New
Participant
Adds a new participant to the conference.
Lock/Un-lock
Conference
Locks or unlocks the conference to dial-in
participants.
Place/Cancel
Conference
on Hold
Places a conference on hold or reinstates a
conference that was placed on hold.
Start/stop
Voting
Starts/stops a voting session.
Terminatethe Terminates the conference.
Conference
Start
Recording
Starts a recording session.
Stops a recording session.
Stop
Recording
Participant Toolbar
The Participant toolbar is enabled when a Participant icon is clicked.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The Participant toolbar contains the following buttons:
Table 3-5: Participant Toolbar Buttons
Button
Function
Description
Mute Audio
Mutes the audio channel transmission from the
participant to the conference.
Unmute
Audio
Unmutes the audio channel transmission from
the participant to the conference.
Mute Video
Stops the video channel transmission from the
participant to the conference.
Unmute Video Restarts the video channel transmission from the
participant to the conference.
Block Audio
Blocks the audio channel transmission from the
conference to the participant.
Unblock
Audio
Restarts the audio channel transmission from the
conference to the participant.
Connect
Connects the participant to the conference.
Participant
Disconnect
Participant
Disconnects the participant from the conference.
Delete
Participant
Deletes the participant from the conference. The
conference resources are released for the use of
other participants.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
Participants Queue Toolbar
The Participants Queue toolbar is enabled when an Operator conference is
running and a Participant icon is selected.
The Participants Queue toolbar contains the following buttons:
Table 3-6: Participants Queue Toolbar Buttons
Button Function
Attend Participant
Description
Moves the participant to the Operator
conference for operator’s assistance.
Place Participant on Places the attended participant on Hold.
Hold
The participant hears an IVR message while
on hold.
Move to Home
Moves the participant to the Home
Participant Queue Filter Toolbar
The Participant Queue Filter toolbar options enable displaying the list of
participants who are waiting to be connected to the conference, according to
selected criteria. For instructions about defining a new filter see Chapter 8,
”Using Participants Queue Filters” on page 8-42.
Table 3-7: Participant Queue Filter Toolbar Buttons
Button
Function
Description
Participant Queue Lists the Participant Queue filters
Filter List currently defined in the system.
Participant Queue Opens the Participants Queue Filter
Filter
dialog box where you define a new
Participants Queue Filter.
Delete Filter
Deletes the selected Participant
Queue Filters.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Q&A Toolbar
The Q&A toolbar is enabled when you click an icon of a participant in an On
Going Conference or the icon of a participant waiting in the Q&A queue.
The Q&A toolbar contains the following buttons:
Table 3-8: Q&A Toolbar Buttons
Button
Function
Description
Clear QA
Clears all participants from the Question &
Answer (Q&A) queue.
Next
Lets the next participant in the Q&A queue ask
Questioner questions.
Add
Adds a participant to the Q&A queue.
Participant
to Q&A
Remove
Removes a participant from the Q&A queue.
Participant
from Q&A
Ask
Question
Lets the participant ask a question, even if he or
she is not next in queue.
Stop
Stops the current questioner.
Questioner
Move
Participant
to First
Moves the participant to the first place in the
Q&A queue (enabling this participant to become
the next questioner).
Position in
Q&A
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
Table 3-8: Q&A Toolbar Buttons (Continued)
Button
Function
Description
Move
Participant
to Last
Moves the participant to the last place of the
Q&A queue.
Position in
Q&A
View All/
View Only
Q&A
Displays only the participants waiting in the
Q&A queue.
Participants
Displays all the conference participants.
2/10
Q&A
The number of participants (out of the total)
waiting in the Q&A queue.
Parties out
of Total
Parties
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Connecting to an MCU
Once an MCU is defined (for details, see the MGC Administrator’s Guide,
Chapter 2), the MGC Manager can be connected to all the defined MCUs
simultaneously. This allows you to set up conferences, make reservations,
monitor On Going Conferences and perform other activities on several
MCUs.
To connect the MGC Manager to an MCU:
1. In the Browser pane, expand the MCUs Network list.
A list of MCUs appears below the MCUs Network icon.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
2. Double-click the MCU icon.
Alternatively, right-click the MCU icon and then click Connect.
The Logon dialog box opens.
Each time the MGC Manager connects to an MCU, the operator is
required to log into the MCU. In an environment with several MCUs,
this can become a tedious task. To facilitate the operator login process,
the MGC Manager creates a login record that can enable you to
automatically log in to the MCU to which you are connecting. For more
information, see “Automating the Login Process” on page 3-31.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
3. Enter your Login name and Password, and then click OK.
The connection to the MCU is initiated. The status of the MCU
connection appears in parentheses next to the MCU’s name.
Each MCU is initially configured with a default operator whose Login Name and
Password are both POLYCOM. Additional operators can be defined. For details,
see the MGC Administrator’s Guide, Chapter 6.
The possible status indicators and their icons are described in Table 3-9.
Table 3-9: MGC Connection Status Icons
Icon
Status indication
Description
Disconnected
The MGC Manager is disconnected from
the MCU.
(Gray)
Connecting
Connection in progress.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
Table 3-9: MGC Connection Status Icons (Continued)
Icon
Status indication
Description
Normal
The connection is OK and the MCU is in
the Normal state. When connected
(Normal status), a green LED in the MCU
icon is lit.
Startup
The connection is OK and the MCU is
starting up.
Resetting
Low Memory
The MCU is resetting.
The system has used up all its memory
resources. Disconnect all running
conferences and reset the MCU.
Bad Connection
Major
The connection between the MGC
Manager and the MCU is lost due to LAN
problems.
A major error occurred, such as a card
was removed from the MCU. The
exclamation point on the icon initially
appears in red and blinks. After the Fault
file is viewed to identify the error, the
exclamation point color changes to
yellow. Consult your system
administrator.
Minor
A minor error occurred. The exclamation
point on the icon initially appears in red
and blinks. After the Fault file is viewed to
identify the error, the exclamation point
color changes to yellow. Consult your
system administrator.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Using Default Templates to Start a Conference
Reservation Templates
A Reservation template includes the conference parameters, such as the
conference media (audio, video), video session, line rate, video protocol and
other video parameters, IVR and more. The reservation may include the
conference participant parameters.
Default Reservation Templates
Five default Reservation templates are installed with the MGC Manager:
•
•
•
•
•
Default-Audio: Audio Only with Default IVR service
Default_COP: Conference On Port at 384 Kbps
Default_Video: Continuous Presence Conference at 384 Kbps
SW CP: Software Continuous Presence (H.323 only) at 384 Kbps
Video-Switch: Video Switching at 384 Kbps
In order to run a Default_Video or Default_COP conference, the Video+ card
and the MGC Manager version 5.6 or later must be installed in your system.
When you first start the MGC Manager application, the Reservations in
Database window automatically opens listing the Default group on the
Groups tree.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
Figure 3-11 shows the default Reservations in Database window.
Figure 3-11: Reservations in Database Window
You can push or drag the Main window sizing handle to make the window
smaller and display the Reservations in Database window beside or beneath the
Main window.
The MGC Manager automatically displays the Reservations in Database
window when starting the MGC Manager application every time the
application opens, unless you close Reservations Database window. It will
not automatically reopen unless you manually open it and leave it open. You
can access the Reservations Database window by clicking Reservations in
AccordDB from the Window menu.
Using the default Reservation templates, you can schedule a conference to
start immediately (On Going Conference), or to start automatically at a
predefined date and time (Reservation).
To start an On Going Conference from a default Reservation template:
1. Connect to an MCU.
If the Reservations in Database window is hidden behind other
windows, display it on top of the MGC Manager Main window: On the
Window menu, click Reservations in <database name>.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The Reservations in Database window is displayed.
2. Right-click the icon of the Reservation template you want to use to start
the conference, and then click Start Immediately.
If there are several MCUs connected to the same MGC Manager, you
also need to select the MCU to host the conference.
An On Going Conference is created and added to the list of On Going
Conferences. You can monitor the status of the conference and its
participants as described in Chapter 5 of this guide.
For more information on Database templates and Groups, see the MGC
Manager User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 7, “Database Templates”.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
Viewing Conference Lists
Each MCU has three conference lists assigned to it. All conferences that are
currently running are detailed in the On Going Conferences list. All
conference reservations defined on the MCU are stored in the Reservations
list. “Passive” conferences, which are activated when the first participant
connects to the conference, are listed under Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues &
SIP Factories.
Before performing the following procedures, connect to the MCU whose
conference lists you want to display.
To view an MCU’s list of On Going Conferences:
1. In the Browser pane, expand the MCU tree to display its options.
2. Double-click the On Going Conferences icon, or click the plus [+] icon
next to the On Going Conferences icon.
All currently running conferences are listed below the On Going
Conferences icon. Each conference is identified by an icon and a name.
On first entry, or if no conferences are running, the On Going
Conferences list is empty.
To view an MCU’s list of reserved conferences:
1. In the Browser pane, expand the MCU tree to display its options.
2. Double-click the Reservations icon, or click the plus [+] icon next to the
Reservations icon.
A list of reserved conferences is displayed below the Reservations icon.
Each reservation is identified by an icon and a name. For recurrent
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
reservations, the name is followed by a number identifying the
reservation occurrence.
To view an MCU’s list of Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues and SIP
Factories:
1. In the Browser pane, expand the MCU tree to display its options.
2. Double-click the Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues & SIP Factories icon, or
click the plus [+] icon next to the Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues and SIP
Factories icon.
A list of Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues and SIP Factories is displayed
below the Meeting Rooms icon. Each Meeting Room, Entry Queue or
SIP Factory is identified by an icon and a name.
If no Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues or SIP factories were defined, the
list is empty.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
Disconnecting an MCU
To disconnect the MGC Manager from an MCU:
1. In the Browser pane, right-click the MCU icon and then click
Disconnect.
A dialog box appears prompting you to confirm the disconnection.
2. Click OK to disconnect.
The MCU status indicator disappears from the Browser pane, and the
MCU icon is disabled.
Disconnecting the MGC Manager from an MCU does not change any MCU
settings - it merely terminates your access to the MCU, so you cannot view or
affect its contents.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Automating the Login Process
Each time the MGC Manager connects to an MCU, the operator is required to
log in to the MCU. This becomes tedious when the operator connects and
disconnects from several MCUs regularly.
The Create Login Record option allows you to define your Login Name and
Password. The definition remains in place until the Clear Login Record
option is selected. Using the Login Record, you will not be asked to enter
your Login Name and Password each time you connect to an MCU.
The Clear Login Record option deletes the last login record. The next time
you connect to an MCU you will be required to enter your name and
password
The same Login Record is used for all MCUs. If you have different login names
and/or passwords on different MCUs, you may need to use the Clear Login
Record option before attempting a connection using your own login name and
password.
To create a login record:
1. On the File menu, click Preferences, and then click Create Login
Record.
The Logon dialog box appears.
2. Type your Login name and Password, and then click OK.
You will not be prompted to supply your user Login Name and Password
whenever you connect to an MCU until you clear the Login Record.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
To clear a login record:
You may need to disable your login record in order to maintain site security,
for instance, when you go home after a day’s work.
•
In the File menu, click Preferences, and then click Clear Login Record.
The Login Record is cleared. You will now be prompted to supply your
Login Name and Password whenever you connect to an MCU unless you
create a new Login Record.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Templates Database
The MGC Database allows you access to Conference and Participant
templates stored in the database. These templates are used to schedule
conferences and add participants to conferences without having to define their
parameters repeatedly. By default, you are automatically logged into the
database. This enables you to access these templates. However, if you logged
out, you need to log in again.
To log in to a database:
1. On the DataBase menu, click Login.
The Database Login dialog box opens.
The Login Name field displays the login name that was previously used.
The first time you log in (or whenever the registry is empty), the login
used to log into Windows will be automatically referenced when
accessing the database.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
2. If required, type your Login Name.
The following default login names and passwords are defined in the
database:
Table 3-10: Database Default Login Names and Passwords
User Name
Password
Permission Type
POLYCOM
ACCORD
admin1
oper1
POLYCOM
ACCORD
123
Administrator
Administrator
Administrator
Operator
123
user1
123
Moderator
user2
123
Moderator (Monitoring only)
Participant
Part1
123
These users differ in the functions they are allowed to perform (applies
mainly to the Database Manager and the WebCommander applications
but not to MGC Manager functionality), the Groups to which they are
assigned and the information they can access. For a description of the
default permissions, see the MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II,
Chapter 6, “Logging into the Database Manager”.
3. In the Password field, enter your password.
4. Select the Create Login Record check box to define your login name
and password for the session.
The Create Login Record option allows you to automate the Login
process. The name and password you enter here become the default login
and you will not be asked to enter them each time you connect to a
database.
5. Click OK.
The Database Login dialog box closes.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
6. On the Database menu, click either Open D.B Reservation Template or
Open D.B Participant Template, and then select the database you want
to work with. (The system lists all databases you are entitled to work
with according to your database Login Name and Password.)
The window of the selected database opens.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
Loading the User Defined Default Set to the MGC
Manager Application
User Defined fields in the Conference Properties and Participant Properties
dialog boxes allow you to add general information about the conference or the
participant. These fields are also included in the CDR file, which is used for
reporting and billing purposes. You can define the titles of the User Defined
fields in the MGC Database Manager -> User Defined Defaults. For more
details, see the MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 6, “Defining
User Defined Defaults”.
To view/hide the User Defined fields in the Conference and Participant
Properties dialog boxes and to load their titles you need load the Defaults to
the MGC Manager.
To load the Database Manager Global Defaults to the MGC Manager:
•
In the MGC Manager window, on the Database menu, click Load
Defaults from DB and then click Load Global Defaults to load the
Defaults.
The Global Defaults set is now loaded and active in the MGC Manager
and a check mark appears next to the Load Global Defaults option in the
Load Defaults from Database menu.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
To load the Database Manager Private Defaults to the MGC Manager:
1. In the MGC Manager window, on the Database menu, click Load
Defaults from DB, and then click Load Private Defaults to load the
Defaults.
The Database Login window opens.
2. Enter your Login Name and Password and click OK.
The Defaults set assigned to the user who is logged in is now loaded and
active in the MGC Manager, and a check mark appears next to the Load
Private Defaults option in the Load Defaults from Database menu.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
Commands Shortcut Keys
Shortcut keys can be configured to quickly accomplish tasks you perform
frequently. For example, pressing <CTRL> + <D> terminates an On Going
Conference. For more details, see the MGC Administrator’s Guide,
Chapter 5.
The following table lists the default shortcut keys available in the MGC
Manager application.
Table 3-11: Command Shortcut Keys
Shortcut Keys
Function
<Alt> + <C>
<Ctrl> + <N>
<Ctrl> + <O>
<Ctrl> + <S>
Clears the participants listed in the Q&A queue.
Creates a new Participant or Reservation Template file.
Opens a Participant or Reservation Template file.
Saves a Participant or Reservation Template file, or saves
changes to the database.
<Ctrl> + <C>
Copies the On Going Conference, Reservation, Entry
Queue or Meeting Room properties to the clipboard or
copies the participant’s properties to the clipboard.
<Ctrl> + <X>
<Ctrl> + <V>
Copies the conference or participant properties to the
clipboard while deleting the original item.
Pastes participant properties from the clipboard into an On
Going Conference, Reservation, Conference Template
(template file or database) or Participant Template
(template file or database).
Pastes Conference properties from the clipboard to On
Going Conferences list, Reservations list, Entry Queue list,
Meeting Room list or Reservations database.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 3-11: Command Shortcut Keys (Continued)
Shortcut Keys
Function
<Ctrl> + <P>
Pastes participant properties from the clipboard into an On
Going Conference, Reservation or Conference Template,
while opening the Participant Properties dialog box for
modification of the participant’s settings.
Pastes conference properties from the clipboard to On
Going Conferences list, Reservations list, Entry Queue list,
Meeting Room list or Reservations database or Template
file, while opening the Conference Properties dialog box
for modification of the conference settings.
<Ctrl> + <R>
Connects/reconnects a participant to an On Going
Conference.
<Ctrl> + <T>
<Ctrl> + <M>
<Ctrl> + <U>
<Ctrl> + <I>
Disconnects a participant from the On Going Conference.
Mutes a participant audio channel.
Unmutes a participant audio channel.
Sets a participant’s Connection Type to dial-in.
<Ctrl> + <A>
Sets a participant’s Connection Type to dial-out.
<Shift> + <F1> or
Accesses the relevant Help topic.
<F1>
<F2>
<F3>
<F4>
<F5>
<F6>
<F8>
Moves a participant to the Operator conference for
assistance.
Moves a participant from the Operator conference to the
destination (Home) conference.
In the Attended Participant dialog box, the operator can
place a participant on hold.
In the Attended Participant dialog box, the operator can
move a participant to a selected conference.
In the Attended Participant dialog box, places a participant
next in line for operator attention.
Adds a new participant to an On Going Conference,
Reservation or Meeting Room.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - MGC Manager Basics
Table 3-11: Command Shortcut Keys (Continued)
Shortcut Keys
Function
<F9>
Refreshes the database.
<F10>
Temporarily moves the Operator to the conference for
short announcements and assistance. (Operator Join)
<F11>
Ends the Operator’s temporary connection to the
conference and returns to the Operator conference. (End
Operator Join)
<F12>
<Del>
Moves the next participant in line from the Participants
Queue to the Operator conference for assistance.
Terminates an On Going Conference, or deletes a
Reservation, Meeting Room, Participant or any template.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Setting Up Conferences
Defining new conferences is one of the major tasks to perform in the MGC
Manager. The system allows you to flexibly set up any type of Audio Only
or video conference. This chapter describes the process of defining Standard
On Going video conferences. For information about Audio Only
conferences, see the MGC Manager User’s Guide, VoicePlus Edition,
Chapter 2, “Defining Standard Audio Only Conferences and Reservations”.
This chapter presents:
•
A detailed overview that describes the available types, options and
parameters of the conferences supported by the MGC unit
•
•
Participant roles, connection types, access and definition parameters
A step-by-step description of the On Going video conference definition
using basic options
•
•
A description of the On Going video conference definition using
advanced video options
A step-by-step description of participant definition and options
according to the connection protocol (ISDN, H.323, SIP, ATM, T1-
CAS, and MPI)
•
Monitoring and resolving of scheduling conflicts
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
About Conferences
MGC Manager provides several methods to set up and schedule different
kinds of conferences to suit many different needs. The following scheduling
methods are available:
•
On Going Conferences - for setting up conferences that start
immediately.
•
•
Reservations - for scheduled and recurrent conferencing.
On-demand Conferences - Meeting Rooms and Ad-hoc enabled Entry
Queues for unscheduled or on-demand conferencing.
Each method is represented in the MCU tree by an appropriate entry or icon.
When you define a conference, you select the appropriate conference type.
The following conference types are available:
•
•
•
Standard - a scheduled On Going Conference or Reservation that runs
once and is deleted from the system once it ends.
Meeting Room - a conference that is defined once and used many times
for unscheduled or on-demand conferencing.
Operator Conference - a conference managed by a designated operator
and used to assist participants.
For each conference you specify whether participants connect to the
conferencing system by dialing in to the conference or by having the
conferencing system (MCU) dial out to the participant. For dial-in
connections, you have to define whether a single dial-in number will be used
for all dial-in connections or a different dial-in number will be assigned to
each conference or each participant.
In addition to the dialing method, you must define whether the conference is
accessed by means of an Entry Queue, a conference Interactive Voice
Response (IVR), or by accessing the conference directly, and whether the
conferencing service level is Operator Attended or Unattended.
When defining a conference, you select the media resources (Audio Only or
Video & Audio), the parameters which determine the quality of the
transmission over these media, and the operations that can be performed
during the conference.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Conference Scheduling Methods
The system supports both scheduled and on-demand conferences. Reservation
Templates containing conference parameters can be used to schedule
conferences saving the need to repeatedly define new similar conferences
(with the same parameters). Different templates can be defined for specific
conference settings.
Scheduled Conferences
Scheduled conferences are arranged ahead of time and are assigned a
telephone number and password for dial-in participants. You can schedule via
the MGC Manager application or using the browser based WebCommander
application, or via Microsoft Outlook using the MGC Personal Scheduler
Add-on.
On Going Conferences
An On Going Conference is a conference that starts immediately or when the
scheduled reservation date and time is reached. An On Going Conference can
be started in one of the following ways:
•
•
•
By applying the On Going Conferences — New Conference definition
From a Reservation Template (immediately)
When the starting date and time scheduled in a Reservation is reached
Reservations
Reservations are conferences scheduled to start in the future. Reservations are
defined using the same parameters as On Going Conferences with the
addition of the conference start date and time. You can schedule Reservations
in using of the following methods:
•
•
From Reservations — New Reservation definition
Scheduled from a Reservation Template
For a detailed description, see Chapter 9, “Conference Reservations”.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
On-Demand (Reservation-less) Conferencing
Reservation-less conferencing enables participants to immediately start and
connect to an On Going Conference from their endpoint, with no advanced
scheduling. The MGC Manager offers two methods for Reservation-less
conferencing:
•
•
Ad Hoc Conferencing
Meeting Rooms
Ad Hoc Conferencing
In Ad Hoc conferencing, participants connect to an Ad Hoc-enabled Entry
Queue. An Entry Queue is a special routing lobby to which one or several
dial-in numbers are assigned. The participants are prompted for the
destination conference Numeric ID. If no conference with a matching
Numeric ID is running, but the participant is authorized to create a
conference, the system creates a new Ad Hoc On Going Conference. The new
conference is created according to the conference parameters defined in a
Profile assigned to the Entry Queue. All other participants connect directly to
the newly created conference. In this method, the conference Profile is
created once and is used repeatedly to create numerous conferences.
This conferencing method is often used to globally enable all employees in an
organization to start On Going Conferences from their endpoints, without
having to define the conference parameters for each employee and for each
conference.
When external database authentication is configured for the Entry Queue and
for the conference, the MCU verifies with the external database whether a
conference with a specific Numeric ID may be started. This is the method
used with Windows Messenger to initiate multipoint Video or Audio Ad Hoc
conferences.
Meeting Rooms
Meeting Rooms are unscheduled conferences that are created once and can be
activated as many times as required. A Meeting Room remains in passive
mode until the first participant connects to it and activates the conference.
The conference owner who initiates the Meeting Room conference must let
the participants know the start date and time, dial-in number and the Numeric
ID of the conference so the can enter the conference. No prior scheduling of
the conference is required. When the conference ends, the conference reverts
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
from the active On Going mode to the passive Meeting Room mode until the
next activation. It remains in the MCU memory and in the Meeting Rooms
list and can be modified between activations.
This conferencing method requires that you define a Meeting Room for each
employee in your organization. This task may not be recommended or may be
impractical, for example when an organization has many employees (a large
number of potential meeting organizers). In addition, you may overload the
MCU memory when saving a large number of Meeting Rooms. There is also
a limit of 2000 reservations on the MCU.
Meeting Rooms can be defined only if the appropriate Customer Permission
defined in the “system.cfg” is installed in the MGC Manager application. For
more details, refer to the MGC Administrator’s Guide Chapter 5, “Edit
“system.cfg”, CUSTOMER_PERMISSION.”
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Conference Types
The conference types available on the MGC Manager enable you to create
conferences according to specific requirements and configurations. The
following conference types are available:
•
Standard - A standard conference includes all the audio and video
parameters. This type of conference is scheduled once, and when the
conference ends, it is deleted from the MCU. You can schedule a
recurring reservation with the same parameters for each reservation in
the series. Once defined, each of the reservations is treated as a single,
unique reservation that can be modified (except for its name) or deleted
from the MCU automatically when it ends or manually by the operator.
For a detailed description of regular and recurring Reservations, see
Chapter 9.
•
Meeting Room - A Meeting Room is a conference without resource
allocation or starting date and time, that is defined once, but can be
activated many times. A Meeting Room remains in a passive state
between activations until the first participant connects to it and activates
the conference. When activated, it operates as a Standard On Going
Conference. This is one of the reservation-less methods used in the
system for on-demand conferencing. For a detailed description, see
Chapter 7.
•
Operator - An Operator conference is a side conference that enables the
operator to assist participants, without disturbing the On Going
Conferences or being heard by other participants. The operator can move
participants from an Entry Queue, conference IVR queue, Participants
Queue, Welcome Queue (Greet and Guide), or an On Going Conference
to a private, one-on-one conversation in the Operator conference. An
Operator conference can have up to two participants only: the operator
and a participant. For a detailed description, see Chapter 8.
Both Standard and Meeting Room conferences have the same conference
parameters. The difference between them is the method by which they are
scheduled and started, and what happens to the conference once it ends.
For a description of various Lecture options that can be selected for Standard
and Meeting Room conferences, see Chapter 10, “Lecture and Presentation
Options”. Advanced video settings for both Standard and Meeting Rooms
conferences are described in the MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II,
Chapter 1, Advanced Conference Settings”.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Entry Queue
An Entry Queue is a special routing lobby to which one or several dial-in
numbers are assigned. A different Entry Queue may be defined for Video and
for Audio Only participants, or the same Video Entry Queue can be used by
all participants provided that the audio algorithm is set to G.711 (telephone
standard).
When Audio Only participants connect to the Entry Queue, they interact with
the system using touch-tone signals (DTMF codes) on their telephone device
and are guided to the conference via the audio prompts menu.
When video participants connect to the Entry Queue, they hear the same
voice prompts as the Audio Only participants and they also view a video
slide. Video participants interact with the system using their DTMF input
device - usually the endpoint’s remote control. Both audio and video
participants join the conference when they enter the appropriate conference
Numeric ID or password, depending on the MCU configuration. The Entry
Queue remains in a passive state when no participants are in the queue, but is
automatically activated when a participant dials the Entry Queue number.
•
The Entry Queue routing method (either using the conference numeric ID or
configuration file, see the MGC Administrator’s Guide, Chapter 5, “Edit
system.cfg”.
•
To use the Entry Queue without using video resources for video
connections, set the Entry Queue to Video Switching and define the target
video conference with the same video settings as the Entry Queue.
For a detailed description of Entry Queue related procedures, see Chapter 8,
“Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing”.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Participant Connection to Conference
Conference participants can have different functions: a standard participant, a
chairperson, or an operator.
Participant connection to a conference is determined by the connection type
(dial-in or dial-out), conference access mode (Entry Queue, Meeting Room or
Meet-Me Per Conference) and conference service level (Attended or
Unattended).
Participant Roles
•
Standard participant - takes part in the conference, performing
operations via the telephone or via the endpoint’s remote control using
touch-tone signals (DTMF codes). Participants can control their
broadcasting and listening volume, mute or unmute their line, request
operator’s assistance, invite new participants to the conference, vote and
ask questions. The functions that participants can perform are defined in
the DTMF table of the IVR Service assigned to the conference.
•
Chairperson - takes part in the conference but is also the meeting’s
organizer. The chairperson interacts with other participants in the same
conference, and can control the conference using a Web browser or via
DTMF codes. Chairpersons perform all the functions of the standard
participant but have additional privileges. They can start a voting
session, mute and unmute participants, invite participants to join in the
conference, designate himself/herself as the conference speaker while
muting all other participants and place the conference on hold. These
functions can be performed via DTMF codes and the Web browser. Other
functions, such as connecting and disconnecting participants, placing
participants on hold, controlling the Question and Answer queue, and
more, can be performed only via the Web browser. Functions that can be
performed using the DTMF codes, are determined in the IVR Service.
•
Operator - can perform all the chairperson’s functions and additional
operator-specific functions. The operator can control and monitor all On
Going Conferences simultaneously as well as perform general
configuration and maintenance operations, but does not have to
participate in a conference in order to control it. During On Going
Conferences, the operator can move participants from one conference to
another, assist participants who need help, terminate the conference
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
before its scheduled time and join the conference. Operators perform all
activities via the MGC Manager or the MGC WebCommander.
In conferences without an active IVR Service, no operations can be performed
during the On Going Conference by participants or chairpersons.
Participant Connection Types
Conference participants can call the conference (dial-in) or be called by the
system (dial-out) at the conference start or during the On Going Conference.
The method which participants use to connect to the conference influences
the definition of the conference and the required caller information.
A conference can include only dial-in participants, only dial-out participants
or both dial-in and dial-out participants.
Dial-out Participant
In a conference that includes only dial-out participants, each participant can
be called individually by the conferencing system and connected directly to
the conference. The connection process can be initiated manually or
automatically. In the manual mode, the operator or meeting organizer
instructs the conferencing system to call the participant. In the automatic
mode the system calls the participants one after the other. Alternatively, an
automatic dial-out mode (blast dial-out) can be performed by the system. In
this mode, the system calls all the participants and connects them to the
conference. In the manual or automatic mode, the meeting organizer/operator
defines the participant parameters - mainly his/her name and telephone
number. Usually, dial-out participants connect directly to the conference
without interaction with the IVR system.
Dial-in Participant
In a conference that includes dial-in participants, the participants can be
defined in advance and they are identified by their Calling Line Identifier
(CLI) number (ISDN) or IP address/alias (IP) once they connect to the
conference. The conference can include “anonymous”, undefined
participants. These participants were not defined by the operator/meeting
organizer prior to the conference start and are connected to the conference if
they have dialed the conference dial-in number and have entered the
appropriate password (if one was assigned to the conference). Conferences
that include “undefined” dial-in participants must be defined as Meet Me Per
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Conference, Meeting Room or a standard conference that is accessed via an
Entry Queue.
Conference Access for Dial-in Participants
A conference can be accessed by dial-in participants via an Entry Queue, a
conference IVR queue or directly.
Conference IVR
Interactive Voice Response (IVR) is an application that allows callers to
communicate with the conferencing system over the DTMF input device such
as a telephone (for audio participants) or the endpoint’s remote control (for
video participants). IVR automates the connection process and the various
requests during the On Going Conference.
Both IVR Service and Entry Queue Service can be used for attended and
unattended conferences.
To enable the participants and chairperson to perform operations during the
conference an IVR Service must be assigned to the conference.
Different IVR Services can be created, allowing customization of the menu-
driven scripts and voice prompts to meet specific needs. IVR Services are
assigned at the conference level; different conferences may use different IVR
Services, or the same IVR Service can be used for all conferences.
In IVR-enabled conferences, the caller enters the conference IVR queue as
part of the connection process. This ensures that only authorized callers join
the conference. Participants can request the operator’s help while waiting in
the conference IVR queue or during the On Going Conference. The IVR
Service also enables the participants and the conference chairperson to
perform various operations via their touch tone telephone keypad during the
On Going Conference.
Entry Queue
Entry Queue is a call routing method in which all participants dial the same
dial-in number and then they are routed to the appropriate conference
according to the conference password or conference numeric ID (depending
on the system’s configuration) they enter. Callers are guided to the conference
using menu-driven scripts that are part of the Entry Queue Service. The user
inputs touch-tone signals in response to voice prompts.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The Entry Queue Service is a subset of the IVR Service and behaves in the
same way.
IVR enabled conferences and conferences accessed via the Entry Queue require
the installation of the Audio+ card in the MCU.
Entry Queue Access
When the Entry Queue Access option is designated for an Audio Only or
Video conference, the participants connecting to that conference follow a
two-stage process:
1. Participants connect to an Entry Queue, where they are routed to their
conference in one of two ways:
—
According to the Numeric ID (NID) or conference password they
enter (depending on the MCU configuration)
or
—
Wait for the Operator’s assistance. The Entry Queue Service is set to
Attended mode (On Hold for Operator Assistance)
2. Participants are moved to the conference and connect to the conference
in one of the following ways:
—
Directly, without any additional operation from the participant’s
endpoint
—
By entering the conference IVR queue where participant is
prompted for an entry password and/or chairperson password
(depending on the IVR Service configuration). Once the participant
provides correct information, they are admitted to the conference
—
Wait for the Operator’s assistance. The IVR Service assigned to the
conference is set to attended mode (On Hold for Operator
Assistance)
Using an Entry Queue minimizes the number of dial-in numbers that are
required for the MGC unit to handle conferences and dial-in participants. In
addition, it enables service providers to advertise their services with one or
two telephone numbers that can be used for all the conferences (for example,
1-800-POLYCOM).
Entry Queues are defined separately in the MGC Manager application. For
each Audio Only or Video conference you define, you select whether it is
accessed via an Entry Queue and/or by IVR Service or directly.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
In addition, an IVR Service may be assigned to the conferences accessed
from the Entry Queue.
MCU
Conference1
Numeric ID: 1234
Password: 34567
IP Endpoint
1234
1234
1300
9251222
Network
ISDN/PSTN
Endpoint
Numeric ID: 1222
ISDN/PSTN
Endpoint
IP Network Service
Prefix - 925
Conference2
Numeric ID: 1300
Password: 71356
Figure 4-1: Conference Access via Entry Queue using Numeric ID and Conference
IVR
In Figure 4-1, one or several dial-in numbers are allocated to an Entry Queue.
In addition, a numeric ID is assigned to each conference and a conference
password and chairperson password may be defined. The dial-in number
(which is usually the same for all participants regardless of the conference
they attend), and the appropriate conference numeric IDs are communicated
to conference participants. When participants dial-in using the number
communicated to them, they connect to the Entry Queue where they are
requested to enter the appropriate conference Numeric ID. According to this
conference ID, participants are routed to the appropriate conference.
When an IVR Service is assigned to the conference, participants are guided to
the conference by voice prompts and are requested to enter the required
(conference/chairperson) password. They can also be prompted for additional
information such as their billing code.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
In Figure 4-2, one or several dial-in numbers are allocated to an Entry Queue.
In addition, a password is assigned to each conference. The dial-in number
(which is usually the same for all participants regardless of the conference
they attend), and the appropriate conference password are communicated to
conference participants.
Conference1
MCU
Numeric ID: 1234
Password: 34567
Chairperson: 89900
IP Endpoint
9251222
Network
ISDN/PSTN
Endpoint
2
2
2
1
5
2
9
Numeric ID: 1222
ISDN/PSTN
Endpoint
IP Network Service
Prefix - 925
Conference2
Numeric ID: 1300
Password: 71356
Figure 4-2: Conference Access via Entry Queue using Conference Password and
Conference IVR
When participants dial-in using the number communicated to them, they
connect to the Entry Queue where they are requested to enter the appropriate
conference password. According to this password, participants are routed to
the appropriate conference.
When an IVR Service is assigned to the conference, participants are guided to
the conference by voice prompts and are requested to enter the required
chairperson password or wait to be automatically connected to the
conference. They can also be prompted for additional information such as
their billing code.
When no IVR Service is assigned to the conference, participants are moved
directly from the Entry Queue to the conference.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Participants can be moved from the Entry Queue to the conference if Entry
Queue access is selected for the conference.
Video conferences that are accessed from an Entry Queue must have the same
video, audio and line rate settings as defined for the Entry Queue used for
accessing these conferences.
Conference IVR Access
Participants dial the conference dial-in numbers and are connected to the IVR
queue of the conference, where they have to enter the conference password
and other personal information, using touch-tone codes as input to menu
driven scripts and voice prompts that are part of the IVR Service. Once the
correct information is entered, the participants connect to the conference.
MCU
Conference1
Numeric ID: 1222
Password: 34567
IP Endpoint
9251222
Network
ISDN/PSTN
Endpoint
Conference2
Numeric ID: 1223
Password: 71356
ISDN/PSTN
Endpoint
IP Network Service
Prefix - 925
Figure 4-3: Conference Access via IVR Queue
In Figure 4-3, a dial-in number is assigned to each conference. In addition, an
IVR Service is also assigned to the conference. Callers dial in directly to the
conference. Once they reach the conference, they enter the conference IVR
queue where they are requested to enter the conference password, the
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
chairperson password (only for the meeting chairperson) and other
information using the remote control or the telephone touch-tone keypads.
•
The system can automatically allocate the conference and chairperson
passwords (depending on the MCU configuration). For more information on
system configuration, see the MGC Administrator’s Guide, Chapter 5, “Edit
system.cfg”.
•
Dial-out participants (operator dial-out or system dial-out) connecting to the
conference can also enter the IVR queue, if the IVR Service assigned to the
conference is configured to prompt dial-out participants for conference
password.
Direct Dialing and Access
Different methods can be used for dialing directly into the conference:
•
Using the MCU dial-in number and defining the participants prior to the
conference start. The MCU dial-in number is communicated to the
participants. Upon connection to the MCU, they are routed to the
appropriate conference according to their CLI number.
•
Meet Me Per Conference - Assigning a dial-in number to each
conference and defining the conference as Meet Me, allowing undefined
participants to connect to the conference.
In this mode, no IVR service is assigned to the conference and the participant
connection process is automatic.
The meeting organizer/operator assigns a dial-in phone number to each
conference designated as Meet Me Per Conference. The conference dial-in
number is given to all the conference participants who use it to directly
connect to the conference. Using this mode, any participant who dials the
conference number can connect to the conference until all the MCU resources
are utilized or the maximum number of participants is reached.
The Meet Me Per Conference is the basis for Meeting Rooms definition.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
MCU
Conference1
Numeric ID: 1222
Dial-in number: 9251222
IP Endpoint
9251222
Network
ISDN/PSTN
Endpoint
Conference2
Numeric ID: 1223
Dial-in number: 9251223
IP Network Service
Prefix - 925
ISDN/PSTN
Endpoint
Figure 4-4: Direct Conference Access
As shown in Figure 4-4, the dial-in number assigned to conference1 is
9251222 and the dial-in number assigned to conference2 is 9251223. For IP
number prefix, and the conference numeric ID was defined to match the
ISDN number allocated to the conference. Participants who dial 9251222 are
connected to conference1 and are allowed into the conference if they were
defined prior to the conference start or if the Allow Undefined Participants
option is enabled for the conference.
For a detailed description of Meet-Me per Conference and Meeting Rooms
definition, see Chapter 7.
In all conferences with “undefined” dial-in participants, the conference or Entry
Queue ISDN dial-in number may be automatically assigned by the MCU. The
number is taken from the dial-in numbers defined in the ISDN Network Service.
Conference Access for Dial-Out Participants
In Video or Audio Only conferences with no IVR Service, dial-out
participants are connected directly to the conference. In IVR-enabled Audio
Only and Video conferences or in conferences designated as Entry Queue
Access, dial-out participants enter the Entry Queue and/or IVR queue where
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
the participant may be requested to enter the conference password or any digit
to confirm the connection.
Attended and Unattended Conferences
Audio Only and Video conferences can be managed by an operator or run
unattended in which case the participants manage the conference themselves
with the meeting organizer optionally having additional privileges.
In IVR-enabled conferences, the participants or meeting organizer can control
certain aspects of the conference. Operator assistance is available upon
request.
If the Entry Queue Service assigned to the Entry Queue used for conference
access is set to attended mode (On Hold for Operator Assistance), when the
participants connect to the Entry Queue, they are automatically moved to the
Participants Queue where they wait for the operator to connect them to the
conference.
In the same way, an IVR Service can be configured to attended mode, hence
all participants connecting to the conference are automatically moved to the
Participants Queue, where they wait for the operator to connect them to the
conference.
Usually, the attended mode is configured either at the Entry Queue level or at
the conference level.
All conferences can be set as unattended or attended. The initial setting is done
in the definition of the Entry Queue Service and the IVR Service, by using the On
Hold for Operator Assistance option in the Welcome Message dialog box.
Operator Attended Conference
An Operator Attended conference is a service designed usually for large
conferences. In many attended conferences, the name and the telephone
numbers of each dial-out participant are given to the operator at the time the
reservation is made. Using the enhanced tools for attended participant
conferences, the operator or coordinator assembles the conference call,
making sure all invited participants are on hand, then sees to it that the
conference proceeds according to plan. Usually, the operator dials out to
connect participants and greets the participants when connected. However,
the names and numbers of the dial-out participants can also be defined by the
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
meeting organizer via the WebCommander application (through the
WebCommander site).
In Audio Only and Video conferences that are accessed from an Entry Queue
or have an assigned IVR Service, the operator can assist dial-in participants
by greeting and guiding them to the appropriate conference, or by helping
them join the conference if they have failed to enter the required information
(password).
Once the conference has begun, operator assistance continues to be available
upon request, by telephone keypad or other DTMF input device (e.g. remote
control). During a conference, the operator can also manage Question-and-
Answer and voting sessions, connect and disconnect participants, mute/
unmute participants, start a lecturing session, place the conference on hold
and lock/unlock the conference to dial-in participants.
However, an On Going conference can also be managed by participants or by
the chairperson without the operator’s assistance. Actions that can be
performed by the participants or the chairperson, are defined in the IVR
Service that is assigned to that conference. This type of conferencing requires
the installation of the Audio+ card in the MCU.
Participants Queue
The Participants Queue is a list of all participants waiting for the operator’s
assistance or who are on hold - in all conferences, regardless of the
conference they belong to. The Participants Queue is mainly intended for
attended conferences. Using special toolbars, command buttons and options
provided in the MCG Manager Participants Queue window, the operator can
easily move the listed participants from the Participants Queue to their
destination (On Going) conference.
Greet and Guide conference (Welcome Queue)
Greet and Guide Video conferences (with an AV Message Service assigned to
them) can either run unattended, or may be managed by an operator.
However, because no IVR Service is available, the participants or the meeting
organizer cannot control the conference from their endpoint.
For a detailed description, see the MGC Manager User’s Guide Volume II,
Chapter 2, “AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences”.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Unattended Conference
An unattended conference is usually a reservation-less conference that is
started by participants who dial-in and enter a password. This type of
conference is set up once, to be activated by the participants when required.
Although an operator is not needed for this conference, one can be on hand. In
an unattended conference, it is the conference chairperson who controls all
features and functions of the conference either via the touch-tone telephone, a
DTMF input device such as a remote control or via the Internet. Conference
participants can perform simple operations (such as muting or unmuting their
line or modifying their volume) from their touch-tone telephone or DTMF
input device. Actions that can be performed by the participants or the
chairperson, are defined in the IVR Service that is assigned to that
conference. This type of configuration requires the installation of the Audio+
card in the MCU.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Conference Media Types
Conferences can be of two media categories: Audio Only and Video and
Audio.
Audio Only Conferences
Audio Only conferences include only Audio participants and allow the use of
VoicePlus capabilities. In an Audio Only conference, participants can connect
to the conference using different network connections: PSTN/ISDN or T1-
CAS lines, cellular phones, or VoIP (H.323 or SIP). Audio only participants
can connect to conferences using VTX 1000 endpoints. VTX 1000 users
connect to conferences as audio only participants, while enjoying the same
wide band, high quality audio used by video participants.
VoicePlus offers special features such as the IVR Service, chairperson “dial-
out” inviting participants to join the On Going Conference, chairperson and
participant control of the conference via touch-tone commands (DTMF
codes), the management of voting and Question and Answer sessions, and
many more. Touch-tone commands, MGC Manager and Web controls are the
tools that are used to manage both Audio Only conferences and participants
while voice prompts are used to guide participants to the appropriate
conference. The prompts can be customized to enable multi-lingual support.
In Audio Only conference setup, only the functions, operations and icons
relevant to this type of conference are displayed in the MGC Manager, while
functions and operations relevant to video conferences are hidden and
disabled.
For detailed information about the various Audio Only conference types, see
the MGC Manager User’s Guide, VoicePlus Edition, Chapter 2, Defining
Standard Audio Only Conferences and Reservations”.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Video Conferences
Video Conferences can include both Video and Audio as well as Audio Only
participants. In a video session, participants can connect to the conference
using different network connections: ISDN, IP (H.323 and SIP), ATM and
MPI (serial connection). One conference is defined for all the interface types.
ATM, ISDN and IP usage is configured per participant, though the line rate
for all participants is defined per conference, taking into account the line rate
range and capacity available for each network and endpoint.
Video Session Types
The video session type determines the video display options (full screen or
split screen with all participants viewed simultaneously) and the method in
which the video session is processed by the MCU (whether all participants
connect using the same line rate and video parameters without using video
resources, or each one uses the endpoint's capabilities).
Video Switching
A conference in which all participants see the same picture (video). The
current speaker is displayed in full screen on all the participants' endpoints,
while the speaker sees the previous speaker. Switching between participants is
voice-activated; whenever a participant starts to speak, he or she becomes the
conference speaker and is viewed on all screens. Since this conference type
does not use video card resources, all participants in the conference must use
the same line rate and video parameters such as video protocol, frame rate,
annexes and interlaced video mode.
In Video Switching conferences, the Highest Common Mechanism can be
enabled for the video parameters. This allows the system to select the best
video parameters that can be supported by all the endpoints currently
connected to the system, and to dynamically change them when a new
endpoint joins or leaves the conference.
Transcoding
A conference in which participants can use different line rates and video,
audio and data formats while maintaining the highest video and audio
capabilities that they can achieve with their endpoints. As in Video Switching
sessions, the current speaker is displayed in full screen on all the participants'
endpoints and switching between participants is voice-activated. Because
each video participant is connected using the highest possible video quality,
this conference type requires appropriate video card resources for processing
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
inputs from the different endpoints. Transcoding is performed on the
following parameters: line rate, restricted/non-restricted, audio algorithm,
video format, video frame rate, aggregation mode (Bonding/H.221) and
different data rates.
Continuous Presence (CP)
A conference in which several participants can be viewed simultaneously. In
this type of session, each connected endpoint uses its highest video, audio and
data capabilities. This session type also enables special video layouts to be
selected for viewing the conference participants. The following categories of
video layout options are available: Classic, Quad Views and Software.
In Classic Continuous Presence conferences there are 21 basic layout options
available to display participants. Each participant uses a different video port
on the video card. This method enables such features as full Transcoding per
participant, Personal Layout (selection of Continuous Presence layout per
participant) and maintenance of overall video and audio quality for the
conference - even when participants with lower capabilities connect.
However, in the Continuous Presence-Classic video session, the number of
participants in a conference is limited by the type of video cards installed in
the MCU and by the total number of ports.
In Continuous Presence-Quad Views sessions, additional layouts intended for
large conferences (10+ participants) are available for selection. This mode is
available only with the Video+ card.
In Software Continuous Presence conferences, only two types of video layout
formats are available for selection: 2x1 and 2x2. If the conference includes
fewer than 5 participants, one of the layout windows is grayed out. Software
CP is a software solution for IP Only conferences that use fewer video card
resources by combining four incoming QCIF streams with fixed video bitrate
from four different participants into one outgoing CIF stream.
For a detailed description of CP conferences, see the MGC Manager User's
Guide, Volume II, Chapter 1, “Advanced Settings”.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Video Conference Parameters
The basic parameters that define the quality of a video conference are:
•
Line Rate - The transfer rate of video and audio streams. The higher the
line rate, the better video quality that can be viewed. In Video Switching
rate, therefore the participant with the lowest line rate connection
determines the line rate for the conference.
For more information, see “Conference Settings” on page 4-44.
•
•
Audio Algorithm - The audio compression algorithm determines the
quality of the conference audio. Several algorithms are available for
selection.
For more information, see “Conference Settings” on page 4-44.
Video protocol, video format, frame rate, annexes, and interlaced
Setting the video protocol to H.263 results in a better image quality than
using H.261, and H.264 protocol provides better compression of video
images in line rates lower than 384 Kbps. However, not all endpoints
support H.263, or H.264, therefore in a Video Switching session which
requires that all participants use the same video protocol, video format
and frame rate, it is the endpoint that supports the lowest video quality
that dictates the video settings for the conference.
For more information, see “Conference Settings” on page 4-44.
•
Video Sources - In Continuous Presence conferences you can select the
layout of the video windows and force participants to specific windows
in the layout. In addition, visual effects for the displayed video windows
(such as frames, frame color and background color) can be selected.
Visual effects are available only for conferences running on the Video+
card.
For more information, see “Video Sources” on page 4-71.
Additional video settings can be configured for video conferences to allow
greater customization and options during video conferences.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Highest Common Mechanism
In Video Switching conferences, the Highest Common mechanism enables
the MCU to select the optimal video parameters for the conference according
to the highest video capabilities that are common to all the endpoints
participating in the conference.
The selected common video is dynamically adjusted with each participant
connection to or disconnection from the conference. The Highest Common
mechanism is available with both H.320 and H.323 endpoints, but is not
available with SIP endpoints.
The Highest Common mechanism improves the connectivity between
endpoints, eliminates Secondary connections, and facilitates Entry Queue
Access and participant’s moves during conferences.
The Highest Common mechanism is enabled in the Conference Properties -
Settings dialog box by setting the basic video parameters to Auto.
The Highest Common mechanism in Video Switching conferences supports:
•
•
•
•
•
Video Protocol (including H.263 and H.264)
Video Format
Frame Rate
H.263 Annexes (N, F, T and I)
ProMotion (NTSC or PAL Interlaced Video)
The Highest Common mechanism does not support the following options:
•
Cascading conferences. The Highest Common mechanism is disabled in
Cascading conferences. When defining a Cascading conference, all the
cascaded conferences must be set to the same video protocol.
•
•
H.264*/H.264L video protocols. Only the standard H.264 video protocol
is supported with the Highest Common mechanism.
Dual Stream Mode - People & Content V0 and Visual Concert PC & FX.
For a detailed description of Cascading conference options, see “Defining
Cascading Conferences” in the MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II,
Chapter 1, “Advanced Conference Settings”.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Additional Video Conference Types
Video conference settings can include additional features, for example to
increase the number of participants in a single conference or to allow
application sharing during the conference.
Conference On Port (COP)
In a Conference On Port, all participants use a single video port for the
conference. This enables the selection of a video layout for the conference but
all the participants, including the speaker, view the same layout and the same
participants. Personal layout selection is not available in COP and the video
quality is determined by the highest common video parameters and by the
video line rate.
In order to maintain a minimum video quality for a Conference On Port, there
connect with video. This minimum threshold line rate is determined
according to the conference Line Rate. For example, in a conference defined
with a Line Rate of 768 Kbps, a participant with a line rate of 128 Kbps will
connect as Secondary (Audio Only), in order to preserve the video quality of
the conference.
The minimum line rates necessary to connect to a Conference On Port are
listed in Table 4-1. Participants attempting to connect at rates below the
minimum threshold are connected as Secondary (Audio Only).
Table 4-1: Conference On Port Line Rate - Minimum Thresholds
Defined Conference Minimum Participant Line Rate Necessary for
Line Rate (in Kbps)
Video Connection (in Kbps)
128
Participants will connect with video if a video session
can be established.
256
384
512
768
1920
128
128
256
384
768
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Conference On Port setting is suitable for large Continuous Presence
conferences (up to 128 participants for a single video card) for which you do
not have enough available video resources or if several Continuous Presence
conferences are running on the MCU at the same time and you do not have
enough video resources to run all of them simultaneously.
Conference On Port guidelines:
•
•
•
•
Limited to 128 participants with a single video card
Available only with the Video+ card
Lecture Show function is disabled
Not available with Cascading conferences
Dual Stream Mode
In this mode, the endpoint sends two separate video streams: video and data.
The video streams are treated differently by the endpoint, and may be shown
on separate screens. Depending on the endpoints that send and receive the
video streams, the following dual stream modes are available:
•
•
•
•
H.239/People+Content
People and Content V0
Polycom Visual Concert (PC/FX)
Duo Video
For a detailed description of Dual Stream Mode video conferences, see the
MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 1, “Advanced Conference
Settings”.
Lecture Mode
lecturer is the only one seen by all the other participants throughout the
conference, in full screen. Lecture Mode enables automatic switching
between the conference participants in the speaker window, allowing the
conference speaker to see all the other conference participants (one
participant after the other or all of them in a Continuous Presence layout).
For a detailed description of Lecture options that can be set in a video
conference, see Chapter 10, “Lecture and Presentation Options”.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Cascading
Cascading enables users to run conferences that are distributed among two or
more conferences and MCUs. A participant who dials from one MCU to
another establishes the link between the conferences.
The conferences that are part of a cascading conference may be run:
•
on the same MCU, to overcome the maximum number of participants per
conference
•
on separate MCUs, to utilize additional resources or connect participants
to their local MCU
In addition, you can enable H.239 People+Content dual stream mode
conferences with H.323 cascading.
The Highest Common mechanism is disabled in Cascading conferences. When
defining a Cascading conference, all the cascaded conferences must be set to
the same video protocol.
For a detailed description of Cascading conference options, see “Defining
Cascading Conferences” in the MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II,
Chapter 1, “Advanced Conference Settings”.
For information about H.243 and MIH Cascading conferencing, see the MGC
Manager User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 5.
H.243 Chair Control
Chair Control enables an endpoint to control the conference and other
conference participants. This (Chairperson) endpoint that has control over the
conference, can perform the following operations:
•
•
Disconnect participants
Video Force – select the endpoint to be seen by other participants. Only
one participant can be selected – this participant is displayed in the top
left window
•
Terminate the conference
For information about H.243 Chair Control conferences, see the MGC
Manager User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 5, “H.243 Chair Control”.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
LSD (Low Speed Data) - FECC (Far End Camera Control)
Using certain video cameras and their accompanying software, a participant
can control a far-end camera.
For a detailed description of the LSD and FECC options for video
conferences, see the MGC Manager User’s Guide Volume II, Chapter 1
“Advanced Conference Settings”.
Greet and Guide Conference
Greet and Guide settings are used with an attended conference that has an AV
Message Service assigned to it, to enable the operator to move participants
from one stage to another during their connection to the conference. An AV
Message Service is a set of audio messages (two per Message Service) and a
video slide assigned to a conference. This set is activated when a participant
connects to an attended conference to which the set is assigned.
Greet and Guide conferences are run on the standard Audio card. If an
Audio +card is installed in your MCU, you can use the IVR-enabled
conferencing.
The two types of the Greet and Guide - Attended conference are:
•
Welcome (No Wait) conference
The participant is greeted by a video slide and the audio message when
connecting to the conference. After a predefined period, the participant
automatically connects to the conference without the operator’s
assistance.
•
Attended (Wait) conference
The participant is greeted by the video slide and by the audio message,
and then waits for the operator’s assistance in the Participants Queue.
For more details see the MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II,
Chapter 2, “AV Message Services and Greet and Guide Conferences”.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
T.120 Conference
The MGC Manager enables you to define conferences using the T.120
standard that contains a series of protocols and specifications for application
sharing in multi point data communications. The following options are
available, depending on the participant equipment and software:
•
Application sharing allowing two or more conference participants to
work on the same document/application even if only one participant has
the application. In application sharing, one participant launches the
application and it runs simultaneously on all the other computers.
•
•
File transfer to all conference participants.
Chat or “Whiteboard” in which participants communicate with each
other by writing.
In all these modes, the participants can view and hear each other.
For more information on advanced video settings, see the MGC Manager
User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 1, “Advanced Conference Settings”.
Media Encryption
Encryption is available at the conference and participant level, based on AES
128 Media Encryption and DH 102 Key Exchange standards.
For detailed information on encryption, see the MGC Manager User’s Guide
Volume II, Chapter 1, “Media Encryption”.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Conference Types by Media
Table 4-2 details the conference and session types according to Audio and
Video media options.
Table 4-2: Conference Types by Media
Media
Conf Type
Network
Session Type
Availability
Audio
Standard and All:
Audio Only
Available for ISDN
and IP.
Requires an MGC
unit equipped with
an Audio+ card.
Meeting
Room
ISDN, ATM,
MPI, T1- CAS,
IP
IP only
Audio Only
Audio Only
Operator
All:
ISDN, ATM,
MPI, T1- CAS,
IP
IP only
Audio Only
Video
Standard and All:
Video conferences
connect T1-CAS
endpoints as Audio
Only.
• Video
Meeting
Room
ISDN, ATM,
MPI, T1- CAS,
IP
Switching
• Transcoding
• Continuous
Presence
— Classic
— Quad
Views
IP only
Software CP is
available for IP only
conferences.
• Video
Switching
• Transcoding
• Continuous
Presence
— Classic
— Quad
Views
— Software
Operator
All:
Transcoding
Video conferences
connect T1-CAS
endpoints as Audio
Only.
ISDN, ATM,
MPI, T1- CAS,
IP
IP only
Transcoding
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Conference Media Type According to MCU Configuration
The functional modules installed in the MCU determine the conferences that
can be run by the MCU.
Table 4-3 lists the currently available conference types and functionalities as
applicable to specific MCU configurations.
Table 4-3: Conference Types According to MCU Configuration
Available
Conference
Types
MCU Configuration
Functionality
Audio Only
• Audio+
• Net-2/4/8 ISDN
card
• Enables Standard/Meeting Rooms/
Meet Me Per Conference Audio Only
conferences
• IVR enabled features
• Entry Queues
• IP card (optional)
• Enables ISDN and PSTN participants
• Enables VoIP (H.323) participants
if an IP card is installed (SIP
participants require installation of an
IP+ card)
Audio Only
• Audio+
• Net-2/4/8 ISDN
card
• Enables Standard/Meeting Rooms/
Meet Me Per Conference Audio Only
conferences
• Enables IVR features
• Entry Queues
• Enables ISDN,T1-CAS and PSTN
participants
• Net-2/4/8 T1-CAS
card (optional)
• IP card (optional)
• Enables VoIP (H.323) participants if
an IP card is installed
(SIP participants require installation
of an IP+ card)
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-3: Conference Types According to MCU Configuration (Continued)
Available
Conference
Types
MCU Configuration
Functionality
Video and Audio
• Audio
• Video
• Net-2/4/8 ISDN
card
• Enables Standard/Meeting Rooms/
Meet Me Per Conference Video
conferences
• Enables ISDN and PSTN participants
• Enables VoIP (H.323) participants
(SIP participants require installation
of an IP+ card)
• IP card
• MUX card
• No IVR-enabled features
• No Entry Queues
• No Video+ capabilities
• No encryption capabilities
Audio Only
Video and Audio
• Audio+
• Video+
• Net-2/4/8 ISDN
card
• IP card
• Enables Standard/Meeting Rooms/
Meet Me Per Conference Video
conferences
• Enables VoIP (H.323) participants
(SIP participants require installation
of an IP+ card)
• MUX card
• IVR-enabled features
• Audio Only and Video Entry Queues
• COP conferences
• Video+ capabilities
• No encryption capabilities
Audio Only
Video and Audio
• Audio+
• Video+
• Net-2/4/8 ISDN
card
• Enables Standard/Meeting Rooms/
Meet Me Per Conference Video
conferences
• Enables VoIP (H.323) participants
• Enables SIP participants
• IVR-enabled features
• Audio Only and Video Entry Queues
• COP conferences
• IP+ card
• MUX+ card
• Video+ Capabilities
• Encryption capabilities
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
•
IVR-enabled Video conferences and Entry Queue Access conferences
require the installation of the Audio+ card in the MCU.
•
Video Continuous Presence conferences are routed to the Standard Video
card. The operator can change this selection manually when setting up
the conference, in the Conference Properties - Resource Force dialog
box. See “To modify the automatic card selection by the MCU:” on
page 4-83.
•
•
Video Continuous Presence conferences set to Quad Views and COP
conferences with or without any visual effects, and Continuous Presence
conferences with visual effects, are all routed to the Video+ card.
Video conferences that run on MCUs that include both the Standard
Audio and the Audio+ cards, use the Standard Audio card by default
unless an IVR service is assigned to the conference. In that case, the
conference is run on the Audio+ card.
•
Running Video Switching conferences on the Standard Audio card limits
the maximum number of participants in a conference to 16 (12 video and
4 audio-only). The operator can increase the number of participants up to
30, by setting the Audio Bridge component of the standard Audio card to
1/30 in the “system.cfg”. For more details, see the MGC Manager User’s
Guide, Volume II, Chapter 1, “Advanced Conference Settings”.
•
•
Audio Only conferences are automatically routed to the Audio+ card, to
enable the IVR functionality.
With the Audio+ card, up to 100 participants at 128 Kbps can connect to
one Video Switching conference, without special configuration.
•
•
The Audio+ 12/24, 24/48 and 48/96 cards support T1-CAS participants.
Video conferences that run on MCUs with a Video+ card, have
additional features such as Quad Views, Visual Effects, and activation of
the Click&View application on the participant endpoint’s screen.
•
•
Operator conferences can run on both Standard Audio and Audio+ cards
depending on the type of conference that is managed by the operator.
IVR-enabled conferences use the Audio+ card while AV (Welcome/
Attended) conferences use the Standard Audio card. The Operator
conference should be set according to the installed card capabilities.
Encrypted conferences require MUX+ cards.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Defining On Going Conferences
You can reserve a conference in advance or request to start a conference as
scheduled reservation date and time is reached and the conference is
automatically activated.
•
•
•
Defining new Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms is described in
Chapter 7.
Defining new Entry Queues and Operator conferences is described in
Chapter 8.
Defining new Reservations is described in Chapter 9.
Preparatory Tasks
Before you start setting up a new conference, it is recommended to check the
dial-in numbers defined in the ISDN Network Service, the IP Service Prefix
defined in the IP Network Service (for H.323 dial in) and the participants’
endpoint connection parameters (dial number and video capabilities).
Defining a New Audio Only Conference
For the description of the Audio Only conferences definition, see the MGC
Manager User’s Guide, VoicePlus Edition, Chapter 2, “Defining Standard
Audio Only Conferences and Reservations”.
If the Audio Look and Feel mode is set for the system, the conference properties
and defaults are automatically set to Audio Only and the video parameters are
hidden. The Audio Look and Feel mode is set in the MGC Manager Options
menu. For more details, refer to the MGC Administrator’s Guide, Chapter 5.
If Audio Look and Feel is not set for the conference, selecting Audio Only in the
Media box causes the conference properties to display only audio related
parameters and hide the video properties as in Audio Look and Feel mode.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Defining a New Video Conference
The following procedure describes how to define a new video conference that
starts immediately.
To define a new On Going video conference:
1. Connect to an MCU and expand its options tree. For details, see
Chapter 3, “MGC Manager Basics”.
2. Right-click the On Going Conferences icon, and then click New
Conference.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
The Conference Properties - General dialog box opens.
The conference properties are logically grouped in the following tabs:
•
•
•
•
General—lets you define the basic conference parameters, such as name,
duration, password and type of access. Here you also define the
conference type, media, network and type of video session.
Settings—lets you define the conference video options, such as COP,
FECC, Encryption, cascading and more, as well as the media technical
parameters, such as line rate, audio algorithms, and video options.
Participants—lets you set options for participant connections, and add
participants from the Participants database/templates, or define new
participants.
Video Sources—lets you select the preferred video display and layout
when the video session is Continuous Presence (not applicable with other
types of video session) and to enable the Lecture Mode (not applicable
with Continuous Presence-Software).
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
•
Resource Force—lets you view and select the Audio and Video resources
to run the conference according to the available MCU resources. If your
MCU contains both standard Audio and Audio+ cards and standard
Video and/or Video+ cards, you can select the Audio card type and/or the
Video card type to run the conference.
•
•
Recording—lets you define recording options for the current conference.
Meet Me per Conference—lets you define Meeting Rooms and Meet Me
Per Conference reservation templates. Enabled only when the Meet Me
Per Conf option is selected in the General properties.
Conference General Parameters
The options in Properties-General tab allow the setup of different types of
conferences according to their general properties. Selections made in this
dialog box affect the other On Going Conference parameters, and enable
other tabs.
To define the conference General parameters:
3. Define the following parameters:
Table 4-4: Conference Properties - General
Field/Option
Description
Name
(Mandatory) Enter a unique conference name, using up to
80 characters.
Note: If the same name is already used by another
conference, Meeting Room, Entry Queue, or Reservation
in the same or partially overlapping time frame, the MGC
Manager displays an error message requesting you to
enter a different name.
Duration
Billing
MCU
Define the duration of the conference using the format
HH:MM (default 2:00, maximum 99:59).
For example, to define a duration of 30 minutes, enter
0:30. For duration of 90 minutes, enter 01:30.
Enter the conference billing code. The billing code can be
assigned to the conference by your reservation system or
it can be allocated by the conference chairperson or
contact person.
Displays the name of the MCU to which you are currently
connected (read-only).
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-4: Conference Properties - General (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Conf. Entry
Password
Enter a numeric password that participants will use to
access the conference. If left blank, the MCU automatically
assigns a password to the conference once the
conference definition is completed (provided the MCU is
configured to automatically assign passwords).
For more details about the MCU configuration, see the
MGC Administrator’s Guide, Chapter 5, “Edit system.cfg”.
Note: This field is applicable only to IVR-enabled
conferences which are configured to prompt for the entry
password, or to conferences accessed from an Entry
Queue that use passwords as the routing method.
Web/Chairperson
Password
Enter a numeric password that participants will use to
identify themselves as the conference chairperson. This
password is only required in IVR-enabled conferences that
are configured to prompt for the chairperson password.
Note: In Standard Video conferences, this password is
only required for accessing the conference properties from
the WebCommander application.
Numeric ID
Each conference must be assigned a unique identification
number. Numeric IDs (NID) are required for routing
purposes when accessing the conference from the Entry
Queue (when the selected routing method is numeric ID)
and for dialing to the conference from an H.323 endpoint,
as part of the dialing string. NID can be assigned manually
or automatically.
To manually assign the NID, enter a number in the length
(the number of digits) defined in the appropriate flag in the
“system.cfg” file. If the Numeric ID is already in use in
another Entry Queue or conference, an error message will
be displayed.
If you do not assign the Numeric ID, the MCU
automatically assigns one after the completion of the
conference definition when the conference is saved on the
MCU.
Note: If the MCU is configured to support only automatic
assignment of Numeric IDs, then this field is disabled and
the system automatically assigns a Numeric ID after you
save the conference on the MCU.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-4: Conference Properties - General (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Entry Queue
Access
Select this option to force participants to access the
conference via an Entry Queue. Once the participants are
conference Numeric ID or password (depending on the
MCU configuration) to join the conference.
When this option is selected:
•
•
ISDN participants dial the EQ dial-in number
H.323 participants dial the IP Network Service Prefix
and the Entry Queue Numeric ID
•
SIP participants enter the Entry Queue URI
See “Defining Participant Properties” on page 4-101.
Meet Me Per Conf Select this option to enable the Meet Me Per Conference
conference. The Meet Me Per Conf tab appears.
Meet Me Per conference allows “undefined” participants to
connect to a conference by dialing a pre-defined dial-in
number. “Undefined” participants are not defined prior to
the conference start.
Note: If the Entry Queue Access conference is set as Meet
Me Per Conf, a separate dial-in number is assigned to the
conference, which participants can use to connect to the
conference directly (not via an Entry Queue). If you do not
require the direct dialing to the conference and to save
dial-in numbers, select either the Meet Me Per Conf option
or the Entry Queue Access option.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-4: Conference Properties - General (Continued)
Field/Option
User Defined 1-3
Description
The User Defined fields enable you to enter general
information for the conference, such as the company
name, the contact person name, the contact person’s
E-mail or telephone number, or any other required
information.
Note:
•
The User Defined fields are displayed only if the Show
User Defined Fields in Conference Parameters option
•
The titles of the User Defined fields can be modified in
the Database Manager -> Defaults -> User Defined
Defaults and loaded to the MGC Manager application.
For details of defining the titles see the MGC Manager
User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 6, “Defining User
Defined Defaults”. For a description on how to load the
user defined default titles, see Chapter 3, “Loading the
User Defined Default Set to the MGC Manager
Application” on page 3-36.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-4: Conference Properties - General (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Select the type of conference you are defining:
Conference Type
•
Standard - Select this option if you are defining an
On Going Conference that is scheduled or intended to
is deleted from the MCU.
•
Meeting Room - Select this option to define a new
Meeting Room. A Meeting Room is a passive
conference that is reserved without resource allocation
and is automatically activated when the first participant
Rooms”.
•
Operator - Select this option to define an Operator
conference, to enable the attended conferencing
mode, and to enable the operator’s assistance for
Entry Queues and IVR-enabled conferences as well as
Greet and Guide Video conferences. For more details
see Chapter 8, “Entry Queues, Operator Conferences,
and Attended Conferencing”.
See also “Conference Types” on page 4-6.
Media
Select Audio to define an Audio Only conference with
VoicePlus capabilities such as IVR Service, Roll Call etc.
For a detailed description, refer to the MGC Manager
User’s Guide, VoicePlus Edition.
Select Video, Audio for video conferences that can include
Audio Only participants in addition to video participants.
Supported
Network
Select the network to be used by participants to connect to
this conference.
•
•
IP - Select this option if only IP participants will connect
to the conference. In addition to Classic and Quad
Views, the Software option is enabled in the Video
Session > Continuous Presence list.
IP / ISDN / ATM / MPI - Select this option to let
participants join this conference using all types of
network connections. For mixed networks, two types of
Continuous Presence modes are enabled: Classic and
Quad Views.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-4: Conference Properties - General (Continued)
Field/Option
Video Session
Description
Select the Video Session type for the conference:
•
Video Switching - Select this option to set a
conference in which all the participants use the same
line rate and video and audio parameters, by setting
the communication parameters to the common
capabilities. Whenever a participant starts to speak, the
participant is displayed in full screen on all endpoint
screens. Up to 16 or 30 participants (if at least one
Audio Bridge is set to 1/30) can take part in a Video
Switching conference using the standard Audio card.
Up to 100 participants at 128 Kbps can take part in a
conference running on the Audio+ card. This
conference type does not use the MCU video
resources.
In Video Switching conferences, the highest common
mechanism is enabled for the video parameters,
allowing the system to select the best video
parameters that can be supported by all the endpoints
currently connected to the system, and dynamically
change them when a new endpoint joins or leaves the
conference.
•
Transcoding - Select this option to set a conference in
which participants use different line rates, video, audio
and data parameters, up to the maximum line rate
defined for the conference, thus maintaining the best
video and audio capability that each participant
endpoint can achieve with the current conference
settings. As in a Video Switching session, the current
speaker is displayed on all screens and switching
between participants is audio activated.
•
Continuous Presence - Select this option to set a
conference in which several participants can be viewed
simultaneously. In this type of conference, each
participant endpoint’s capabilities are used, to maintain
the highest possible video, audio and data quality
according to the conference settings. If the number of
participants is less than or equal to the number of
participants displayed, each participant can see all the
other participants.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-4: Conference Properties - General (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Video Session
(cont.)
The following Continuous Presence options are
available:
— Classic - participants can be displayed in up to 9
video windows. 21 video layouts are available in
this mode. Can be used with all types of Video
card.
— Quad Views - offers 8 different video layouts,
including layouts that are suitable for very large
conferences. This mode should be selected when
the conference includes 10 participants or more.
An MCU with installed Video+ card is required.
— Software (SWCP) - a software solution that
resembles the Continuous Presence functionality,
but does not use video card resources. Offers only
only conferences.
Continuous Presence conferences can also be defined
as Conference On Port (COP), to save video
resources.
For more details, see the MGC Manager User’s Guide
Volume II, Chapter 1 “Advanced Conference Settings”.
For more details on Video Session options, see “Video
Session Types” on page 4-21.
Remarks
Using up to 300 characters you can enter text such as any
useful information, to be viewed by other operators or the
conference chairperson (via the WebCommander
application). Remarks entered at the reservation stage
(conference setup) are included with conference
properties and in the records that are saved to the CDR
file. During an On Going conference, you can add a new
entry and save it using the Update Remark button.
Note: For more information on CDR files, see the MGC
Manager User’s Guide Volume II, Appendix A.
Remarks History
Displays all remarks that were entered and/or updated for
this conference by operators and were saved to the CDR
file. This field can be read during the conference but not at
the reservation stage. Entries are shown in ascending
order (latest entry showing at top of list).
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Conference Settings
4. Click the Settings tab to define the conference technical parameters.
The Properties - Settings dialog box opens.
Parameters in the Conference Properties - Settings dialog box are
grouped in two main areas: General Settings and Media Settings. By
default only the Basic settings are displayed when you first open the
dialog box. You can click the Advanced >> button to view and modify
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
the additional settings. The Advanced options remain on display, until
closed by clicking the <<Basic button.
In most conference definitions you do not need to modify the Advanced
parameters because the MGC Manager uses the optimal parameters (Highest
Common), based on the Video Session type, conference line rate and the
endpoint’s capabilities.
However, if you do want to force the use of a specific video parameter, such as
the H.264 video protocol, or to use various conferencing options such as FECC
or COP, click the Advanced button.
Advanced settings are described in detail in the MGC Manager User’s Guide,
Volume II, Chapter 1, “Advanced Conference Settings”.
For more information on Highest Common mechanism, see “Highest Common
Mechanism” on page 4-24.
All the fields in the Settings dialog box display the default values defined
in the MGC Database Manager - Conference Defaults according to the
conference type selected in the Properties - General dialog box.
For more details on the Conference Defaults definition, see the MGC
Manager User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 6, “Defining Conference
Defaults”.
To define the conference media and additional settings:
5. Define the following parameters:
Table 4-5: Conference Properties - Settings Parameters
Option/Field
Description
Restricted
Select this option if all participants use restricted lines
whose line rate for each channel is 56 Kbps instead of
64 Kbps. If only some of the participants use restricted
lines, do not select this option. Instead, select the
restricted option when setting the parameters of the
relevant participants and set the conference video
session type to Transcoding.
Note: This option is relevant only to ISDN lines,
therefore it is disabled for IP only conferences.
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-5: Conference Properties - Settings Parameters (Continued)
Option/Field
Line Rate
Description
Select the conference transmission rate according to
the type of video session you selected.
The highest transmission rate in Transcoding and
Continuous Presence sessions is 1920 Kbps (E1). At
such a rate, the number of IP participants supported
by the IP network card is reduced by half, for example,
from 12 to 6 participants.
The H.264 video protocol is supported at line rates of
up to 384 Kbps.
For a Video Switching conference, select the
highest line rate common to all participants. For
example, if two participants can connect at a transfer
rate of 384 Kbps and one participant can connect at a
rate of 128 Kbps, set the line rate to 2B or 128 Kbps.
In a conference with participants from mixed networks
(ISDN and IP), the line rate defined for ISDN
participants is also used for IP participants.
For Transcoding and Continuous Presence
conferences, define the maximum rate for the
conference. The actual line rate for individual
connection is defined at the participant level. If the
participant’s Line Rate is set to Auto, the endpoint
connects to the conference using the highest line rate
possible by the endpoint up to the line rate defined for
the conference (in this field). In such a case, set the
conference line rate to the highest transmission rate
that can be used by the participants in the conference.
For Software Continuous Presence conferences,
the line rate is set at the conference level and
represents the transmission rate from the MCU to the
endpoint (combined video rate and audio rate). For
more details regarding the line rate settings for
Software CP conferences, see the MGC Manager
User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 1, “Software
Continuous Presence Settings”.
For Conference On Port conferences, select the
estimated highest transmission rate common to all
participants. The Conference On Port method forces
all conference participants use the same video
parameters.
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-5: Conference Properties - Settings Parameters (Continued)
Option/Field
Description
Line Rate (cont.)
For example, if two participants connect at a rate of
128 Kbps, all participants will connect, but the video
quality will be that of the 128 Kbps participant for all
participants. In order to maintain a minimum video
quality for a Conference On Port, there is a minimum
threshold line rate that participants must support in
order to connect with video. This minimum threshold
line rate is determined according to the conference
Line Rate. For more details, see “Conference On Port
(COP)” on page 4-25.
Notes:
•
A high line rate transmission is enabled with the
Standard Video card version 1.43 and higher, or
with the Video+ card.
•
The MGC unit can automatically detect the line
rate of incoming ISDN/IP calls of participants
defined as Auto Detect and connect the participant
according to their capabilities, without prior setting
of the endpoint’s line rate during the conference
setup. In such a case, the conference line rate is
the maximum rate for the participant connection.
•
The line rate of a conference with ATM participants
can be either 2B, or 256 Kbps and up to 1152
Kbps, including H0 (depending on the participant's
endpoint capabilities).
Video Rate
In/Out
Applicable to Software Continuous Presence only.
Displays the ratio between the incoming video rate of
a single endpoint and the video rate of the outgoing
stream (4 times the incoming video rate of a single
endpoint). For more details, see the MGC Manager
User’s Guide Volume II, Chapter 1, “Software
Continuous Presence Settings”.
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-5: Conference Properties - Settings Parameters (Continued)
Option/Field
Description
Message
Service Type
In conferences with Message Services, participants
are greeted upon their connection to the MCU and are
guided to their destination conferences either by an
operator (attended conferences) or by menu prompts
and voice messages (unattended conferences). In
addition, IVR Message Services enable participants to
control their connection to the conference, and
chairpersons to control the conference and perform
various operations. Select the type of Message
Service for the conference:
•
None - (default) Select this option to indicate a
standard conference, without any services.
•
Welcome (No Wait) - Select this option for a
Greet and Guide conference in which the
participants are greeted by a Welcome video slide
and an audio message and, after a pre-defined
period, are automatically connected to the
appropriate conference. For more details, see the
MGC Manager User’s Guide Volume II, Chapter 4.
•
•
Attended (Wait) - Select this option for a Greet
and Guide conference in which participants are
greeted by a Welcome video slide and an audio
message, and then are assisted by the operator
who connects them to the appropriate conference.
For more details, see the MGC Manager User’s
Guide, Volume II, Chapter 4.
IVR - Select this option to create an IVR-enabled
conference, in which participants are guided
through their connection process by an automated
voice system. For a detailed description, see the
MGC Manager User’s Guide Volume II, Chapter 2.
Note:
•
The Greet and Guide options (Welcome (No Wait)
and Attended (Wait)) should only be selected if
only the Standard Audio card (and no Audio+ card)
is installed in your MCU.
•
If an Audio+ card is installed in your MCU, select
the IVR option for attended and voice guided
connections to the conference.
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-5: Conference Properties - Settings Parameters (Continued)
Option/Field
Description
Message
Service Name
If you have selected a Message Service type other
than None, select the name of the AV Message
Service for Welcome (No Wait) or Welcome (Wait)
conference or the name of an IVR Service for an
IVR-enabled conference.
Note: If left blank, the system automatically selects
the attended conference type).
Conference On
Port (COP)
This option is available if Continuous Presence
(Classic & Quad Views) was selected as the Video
Session type (in the Conference Properties - General
tab).
Click this check box to set this conference to
Conference On Port. For more details, see
“Conference On Port (COP)” on page 4-25.
For a COP session, select the estimated highest
transfer rate common to all participants. This (CP
COP) method forces all conference participants to use
the same video parameters. For example, if two
participants connect at a rate of 384 Kbps and one
participant connects at a rate of 128 Kbps, all
participants will connect, but the video quality will be
that of the 128 Kbps participant for all participants.
To maintain a minimum video quality for a Conference
On Port, a minimum threshold line rate must be
supported by participants. This threshold is
determined by the conference line rate. For example,
in a conference defined with a line rate of 768 Kbps, a
participant with a line rate of 128 Kbps will connect as
Secondary (audio only), in order to preserve the video
quality of the conference.
For the list of line rate thresholds, see Table 4-1,
“Conference On Port Line Rate - Minimum
Thresholds,” on page 4-25.
Encryption
Select this check box to enable encryption for this
conference. For more information, see the MGC
Manager User’s Guide Volume II, Chapter 1, “Media
Encryption”.
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-5: Conference Properties - Settings Parameters (Continued)
Option/Field
Description
SilenceIT
Select this check box to enable automatic noisy line
muting for Audio Only participants taking part in a
video conference. When a noisy participant line is
muted, a message is played to inform the other
participants that one of them was muted due to their
noisy line. SilenceIT must be enabled in the IVR
Service to be enabled for new conferences. If you
enable this option while an IVR Service you assigned
to the conference is not SilenceIT-enabled, the
conference definition will be rejected.
See the MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II,
Chapter 2, “Using SilenceIT”.
VTX 1000
Select this check box to create a VTX enabled
conference.
Undefined participants connecting directly to VTX
1000 enabled conferences are initially assigned wide
band resources. If the endpoint is not identified as
VTX, the wide band resources are subsequently
released. All pre-defined participants in VTX enabled
conferences are allocated wide-band resources.
Audio Alg
Select the preferred audio algorithm for the type of
conference you define. This parameter represents the
compression ratio. The higher the ratio, the more
processing resources are required.
The available audio algorithms are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Auto
8 (G.729/G.723.1)
16 (Siren7/G.728)
24 (Siren14/G.722.1/Siren7)
32 (Siren14/G.722.1/Siren7)
48 (Siren14/G.722/G.711)
56 (G.722/G.711)
56 (G.711)
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-5: Conference Properties - Settings Parameters (Continued)
Option/Field
Description
Audio Alg (cont.)
Audio Algorithm 8 (G.729/G.723.1) is the most
compressed audio and 56 (G.711) is without audio
compression. If set to “Auto”, the system tries to
connect the participants using the best possible audio
algorithm for the conference.
Note:
•
8 (G.729/G.723.1) is available only for IP Only
conferences when the Audio+12/24, 24/48 or
48/96 is installed in the MCU.
•
In Video Switching conferences, all participants
must use the same audio algorithm. Participants
with endpoints that do not support the algorithm
selected for the conference, are connected as
Secondary (Audio only).
•
If the conference line rate is set to 2B or 128 Kbps,
to achieve the best audio and video quality, select
the most compressed audio algorithm for all
participants in the following order: G.728, G.722,
G.711. When Siren7 (16, 24 or 32 bit) is available,
select the audio algorithm in the following order:
Siren 7 (16), G.728, G.722 and G.711. Siren7 16 bit
and G.728 algorithms are interchangeable, and a
participant using either one is fully connected
when one of them is selected as the audio
algorithm.
•
•
If the conference line rate is higher than 128 Kbps,
to achieve the best audio and video quality, select
the audio algorithm in the following order: G.722.1
(32), G.722.1 (24), G.722 / G711. When Siren7 (16,
24 or 32 bit) is available, select the audio algorithm
in the following order: G.722.1 (32), Siren7 (32),
G.722.1 (24), Siren7 (24), G.722, Siren7 (16),
G.711.
Siren 14 should be used with conference rates
higher than 128 Kbps, only when all endpoints
support this algorithm.
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-5: Conference Properties - Settings Parameters (Continued)
Option/Field Description
In Transcoding or Continuous Presence
Audio Alg (cont.)
•
conferences, you can set the audio algorithm to
any of the available audio algorithms as in a Video
Switching conference. If set to Auto, the system
tries to connect the participants using the best
possible audio algorithm according to the line rate
set for the conference.
Dual Stream
Mode
In this mode, the endpoint sends two video streams:
Video and data. The Video is based on the principle, “I
see you and you see me”, while data implies “we both
see the same content”. The video streams are
handled differently by the receiving endpoint. The
different streams may be shown on separate screens
during the video session.
•
None - The Dual Stream mode is unavailable.
In such a case, the Video Protocol parameter is set
to Auto.
•
H.239/People+Content - Enables sending two
alternating video streams, People and Content for
most Polycom endpoints. This is the Polycom
proprietary protocol while H.239 is the industry
standard.
•
People and Content V0 - Polycom proprietary
technology, mainly intended for PictureTel and
other older endpoints. For this mode, Annex N,
Annex P and Annex F are selected by default.
•
•
Visual Concert PC and FX - Available with
Polycom Viewstation or Viewstation FX endpoints.
DuoVideo - Available with Tandberg endpoints in
which one conference is set as the video
conference and the other as the presentation
conference. Select this option when defining
presentation conferences.
For a detailed description of Dual Stream options, see
the MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II,
Chapter 1, “Dual Stream Modes”.
4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Defining Advanced Conference Settings
When you click the Advanced >> button in the General Settings area of the
Conference Properties - Settings tab, additional parameters appear.
The options that are briefly described in this chapter, are detailed in the MGC
Manager User’s Guide Volume II, Chapter 1, “Advanced Conference
Settings”.
6. To set additional parameters for the conference, click the Advanced >>
button in the General pane.
Table 4-6: Conference Properties Advanced Settings - General
Option/Field
Description
Chair Control
Select Auto to enable one endpoint (chairperson’s)
to control the conference and other conference
participants.
Select None to disable this option.
This option is enabled when the Cascade field is set
to None. For more details, see the MGC Manager
User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 5, “H.243 Chair
Control”.
Cascade
Cascading enables you to run one large conference
that is made up of several conferences (these
conferences are not connected directly to each
other). Conferences can run on different MCUs or on
the same MCU (for large conferences that exceed
the maximum number of participants per
conference). For more details, see the MGC
Manager User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 1,
“Cascading Conferences” and Chapter 5, “H.243
Conferences”.
Master Name
This option is enabled when the Cascade option is
set to Slave, and the name of the participant that
acts as the link to the Master conference is selected
from the Master list. For more details, see the MGC
Manager User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 1,
“Cascading Conferences” and Chapter 5, “H.243
Conferences”.
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-6: Conference Properties Advanced Settings - General (Continued)
Option/Field Description
When the conference is set to a higher line rate,
T120 Rate
•
the following T.120 rates are available:
H-MLP-64k; H-MLP - 128k.
Note:
•
Set the same T.120 rate for all participants. This
should be the highest rate common to all
participants.
•
When the conference line rate is 2B or 128 Kbps,
selecting a higher T.120 rate results in a loss of
video quality.
FECC/LSD Rate
Enables the LSD mode on video cameras that
enables participants to control their far-end camera.
Note:
•
In Video Switching conferences, if an endpoint
does not support LSD and cannot open the data
channel, the participant connects as Audio Only
(Secondary).
•
In Continuous Presence and Transcoding
conferences, endpoints that do not support LSD
remain connected at their initial line rate.
For a detailed description, see the MGC Manager
User’s Guide Volume II, Chapter 1, “Far End
Camera Control (FECC) and Low Speed Data
(LSD)”.
Conference Lock
Select this option to lock the conference to
undefined (“Meet Me”) dial-in participants and
prevent them from joining the conference once it has
started. Clear this check box to unlock a locked
conference.
A locked conference can be unlocked while it is in an
On Going state.
Note:
This option is enabled only for Meeting Rooms and
for standard conferences set as Meet-Me-Per-
Conference and Entry Queue Access, and only if the
Audio+ card is installed in the MCU.
4-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-6: Conference Properties Advanced Settings - General (Continued)
Option/Field
Description
Mute “Meet Me”
Parties
Select this option to automatically mute all undefined
(“Meet Me “) dial-in participants once they are
connected to the conference. The participants can
then be individually unmuted by the operator or the
conference chairperson.
Note: This option is enabled only for Audio Only
Meet-Me-Per-Conference, Meeting Rooms and
Entry Queue Access conferences and only if the
Audio+ card is installed in the MCU.
Start Conf.
Requires
Chairperson
Select this option to allow the conference to start
only when the participant defined as a chairperson
connects to the conference. Participants who
connect to the conference before the chairperson
are placed on Hold and hear background music (and
see a Welcome slide when available). Once the
conference is activated, the participants are
automatically connected to the conference.
When the check box is cleared, the conference
starts at its predefined time or when the first
participant connects to it (Meeting Rooms).
Note: This option is enabled only when an IVR
Service is assigned to the conference and the
Audio+ card is installed in the MCU.
Terminate
Conference after
Chairperson Exits
Select this option to automatically terminate the
conference once the conference chairperson
disconnects from the conference.
When the check box is cleared, the conference
automatically ends at the predefined end time, or
when all the participants have disconnected from the
conference (if Auto Terminate is selected).
Note: This option is enabled only when an IVR
Service is assigned to the conference and the
Audio+ card is installed in the MCU.
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-6: Conference Properties Advanced Settings - General (Continued)
Option/Field
Description
On Hold
Select this option to place the conference on hold.
While in the On Hold state, all the participants hear
background music (if an external device is attached
to the Audio+ IO card).
Clear this check box to reinstate the conference.
Note: A conference on hold can be released and
placed on hold during an On Going Conference.
This option is enabled only for Audio Only
conferences and only when an IVR Service is
assigned to the conference and the Audio+ card is
installed in the MCU.
Enable Invite
Select this option to enable the Invite functionality in
an IVR-enabled conference. When selected,
participants in the conference can invite new
participants during the conference.
Note: This option can only be activated during the
conference definition stage. It is valid only for
conferences with an IVR service in which the Enable
Invite messages and prompts are enabled.
For more information, refer to the MGC Manager
User’s Guide, VoicePlus Edition.
Auto Termination
Select this option to automatically end the
conference by the MCU and define the termination
condition and the time period (in minutes) before the
conference is considered idle:
•
Before First Join — No participant has
connected to an On Going Conference for n
minutes after it started. Default is 5 minutes.
•
After Last Quit — All the participants have
disconnected from the conference and the
conference is idle (empty) for a predefined time
period. Default is 1 minute.
Since empty conferences still use resources that
were reserved for them, this option is useful to save
resources and billing costs.
4-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Defining Advanced Media Settings
When you click the Advanced >> button in the Media Settings pane of the
Conference Properties - Settings tab, additional parameters appear.
7. To set additional parameters in the Media Settings area of the Conference
Properties - Settings tab, click the Advanced >> button.
Table 4-7: Conference Properties Advanced Settings - Media
Field/Option
Description
Roll Call
Roll Call records the participant’s name and plays it
back when the participant enters and leaves a
conference.
The chairperson can request a roll call in which the
recorded names of all conference participants are
played back to the conference at the beginning of
the conference or at any time during the
conference. If Roll Call is disabled for the
conference but enabled in an assigned IVR
service, the particpants names are recorded as
they enter the conference, and can be played
during the conference if enabled.
Note:
•
This option is available only for IVR-enabled
conferences, and only when the Roll Call option
is selected in the definition of the IVR Service
assigned to the conference. It requires the
installation of the Audio+ card in the MCU.
•
•
If Entry Tone and Exit Tone are enabled for the
conference, the participant name is played
back to the conference when the participant
enters or leaves the conference.
If the Roll Call option is disabled for the
conference but enabled in the assigned IVR
Service, Roll Call cannot be requested during
the On Going Conference. However, the
participant name is recorded as the Roll Call
option can be enabled during the On Going
Conference.
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-7: Conference Properties Advanced Settings - Media (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Entry Tone/Roll Call
Announcement
Select this option to enable an audio tone to be
played when a participant (audio or video)
connects to the conference. This tone is heard by
all the participants currently connected to the
conference (but not by the connecting participant).
The tone is embedded in the MCU software.
Note: If Roll Call is enabled for the conference, the
Entry Tone is replaced by a playback of the
recorded participant name.
End Time Alert Tone
Select this option to enable the End of Conference
reminder tone to be played once, to all the
connected participants, n minutes before the end of
the conference. This tone is unique and is
embedded in the MCU's software.
Note: If the automatic extension of the conference
is enabled for the MCU in the “confer.cfg” file,
selecting this option also enables the automatic
extension of the conference duration for this
conference. For more details see the MGC
Administrator’s Guide, Chapter 5, “MCU Utilities”.
Exit Tone/Roll Call
Announcement
Select this option to enable an Exit Tone, to be
heard by all connected participants when a
participant leaves the conference. This tone is
unique and is embedded in the MCU's software.
Note: If Roll Call is enabled for the conference, the
Entry Tone is replaced by a playback of the
recorded participant name.
Talk Hold Time
Indicate the minimum period, in seconds, that a
participant has to speak to become the main
speaker. During this period, no other participant is
allowed to become the main speaker. This
parameter is designed to prevent participants from
becoming the main speakers when coughing/
laughing or to prevent fast and frequent changes of
the main speakers.
4-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-7: Conference Properties Advanced Settings - Media (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Audio Mix Depth
Indicate how many of the loudest voices speaking
at the same time are heard. The value 3 indicates
that the three loudest participants speaking at the
same time are heard. The maximum number of
participants that can be mixed is 5.
Pro-Motion
(Interlaced Video
Mode)
This encoding mechanism improves the video
quality in Video Switching conferences, that are set
to NTSC or to PAL resolution. Select one of the
available options:
•
•
•
•
Auto
PAL (50 fields)
NTSC (60 fields)
None (default)
Note:
•
Select Auto to enable the Highest Common
mechanism. The Highest Common mechanism
is used when an endpoint using a Pro-Motion/
NTSC format enters a conference in which all
endpoints are set to Pro-Motion/PAL Interlaced
Video, or vice versa.
•
When a conference is set to PAL or NTSC,
then the endpoints sending unsupported Pro-
Motion video (for example, NTSC instead of
PAL or vice versa) or that do not support Pro-
Motion resolution, will connect as Secondary
(audio only).
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-7: Conference Properties Advanced Settings - Media (Continued)
Field/Option
Video Protocol
Description
The Video Protocol parameter determines the
video compression standard used by the
endpoints. The Video Protocol together with the
Video Format, Frame Rate and ProMotion
determine the overall video quality of the
conference.
Select one of the available protocols:
•
Auto - this option lets the system automatically
select the appropriate compression method
and enables the dynamic adjustment of the
video algorithm in Video Switching
conferences, according to the endpoints joining
and leaving the conference. This setting
overrides the Video Protocol settings in the
Participants Properties - Advanced dialog box
as the dynamic mode settings are forced by the
MCU.
•
•
H261 - the video compression standard
mandatory to all endpoints.
H263 - a video compression standard that
improves the video quality. This standard is not
supported by all endpoints. If H.263 is selected
in Video Switching conferences, all participants
must be connected using this protocol.
Participants whose endpoint does not support
H.263 are connected as Secondary (audio
only).
•
•
H.264 - a video compression standard that
improves video quality at a line rate lower than
384 Kbps. H.264 is supported with the following
Continuous Presence options: Conference On
Port (COP), Personal Layout and Click&View.
H.264 is supported in the People channel in the
same way as in a standard VSW conference.
The Content channel only uses H.263.
H264* - a Polycom proprietary standard for
video compression that improves video quality
at a line rate lower than 384 Kbps. H.264* is
supported by Polycom’s iPower endpoint.
4-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-7: Conference Properties Advanced Settings - Media (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Note:
Video Protocol
(cont.)
•
When H.261, H.263, or H.264 is selected, the
system regards it as a fixed format and
disables the dynamic adjustment of the highest
common video protocol.
•
The dynamic adjustment of the video protocol
supports only 30 frames per second in CIF
format. All other H.263 capabilities are
disabled.
Video Format
Specifies the resolution (number of lines in a frame
and the number of pixels in each line) of video
according to the selected protocol. This parameter
is enabled only with the Video Switching mode and
when the video protocol is H.261 or H.263. If the
Video Protocol is set to Auto, the Video Format is
disabled. Select from the available options:
•
Auto - allows the system to find the video
format according to the participants' capabilities
and enable the dynamic adjustment of the
highest common video resolution. The system
connects all participants in CIF format. If one of
the endpoints does not support CIF, the
conference video format changes to QCIF for
all the participants. When a QCIF participant
leaves the conference, the system
automatically restores the CIF format for all the
participants remaining in the conference. If you
select CIF, all other participants must do the
same. If a participant's endpoint does not
support this format, the participant is connected
as Secondary (audio only).
•
•
QCIF (Quarter Common Intermediate Format) -
Resolution: 144 lines/176 pixels per line (one-
fourth the resolution of CIF).
CIF - A video format that supports both NTSC
and PAL signals. Resolution: 288 lines/352
pixels per line. Data rate up to 30 frames per
second.
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-7: Conference Properties Advanced Settings - Media (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Video Format
(cont.)
For the H.263 protocol, you can select additional
options. 4CIF, VGA, SVGA, XGA and NTSC
options are important for displaying content when
selecting the H.239/People+Content Dual Stream
mode. Typically, the People resolution is CIF of up
to 30 fps, while the Content resolution is VGA,
SVGA, XGA or NTSC:
•
4CIF - Resolution: 576 pixels per line. Data rate
up to 30 frames per second. 4CIF is enabled in
the system.cfg file and requires the installation
of the Video+ card in the MCU.
Available in Video Switching conferences when
the following conditions are met:
•
•
The endpoint can receive 4CIF.
The conference line rate is set to 512 Kbps
or higher. The minimum line rate for 4CIF
selection is defined in the system.cfg file.
•
The appropriate layout is selected for the
conference: layout is 1x1 (full screen) and
the video input stream is 4CIF, or is 2x2 or
3x3.
•
•
•
•
VGA (Video Graphics Array)
Resolution: 640 x 480 pixels
SVGA (Super Video Graphics Array)
Resolution: 800 x 600 pixels
XGA (eXtended Graphics Array)
Resolution: 1024 x 768 pixels
NTSC (National Television Standards
Committee). 525 lines per frame, up to 16
million colors.
Note: When a video format is selected, its frame
rate is displayed and, for H.263 formats, the
annexes are enabled.
4-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-7: Conference Properties Advanced Settings - Media (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Frame Rate
This parameter is enabled only in the Video
Switching mode and the video protocol is set by
default to Auto. Determines the data rate (frames
per second). A higher frame rate ensures better
video quality on the endpoint’s screen.
Select:
•
7.5; 10; 15; 30 pic/sec - If you selected QCIF,
CIF, 4CIF, VGA, SVGA, XGA, or NTSC, select
the frame rate to define the quality of the video
transmission.
•
Auto - To enable the dynamic adjustment of the
conference frame rate to the highest rate
common to all endpoints currently connected to
the conference.
Note: Frame Rate is automatically set to Auto and
disabled when Video Format is set to Auto.
When a video format is selected, the default frame
rate displayed is always the highest available -
30 pic/sec.
Quality
When 4CIF is enabled on MCU, you can define the
video quality for the 4CIF transmission. Choose the
appropriate option according to the type of video
content:
•
Auto - to allow the system to automatically
select the optimal 4CIF video quality per
endpoint, based on the endpoint’s capability.
•
Motion - to optimize the video display for
motion, for example when displaying a sporting
event or when showing people or objects in
movement.
•
Sharpness - to optimize the video display for
details, for example when displaying still
objects, or video conference presenters or
lecturers.
Note: Quality options are enabled only for Classic
and Quad Views video sessions with H.263 video
protocol and 4CIF enabled on the MCU.
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-7: Conference Properties Advanced Settings - Media (Continued)
Field/Option
Annexes
Description
In Video Switching conferences set to the H.263
protocol, Annexes can be activated to improve
specific aspects of video display quality.
When the Video Format is set to Auto, the system
selects the appropriate annexes according to the
endpoint's capabilities.
Annexes are required for the Dual Stream mode,
but can also be selected independently.
You can select an the following annexes:
•
Annex N - Reference Picture Selection Mode.
It enables the conference to recover efficiently
after transmission errors have occurred in the
macro blocks, and were reported via a relevant
message to the speaker encoder.
•
Annex P - Reference Picture Resampling. It
enables the transmitting encoder to apply a
resampling process to the previous decoded
reference picture in order to generate a warped
picture, for use in predicting the current picture.
The main purpose of this annex is to support
the relationship of the current picture to a
previous picture, which had a different source
format, such as CIF, QCIF or 4CIF.
•
Annex F - Advanced Prediction Mode.
It enables the transmitting encoder to use four
motion vectors for every macro block (one
motion vector per block). A macro block is a
piece of the picture that contains four blocks.
Without this annex, the transmitting encoder
can only choose one motion vector for optimal
prediction of the macro block.
4-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Participants
You can add participants to the conference either by selecting the participants
from the Participant database or a Participant Template file, or by defining
them directly during the On Going Conference.
8. Click the Participants tab to add participants to the On Going
Conference.
The Conference Properties - Participants dialog box opens.
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
To add participants to the conference:
9. Add participants to the conference and define their connection method
using the following options:
Table 4-8: Conference Properties - Participants Options
Field/Option
Description
Pre-Defined
Participants
Lists the names of participants defined in the
Participant database, User template file or in the
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol)
directory, depending on the selected Predefined
Participant File. The list is empty if no participant
source file was selected, or if the file is empty.
Conference
Participants
Lists the names of participants who were selected
from the Predefined list and added to the
conference.
Search
Use this option to search for a name when the
source list is very long. Those participants whose
names match the character string that you specify in
Participants list.
New
Click this button to add a new participant and define
participant’s parameters during conference
definition. The participant’s definition can be saved
in the database or in the Participant Template file
that appears in the Pre-Defined Participants file box.
For more details on defining new participants, see
“Defining Participant Properties” on page 4-101.
Allow Undefined
Parties
Select this check box to allow undefined dial-in
participants to connect to the conference, without
prior definition of participant properties. In such a
case, participants connect to the conference until the
number of participants exceeds the conference
defined limit (as set in the Max Participants
parameter), or the MCU configuration limit, or until
the MCU resources are used up.
Note: This option is automatically selected for the
Meet Me per Conf and Meeting Room type of
conference, or for conferences accessed from an
Entry Queue.
4-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-8: Conference Properties - Participants Options (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Min Participants
Define the total number of participants for which the
system reserves resources. This number should
include the number of defined participants as well as
undefined participants. For example, if the
conference includes two defined participants (dial-in
or dial-out) and you want the system to reserve
resources for three additional undefined participants,
enter 5 in the Min Participants box.
If you enter 0, no resources will be reserved for the
conference. However, participants will be able to
connect to the conference if resources are available.
Note: The number of participants who can connect
to the conference is limited by Max Participants limit
- if defined, or by the maximum number of
participants per conference supported by the MCU.
Max Participants
Define the total number of participants who can
connect to the conference at one time, taking into
account both the defined and undefined participants.
This option saves resources for other conferences.
When set to Auto, the maximum number of
participants is determined by the maximum number
of participants in a conference supported by the
MCU, or by the availability of the MCU resources.
Pre-Defined
Participants File
Displays the full path and file name of the selected
Going Conference is defined, the system
automatically lists the Participant templates in the
last used list/file.
•
To select participants from the database, click the
From Database button. For a detailed
description of the participants from the database
options, see “To add participants from the
database:” on page 4-69.
•
•
To select a participants from a Participant
Template file, click the Browse button.
To list participants defined in an LDAP
compatible directory, click the Directory button.
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-8: Conference Properties - Participants Options (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
To add a participant to the conference from the
selected participant’s list, in the Pre-Defined
Participants list, click the name of the participant,
and then click the >> button.
Add Participant
The name of the participant is added to the
Conference Participants list,
Note: You can select several names at a time.
To remove a participant from the conference, in the
Conference Participants list, click the name of the
participant to remove and then click the << button.
The participant’s name is deleted from the
Conference Participants list but remains in the Pre-
Defined Participants list.
Remove
Participant
Note: You can select several names at a time.
Removes participants from the conference or from
the Pre-defined Participants list.
Delete Participant
To remove a participant from the conference:
In the Conference Participants list, click the name of
the participant and then click the Del button.
After confirmation, the selected participant’s name is
deleted from the Conference Participants list and the
participant is removed from the conference.
To remove a participant from the Pre-defined
Participants File:
In the Pre-defined Participants list, click the name of
the participant and then click the Del button.
After confirmation, the participant’s name is removed
from the Pre-defined Participant File list, and from
the selected Participant Template file or Database
Group.
Note: You can select several names at a time.
Dial-Out Manually
Select this option to designate an operator-
controlled dial-out conference connection. If Dial-Out
Manually is checked, the operator must connect
each of the dial-out participants. The participants
remain in standby state until they are connected to
the conference by the operator.
4-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Use one of the following methods to add participants to the conference:
•
•
•
Add participants from the database
Add participants from the Participant Template file
Define new participants
To add participants from the database:
a. Click the From database... button to display the list of participants
stored in the database in the Pre-Defined Participants.
If you are not logged into the database, the Database Login dialog
box opens.
b. Enter your Login Name and Password and click OK.
The Open Parties in Database dialog box opens.
c. If more than one database is configured in your system, select the
appropriate database from the Database Name list.
d. Filter the list of participants by clicking the Name and/or Label
check boxes, entering the appropriate character string in the Name
field and/or selecting the appropriate label from the drop-down list.
4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
The Group option is enabled by default, displaying the highest
Group in the Groups hierarchy to which the logged-in user has
access. You may select another group from the Groups hierarchy
list. Only groups to which you have access, are listed in the Groups
list.
e. Click OK. The list of all the participants in the filtered category is
displayed in the Pre-Defined Participants list, and the name of the
participant’s Group is displayed in the Pre-Defined Participants File
You can now add names from this list to the Conference Participants
f. In the Pre-defined Participants list, select the participants to add to
the conference and click the Add
button.
To add participants from the user template file:
a. Click the Browse button to list the files stored on your computer.
The Open dialog box opens letting you select the Participant
Template file (.usr).
b. Using standard windows conventions, select the Participant
Template file and click Open.
The participants in the Participant Template file are listed in the Pre-
defined Participants list.
c. In the Pre-defined Participants list, select the participants to add to
the conference and click the Add
button.
If you are defining a conference that allows undefined parties, that is with dial-in
participants who have not been defined before the conference start (“undefined”
participants), for example an Entry Queue conference or Meet Me Per
this dialog box.
To add participants to the conference by defining new participants:
•
Click the New button to define a new participant.
The Participant Properties - Identification dialog box opens.
Defining participant properties is described in detail in “Defining
Participant Properties” on page 4-101.
4-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Video Sources
Video Sources comprise these groups of parameters:
•
Video Session is a read-only area which indicates which video session
type and Continuous Presence mode you selected in the Conference
Properties - General dialog box.
•
options you can modify the color of the window background, its border
and of the speaker indication in the selected video layout. These effects
are applicable only to Continuous Presence conferences, and only if a
Video+ card is installed in the MCU.
•
•
Audio Muted Participants -The Unforced Participant and Audio-Muted
Participant options are active only during the On Going Conference, see
“Muting Audio for a Conference” on page 6-56.
Video Layout determines the number and the arrangement of video
windows displayed on the endpoint screens. In Video Switching and
Transcoding conferences, only the full screen (1x1) video layout is
available; video layout selection is applicable only to Continuous
Presence conferences. You can select the required layout and set Auto
Layout and Same Layout options for the conference.
•
Lecture Mode options are Lecture Mode, Lecture Show and
Presentation Mode. For a detailed description of all Lecture/Presentation
options, see Chapter 10, “Lecture and Presentation Modes”.
•
The Video Sources dialog box is hidden when defining an Audio Only
conference or when the MGC Manager is configured to Audio Look & Feel
mode.
4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
To define the Video Sources settings:
10. Click the Video Sources tab to select the Video Layout and add visual
queues to the video display of the conference.
The Conference Properties - Video Sources dialog box opens.
11. For Video Switching and Transcoding conferences, select the Same
Layout check box if you want the speaker to view him/herself instead of
the previous speaker.
12. For Continuous Presence conferences, select the Video Layout:
a. Determine the number of windows to appear on the screen by
clicking the arrow next to the numbered layout icon.
A pop up menu opens displaying the available layouts for the
selected number of windows.
4-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Different layout options are available according to the selected
Continuous Presence mode. Continuous Presence Classic video
sessions can have up to nine windows, although up to 12 video
participants can take part in the conference when the Standard Video
card is installed. If there are 10 or more participants, voice activated
switching occurs.
Continuous Presence Quad Views video sessions can have up to 16
windows. If the conference includes more than 16 participants,
voice activated switching occurs.
In Software Continuous Presence, only two layout options are
available: two and four video windows.
Table 4-9 lists the layouts available for each type of Continuous
Presence video session.
Table 4-9: Conference Properties - Video Sources - CP Layout Menus
CP Video
Video Layout Menu
View
Classic
Quad Views
Software
(IP only
conferences)
b. In the Video Layout area, click the thumbnail of the desired layout
from the layouts bar.
The selected layout appears in the Video Layout pane.
4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-10 lists the available layouts for the selected number of windows
in each Continuous Presence mode.
Table 4-10: Video Windows Layout Options
Number of
Video
Available Layouts
Windows
1
Classic mode
Quad Views mode
2
Classic mode
Quad Views mode
Software mode
3
4
Classic mode
Classic mode
Quad Views mode
Software mode
4-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-10: Video Windows Layout Options (Continued)
Number of
Video
Available Layouts
Windows
5+
Classic mode
Quad Views mode
10+
Quad Views mode
Auto Layout
In Continuous Presence conferences you can select Auto Layout, where the
system automatically selects the conference layout based on the number of
disconnects, the conference layout automatically changes to reflect the new
number of video participants. Audio Only participants do not affect the
selected layout.
The Auto Layout option is enabled/disabled in the “system.cfg” file in the
GENERAL section. Auto Layout can be activated/deactivated during the
reservation definition or during an On Going Conference.
Table 4-11 describes the video layouts that are automatically selected by the
system for Continuous Presence conferences according to the number of
connected participants and the type of view - Classic or Quad.
Table 4-11: Default Layouts for CP Classic and Quad Views
Number of Video
Participants
Auto Layout for
Classic CP
Auto Layout for
Quad Mode CP
2
1x1
1x1
4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-11: Default Layouts for CP Classic and Quad Views (Continued)
Number of Video
Participants
Auto Layout for
Classic CP
Auto Layout for
Quad Mode CP
3
4
1x2
2x2
1x2
2x2
5
6
2x2
1+5
2x2
2x2
7
8
1+5
1+7
1+7
1+7
1+7
1+7
2+8
2+8
2+8
2+8
2+8
4x4
9
10
11
12+
4-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
•
•
Software Continuous Presence conferences cannot be set to Auto Layout.
The Auto Layout feature can be used with the Lecture Mode (for the lecturer
display), but cannot be enabled with Lecture Show.
•
Auto Layout can be used with Same Layout and Conference On Port (COP).
In this mode, the system selects the layout as if one additional participant
was added to the conference to show the speaker. For example, in a
standard CP conference with five participants the system shows only four
windows in the layout and the speaker cannot view himself. But when Auto
Layout is used in Same Layout or COP mode, the system shows a 5-window
layout for all five participants including the speaker.
To enable auto video layout for all participants:
c. In the Conference Properties - Video Sources dialog box, click the
Auto Layout check box.
The option is now enabled for this conference. When the conference
is On Going, the video layout will be automatically selected
according to the number of participants.
Same Layout
In addition to layout selection, you can force the selected layout on all
participants of a Continuous Presence conference. This option can only be
selected during the conference definition stage but not when the conference is
running.
To enable the same video layout for all participants:
d. In the Conference Properties - Video Sources dialog box, click the
Same Layout check box.
The option is now enabled for this conference. During the
conference, the video layout will be identical for all participants.
Video Forcing
Video forcing enables you to select the participants to be displayed in each of
the layout windows. When Video Forcing is applied to a conference, self view
is enabled as part of the Same Layout feature. Viewing their own video image
on screen enables participants to check the quality of projection, (for
example: distance, focus, lighting) and provides feedback on their
presentation.
You can use this option only if participants were added to the conference (in
the Participants tab).
4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
To force participants to a video layout window:
13. Select the participant to be viewed by all the conference participants for a
specific layout window. You can force participants to a few of the Layout
windows, while in the other layout windows voice activated switching is
•
•
In screens with an asymmetric window layout (for example 5+1, 8+1),
a participant cannot be forced to the large window and to the small window
simultaneously.
•
•
Video Forcing can also be performed during the On Going Conference.
See Chapter 6, “Video Forcing” on page 6-38.
The Select Unforced Participant and Audio-Muted Participant options are
active only during the On Going Conference. See Chapter 6, “Muting Audio
for a Conference” on page 6-56.
Visual Effects
If the Continuous Presence conference is handled by a Video+ card, you can
add visual effects, such as borders and colors, to the video layouts display on
the endpoints. You can also modify the visual effects when the conference is
running.
The following modification options are available:
•
•
•
Background Color - the color displayed when a video window is empty,
for example when the video layout contains more windows than
connected participants.
Layout Border - you can add a frame around video layout windows
displayed on the participant’s endpoint. The thickness of the border and
its 3-D effect are fixed, but the color can be changed.
Speaker Notation - you can change the color of the border around the
window of the speaker to highlight it on the endpoint display.
4-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The visual effects are illustrated in the Polycom ViaVideo window.
Layout
Border
Background Color
Speaker Notation
To modify the background color of a video layout window:
14. Click the arrow next to the Background color box. The Color dialog box
opens.
4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
You can select a color from the Basic Colors swatches or mix a new
color to apply to the background.
—
To use a color from the predefined palette, in the Basic Colors pane
click the color to apply to the background and click OK. The
Background color box in the Video Sources tab shows the new
color.
—
To mix a custom color, click the Define Custom Colors button to
expand the dialog box.
The color matrix and color parameters are displayed.
Matrix cursor
Color slider
Color values
Selected color
a. Using the cursor, click any color on the matrix. Use the color slider
to adjust the color luminosity. The selected color shows in the
Color/ Solid box. Numerical values are displayed according to Red-
Green-Blue color model, and the Hue-Saturation-Luminance color
model. You can also select a custom color by modifying the
numerical values.
b. Click the Add to Custom Colors button to add the new color to the
list of custom colors.
c. In the Custom Colors pane, click the custom color that you defined.
d. Click OK to apply the settings.
The Color dialog box closes. The selected color is displayed as the
current Background color in the Conference Properties - Video
Sources dialog box.
4-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Layout borders and speaker notation are added and modified in the same way.
To modify the layout border and/or the speaker notation:
15. Select the Layout Border check box to add borders to the video
windows, or select the Speaker Notation check box to highlight the
speaker’s window in the video layout.
16. To apply a new color to the border and/or speaker notation:
—
windows in a video layout, click the arrow next to the Layout
Border color box.
—
To modify the color used to highlight the window, click the arrow
next to the Speaker Notation color box.
The Color dialog box opens.
17. Select a color for the Layout Border and/or the Speaker Notation, using
one of the methods described in step 14 on page 4-79.
Click OK to apply the settings.
The Color dialog box closes. The selected colors are displayed in the
Conference Properties - Video Sources dialog box.
Default Colors
Modified Colors
4-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Resource Force
The system automatically selects the cards that will run the conference
according to the conference type and MCU configuration. Audio Only
conferences are always run on the Audio+ card. IVR-enabled Video
conferences are run on the Audio+ card. If the video services are enabled in
the IVR Service, the conference will also run on the Video+ card. Standard
Video conferences (Video Switching and Continuous Presence - Classic) are
run on the Standard Audio card and Standard Video card (Continuous
Presence - Classic). If Continuous Presence - Quad Views is selected, the
conference will run on the Audio+ and Video+ cards.
You can change the automatic selection of the MCU resources to run the
conference. If your MCU contains both standard Audio and Audio+ cards you
can select the Audio card type to run the conference. For example, if you want
to ensure that the Standard Audio card is used to run the conference, to save
Audio+ resources, you can select it in this dialog box. You can also select the
Video card to run the conference.
Manually selecting the cards that will handle the conference allows you to
optimize the system resources when using standard Audio and Video cards
that may be vulnerable to fragmentation. For example, the MCU includes two
video cards (six participants each), and you want to schedule four
conferences; two conferences with two participants and two conferences with
four participants. When running these conferences, the system assigns the
first two conferences (with two participants each) to the same Video card,
while the third conference (with four participants) is assigned to another
video card. This results in insufficient resources for the fourth conference,
since the same card must handle all four participants. Using the Resource
Force tab, you can place the first two conferences (with two participants
each) on different video cards, saving the resources for the other two
conferences (with four participants each).
4-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
To modify the automatic card selection by the MCU:
18. Click the Resource Force tab.
The Conference Properties - Resource Force dialog box opens.
19. In the Audio area, select the type of Audio card to use for the conference
and the specific card to use by selecting the MCU slot in which the card
is installed. Select Auto to enable the automatic selection of the resource.
20. In the Video area, select the type of Video card to use for the conference
and the specific card to use by selecting the MCU slot in which the card
is installed. Select Auto to enable the automatic selection of the resource.
21. In the Data area, select the specific card to use for the conference by
selecting the MCU slot in which the card is installed. Select Auto to
enable the automatic selection of the resource.
4-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Meet Me Per Conference
The Meet Me Per Conference tab is enabled if the Meet Me Per Conference
option was selected in the On Going Conference Properties - General dialog
dial-in numbers to the conference for ISDN and IP participant connections.
Callers wishing to participate in a Meet Me Per Conference conference or
Meeting Room must dial one of the dial-in numbers, and are automatically
connected to the appropriate conference.
For a description of the Meet Me Per Conference and Meeting Room options,
see Chapter 7, “Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms”.
Recording
You can enable and specify audio recording options for an On Going
Conference. These options are enabled both for Audio Only and for Audio
and Video (to define recording for the audio channel of the conference). For a
detailed description of Recording options and setup, refer to the MGC
Manager User’s Guide, VoicePlus Edition, Chapter 8, “Recording”.
4-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
To enable recording for an On Going Conference:
22. In the Conference Properties dialog box, click the Recording tab.
The Recording dialog box opens.
23. If required, configure recording for the conference, using the following
parameters:
Table 4-12: Conference Properties - Recording
Field/Option
Description
Enable Recording
Select this option to enable recording.
Select the recording link from the list.
Recording Link
Name
Start recording
Select when to start recording the conference:
•
•
Immediately
Upon Request
4-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Completing the Conference Definition
24. Click OK in any of the Conference Properties tabs to complete the
conference definition.
If all the requirements are met and the properties are configured
correctly, the new conference is added to the On Going Conferences list
below the on Going Conferences icon and starts immediately. You can
click the conference icon to view its status in the Status pane of the MGC
Manager main window. For information on monitoring On Going
conferences, see Chapter 5. For information on operations that can be
performed during the conference, see Chapter 6.
Resolving Scheduling Conflicts
Upon completion of scheduling a Reservation or an On Going Conference,
the system checks for scheduling conflicts for individual participants.
A scheduling conflict for a participant results when two or more conferences
are set up to occur at the same time or at overlapping times and contain one of
•
•
•
Participants with the same name
Participants with the same ISDN/T1-CAS phone numbers
Participants with the same IP address/Alias
Depending on the connection type that was defined for the participant, MGC
Manager looks for specific conflict criteria to determine if the participant is
double-booked. Table 4-13 lists these criteria:
Table 4-13: Scheduling Conflict Criteria by Connection Type
Connection Type Conflict Criteria
Dial-out H.320
Dial-out IP
•
Name or Phone Number(s)
•
•
Name and IP address or Alias
IP address and Alias (when both provided)
Dial-in
•
Name or Phone Number
4-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
If a conflict is detected in the Reservation or in an On Going Conference, the
Participants Scheduling Conflicts window opens, listing the found data.
The following information is displayed:
Table 4-14: Participants Scheduling Conflicts window
Field/Option
Description
Requested
Participants
Lists the names of conflicting participants requested to join
the conference currently being created.
Reserved
Participants
Lists the names of participants already scheduled in
previously created conferences whose parameters match
those of the newly requested participant.
Phone/IP
Lists the phone numbers or IP addresses of listed
participants.
Alias
Lists the aliases of listed participants.
Conn. Type
Indicates the participant’s connection type:
•
•
Dial-in
Dial-out
Conf. Name
Lists the names of the conferences in which each participant
is defined.
4-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-14: Participants Scheduling Conflicts window (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Conf. Type
Indicates the conference type:
•
•
Res. — Reservation
Conf. — On Going Conference
Start Time
End Time
Date and start time of each conference.
Date and termination time of each conference.
The MGC Manager application checks for conflicts on the MCU on which the
conference is being scheduled, while the WebCommander application checks
for conflicts on multiple MCUs.
To resolve a scheduling conflict:
1. In the Participants scheduling conflicts table, select an action:
a. Select the check boxes of non-conflicting participants in the
Requested Participants column, to retain these participants in the
currently scheduled conference,
or
b. Clear the check boxes of conflicting participants in the Requested
Participants column, to exclude these participants from the
currently scheduled conference.
2. Click one of the following option buttons:
•
•
•
Include selected participants and schedule - Select this option to
allow the system to ignore the found conflict and to schedule the
conference.
Back to reservation - Select this option to return to the current
conference definition without scheduling the conference and to
redefine the conference parameters.
Cancel scheduling - Select this option to cancel the current
conference definition without defining a new On Going Conference.
4-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Connecting to an On Going Conference
Defined dial-in participants can connect directly to the conference. Undefined
participants can connect to a Standard conference via an Entry Queue, or
directly if the conference is defined as a “Meet Me Per Conference” or as a
Meeting Room.
Defined ISDN Participants Dial-in
ISDN participants can dial in to a conference directly or via an Entry Queue.
For direct dial-in, the participant’s CLI (dial-in number) is added to the
participant definition and the participants are given the MCU dial-in number.
When they dial the MCU number, the system recognizes their CLI number
and routes them to their conference accordingly.
Defined participants connecting to a “Meet Me per Conference” use the
dial-in number assigned to the conference and are connected directly to that
conference. The system behaves in the same way with defined and undefined
participants.
If the conference is assigned an IVR Service, conference and chairperson
passwords can be assigned to the conference. In such conferences, when the
appropriate prompts are played, the participant must enter the correct passwords
to access the conference.
The dial-in number assigned to a “Meet Me per Conference” can be viewed in
the MGC Manager main window Status pane.
To display the list of On Going Conferences, and their assigned dial-in
numbers, click the On Going Conferences icon in the Browser pane.
4-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
You can add defined participants during an On Going Conference. For more
details, see Chapter 6, “Adding New Participants to a Conference”.
For detailed information about defining an Entry Queue and accessing a
conference via an Entry Queue, see Chapter 8, “Entry Queues, Operator
Conferences, and Attended Conferencing”. For information about defining an
Audio Only Entry Queue, see the MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II,
Chapter 5, “Meeting Rooms and Entry Queues”.
Defined H.323 Participants Dial-in
Simple Dial-In Settings (No Gatekeeper)
In simple dial-in, no gatekeeper is required if the participant uses the IP
address of the card to dial-in. The participant is provided with the IP address
of the IP card installed in the MCU. The participant enters this IP address
when dialing to the conference. When connecting, the participant is routed to
the appropriate IP card according to the specified IP address. The system
determines the target conference according to the participant’s IP address
entered during the participant properties definition.
Endpoint IP:
Endpoint IP:
196.123.38.129
196.123.38.146
MCU
IP:172.22.138.146
IP:172.22.138.146
IP:172.22.138.148
IP:172.22.138.146
Conference1
MG323
module A
LAN
Conference2
MG323
module B
IP:172.22.138.148
Endpoint IP:
196.123.12.89
Figure 4-5: H.323 Participant Simple Dial-in (No Gatekeeper)
4-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
In simple dial-in, the MGC Manager operator must manage the system
resources by giving the appropriate IP address of the IP card to each of the
participants.
In this mode, resource sharing between IP cards is unavailable. If eleven ports
are taken by currently defined participants, it will be impossible to add a twelfth
participant who requires two ports, even if another card has enough ports to
allocate to that participant.
Simple Dial-In Settings (With Gatekeeper)
When using an H.323 alias to dial in to the MCU, a gatekeeper is required to
provide address translation and routing to the IP card. When the participant
connects to the conference, the participant enters the alias of the IP card as the
dialing string. The Gatekeeper routes the call to the appropriate IP card
according to the dialed alias. MGC Manager determines the conference to
which the participant is assigned according to the participant’s defined alias
or IP address. The aliases for the participant and the card must be defined in
the E.164 format, that is, using digits 0-9, * and #.
Endpoint IP:
196.123.38.129
Alias: 259
Endpoint IP:
196.123.38.146
Alias: 256
MCU
IP:172.22.138.146
Alias: 146
Dials 146
Dials 146
Conference1
MG323
module A
Gatekeeper
LAN
146
148
Conference2
MG323
module B
Dials 148
IP:172.22.138.148
Alias: 148
Endpoint IP:
172.123.12.89
Alias: 268
Figure 4-6: H.323 Participant Simple Dial-in (with Gatekeeper)
4-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Advanced Dial-In
In advanced dial-in, one IP Network Service is defined for all the IP cards
installed in the system. This IP Network Service is registered in the
gatekeeper using a prefix (which is defined in the E.164 format, that is, using
digits 0-9, * and #). This IP Network Service Prefix is also entered in the IP
Network Service Properties - H.323 dialog box and is given to the participants
as the dial-in number.
Endpoint IP:
196.123.38.129
Alias: 259
Endpoint IP:
196.123.38.146
Alias: 256
MCU
Endpoint
dials 45
Endpoint
dials 45
Conference1
Participant 1 alias: 256
Participant 2 alias: 259
Participant 3 alias: 378
Conference1
IP card A
Gatekeeper
LAN
Network
Service
Conference2
IP card B
Conference2
Participant 1 alias: 268
Participant 2 alias: 281
Participant 3 alias: 224
Prefix=45
Dials 148
Endpoint IP:
172.123.12.89
Alias: 268
Figure 4-7: Advanced Dial-in H.323 Participant
When the participants dial in, the call arrives at the gatekeeper. The
gatekeeper locates the MCU and tries to allocate a port from the first free IP
card. If the resource is available, the participant is connected and routed to the
appropriate conference according to the IP address/alias as defined in the
Participant Properties dialog box. If the resource is unavailable from the first
IP card, the system will look for the port on any available IP cards, and
allocate the resources automatically, according to their availability. If no port
is available, the connection will be rejected.
In this mode, the system is enabled to automatically allocate resources to run
conferences, saving you time and effort in scheduling conferences.
4-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
You can view the Network Service Prefix in the Network Service Properties -
H.323 dialog box.
The gatekeeper’s behavior is dependent on the type of gatekeeper service
chosen as the Service Mode (in the IP Network Service Properties - H323
dialog box).
Currently, only Polycom, RadVision and VCON MXM gatekeepers are known to
support the Network Service Prefix option. Gatekeepers of other manufacturers
may encounter problems while defining such a conference.
For gatekeeper functionality and interoperability, see the MGC Manager
Administrator’s Guide, Chapter 3, “Defining an IP Network Service”.
4-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
SIP Connections
SIP UA
SIP server
DNS server
MCU
SIP UA
Figure 4-8: Typical SIP Conferencing Layout
Dial-in Scenario—SIP Environment
Participants can dial in to an Entry Queue, or directly to a conference or to a
Meeting Room. Using an Entry Queue minimizes the number of conferences
that require registration with the SIP server, as it can use a single URI address
or a limited number of addresses for all the dial-in connections.
A new conference reservation or Entry Queue is defined. The conference or
the Entry Queue registers with the SIP proxy. The SIP participant registers
with the registrar, and provides authentication if required (non-trusted mode).
Usually, for SIP conferencing, an Ad Hoc Entry Queue is used. In this
scenario, the first participant dials the Entry Queue and creates a new
conference, while the other conference participants dial directly to the
conference using the conference name or numeric ID. The SIP participant
uses the Entry Queue URI to access the Entry Queue.
The Entry Queue URI is dialed in the format:
Entry Queue name@domain name.
4-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
When dialing from a Microsoft Windows Messenger endpoint (which does not
have DTMF capabilities), the first participant (who, in Ad Hoc conferencing,
creates the new conference) enters the Entry Queue name followed by the
target conference name and the numeric ID in the format:
EQ name(target conference name)(target conference numeric ID).
For example, EQ1(sales)(12345).
In this example, the Entry Queue name is EQ1, and a new On Going
Conference by the name sales with the numeric ID 12345 will be created on
the MCU.
You do not need to add the domain name to the conference name as it is
automatically added by Microsoft Windows Messenger when sending the
request to the SIP server.
The other conference participants can connect to the conference directly by
entering either sales or 12345.
Participants can connect to an Entry Queue, and then they are routed to the
destination conference using the conference password or the conference
numeric ID (depending on the MCU configuration).
4-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Direct Dial-in Scenario—SIP Environment
If the IP address of the MCU IP card is known, a direct endpoint to MCU
connection is possible, but not recommended. This direct connection uses the
Redirect mode only.
The SIP endpoint dials the IP address of the IP card or its host name.
SIP UA
SIP UA
MCU
SIP UA
Figure 4-9: SIP Environment - Dial-in and Dial-out
Dial-out Scenario—SIP Environment
The dial-out scenario is identical to the dial-in scenario, except for the
initiating party, that is the MCU. In dial-out conferences, the endpoint clients
need to be registered, so the registrar can provide location details when the
MCU invites them to join the conference.
4-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Mixed Environments Conference Scenario
In mixed environments, participants can connect to the same conference on
the MCU either over ISDN or over IP.
SIP Proxy
SIP UA
Gatekeeper
MCU
(media
mixer)
IP participant
PBX switch
ISDN participant
Figure 4-10: SIP Mixed Environment
After establishing a connection to the conference (each over its corresponding
network), the signaling and media channels reach the MCU.
The processed media is sent back by the MCU to H.323 and SIP participants
via the IP+ card and to ISDN participants via the Net card.
4-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Starting an On Going Conference from a
Reservation Template
Using a Reservation template, you can schedule a conference to start
immediately (On Going Conference), or to start automatically at a predefined
date and time (Reservation).
For information on defining a Reservation template, see the MGC Manager
User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 7, Reservation Templates”.
To start an On Going Conference from a Reservation Template:
1. Connect to an MCU.
2. If you are not logged in to the database, log in now. For details, see
Chapter 3, “Templates Database” on page 3-33.
3. On the DataBase menu, click Open D.B. Reservation Template and
then select the database storing the Reservation template.
4-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The Reservations in Database window opens.
4. Expand the Groups hierarchy until you locate the desired Reservation
template.
5. Right-click the icon of the Reservation template to schedule, and then
click Start Immediately.
If only one MCU is connected to the MGC Manager, the On Going
Conference is started on that MCU.
4-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
If you are connected to more than one MCU, an arrow appears next to
Start Immediately option. Click the arrow to display the list of MCUs and
then click the name of the MCU to use for running the conference.
Alternatively, click the Start option to schedule a conference to start
now, modifying its properties (such as name, duration, passwords etc.) or
to schedule the conference to start later (Reservations). For more details,
see Chapter 9, “Conference Reservations”.
Going Conferences list in the Browser pane of the main window.
•
•
When starting an On Going Conference, the system checks if the
participants assigned to this conference are already included in any other On
Going Conference or Reservation that is scheduled to start at the same time.
If such participants are found, the Duplicate Booking dialog box opens listing
the conflicting participants. For more details, see “Resolving Scheduling
Conflicts” on page 4-86.
If the MCU does not have enough resources to run the conference, an
appropriate error message is displayed.
4-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Defining Participant Properties
You can define new participants while setting up an On Going Conference or
a Reservation. In addition, you can define a participant template in the
Participant Templates Database/Participant Template file. When defining the
participant during an On Going Conference, the participants default
parameters are set according to the conference media and type. For example
when defining the participant during an On Going Audio Only conference,
the Audio Only check box is selected, and only Audio Only participants can
be defined.
To define a new participant during an On Going Conference or
Reservation Definition:
•
In the Conference Properties - Participants dialog box, click the New
button.
The Participant Properties - Identification dialog box opens.
4-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
For more details on how to define a participant template, see the MGC Manager
User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 7, “Participant Templates”.
For ISDN and T1-CAS Audio Only participants, see the MGC Manager User’s
Guide, VoicePlus Edition, Chapter 2, ”Defining Participant Properties”.
ISDN/ATM/MPI/T1-CAS Participant Definition
To define a new ISDN/ATM/MPI/T1-CAS participant:
When defining a new participant, the Participant Properties -
Identification dialog box opens.
1. Define the following parameters
Table 4-15: ISDN/ATM/MPI/T1-CAS Participant - Identification
Field/Option
Description
Name
Enter a unique name for the participant, using up to
80 characters.
4-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-15: ISDN/ATM/MPI/T1-CAS Participant - Identification (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Connection Type
Select the connection type:
•
Dial-in - Participants call the MCU at conference
time. You provide the participant with the MCU’s
dial-in number. When selecting this type, the
Meet Me Per options are enabled. This
connection type is applicable to ISDN, ATM and
MPI interfaces.
Note: Dial-in T1-CAS participants can only
connect as undefined participants.
•
Dial-out - At the predefined conference start
time, the MCU calls the participant. When
defining the participant, you must enter the
participant’s number.
Note: If the Dial-Out Manually option is disabled
in the Conference Properties - Participant tab,
the MCU automatically calls the participant at
conference time. If this option is enabled, the
operator must connect the participant.
•
Direct - For participants who are directly
connected to the MCU through a leased line.
This connection type is applicable to ISDN, MPI,
and T1-CAS interfaces. No dialing is required.
Interface Type
Select the network type used by the participant to
connect to the conference:
•
ISDN - for participants connecting via ISDN or
PSTN lines.
•
•
•
ATM - for participants using the ATM network.
MPI - for participants using a serial connection.
T1-CAS - for participants using a Channel
Associated Signaling (CAS) connection. As T1-
CAS participants are Audio Only, the MCU must
be configured to allow them in video
conferences. For more details on the definition of
Audio Only T1-CAS participants, see the MGC
Manager User’s Guide, VoicePlus Edition,
Chapter 2, Defining Participant Properties”.
4-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-15: ISDN/ATM/MPI/T1-CAS Participant - Identification (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Participant
Numbers
This parameter is enabled for the Dial-out connection
type, or when the Dial-in Meet Me Per Conference -
MCU option is selected.
Type the participant’s number (including country and
area codes when required) to be dialed by the
operator when connecting the participant to the
conference. Add a semicolon (;) between numbers
when several numbers are to be assigned to a
participant (one for each channel). For example,
9251222; 9251223; ….;9251xxx (in aggregation
mode).
If the Meet Me Per MCU option is enabled, the CLI
number is used to identify the participant and route
them to the appropriate conference. Enter the
participant’s CLI number.
Note: In order to support Bonding with specific
telecommunication switches, the pound key (#)
symbol needs to be added to the Dial-out number
sequence.
MCU Numbers
(Available only for the Dial-in connection)
Enter the MCU number as allocated to the MCU by
the carrier. The dial-in numbers are defined in the
ISDN Network Services - Span dialog box. Add a
semicolon (;) between numbers when several
numbers are to be assigned to the MCU.
If left blank, when the conference starts the MCU
automatically assigns a dial-in number from the list of
numbers defined in the ISDN Network Service.
Note: During an On Going Conference, the MCU
numbers are listed in the Network+Phone/IP column
of the main window Status pane. The format (number
of digits) depends on how the dial-in numbers are
forwarded from the PBX switch to the MCU, if the
PBX truncates part of the number.
Extension/
Identifier String
Used with a Prairie external recording system in
recording-enabled conferences. For a description of
recording options and setup, see the MGC Manager
User’s Guide, VoicePlus Edition, Chapter 8,
Recording”.
4-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-15: ISDN/ATM/MPI/T1-CAS Participant - Identification (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Meet me per
(Available only for the Dial-in connection)
Select:
•
•
•
Party - The participant dials a single number for
each group of channels in use.
Channel - The participant dials a different
number for each channel.
MCU-Conference - A single dial-in number (DID)
is assigned to all the conferences running on a
certain MCU. The MCU phone number is entered
in the Network Service – Span and Phones
dialog box. The participants are routed to the
appropriate conferences according to their phone
numbers (CLI) that are entered in the Participant
Numbers box. When a participant dials in using
the MCU number, the MCU identifies the
participant phone number and routes the
participant to the appropriate conference. This
option should be used only with PBXs supporting
the CLI (Caller ID) option.
Bonding Phone
Number
(Available only for the Dial-out connection type, and
should be used only if Bonding is the selected
Aggregation method for the participant.)
Enter a single number for all the aggregated
channels. The system automatically assigns the
appropriate numbers to the remaining channels.
With some switches, Bonding is supported only
when the pound key (#) symbol is added to the Dial-
out number sequence.
If left blank, the MCU automatically assigns the first
number that appears in the Participant Phone
Number box as the bonding number when the
conference starts.
4-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-15: ISDN/ATM/MPI/T1-CAS Participant - Identification (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
User Defined
fields 1-4
In any or all of the four User Defined fields, enter
general information for the participant, such as the
participant’s E-mail address, telephone number,
company name, location, or any required
information.
The titles of the User Defined fields can be modified
in the Database Manager -> Defaults -> User
Defined Defaults and loaded to the MGC Manager
application. For details, see Chapter 3, “Loading the
User Defined Default Set to the MGC Manager
Application” on page 3-36.
Note: The User Defined fields are displayed only if
the Show User Defined Fields in Participant
Parameters box is selected in the Database
Manager -> Defaults ->User Defined Defaults.
Broadcasting
Volume
You can control the volume of the audio transmitted
from the participant to the conference (broadcasting
volume), as well as the listening volume for the
participant.
Listening Volume
To adjust the volume, move the slider. The volume
scale is from 1 to 10, where 1 is the weakest and 10
the strongest volume. The volume of each endpoint’s
audio at connection time is set to 5. One movement
of the volume slider increases or decreases the
volume by one unit, equivalent to 3db.
Audio Only
VIP
When checked, indicates an Audio Only participant.
This option is automatically selected for T1-CAS
participants and cannot be canceled.
When checked, changes the participant’s status to
VIP to distinguish participants who require special
attention.
Note: The VIP status can also be changed during
the On Going Conference.
4-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-15: ISDN/ATM/MPI/T1-CAS Participant - Identification (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Save Participant
(Optional) When checked, saves the participant
definition as a template in the User Defined template
file or in the selected Database Group.
Note: This check box appears only when defining a
participant for a Reservation template in the
Participant Template file or when defining a
participant during a conference when Database
Group is the source.
Participant Linked
This check box appears only when defining a
participant during the definition of a Reservation
template in the database. Select this option to save
the participant as a template in the database and link
the participant to the Reservation template. The
participant is assigned to the selected database
Group. If this option is cleared, the participant is
embedded in the Reservation template and his/her
parameters are not saved in the database as a
Participant template for future use.
Label
(Optional) This field appears only when participant
definition is done directly in the database and
displays the label assigned to the participant. The
label is used for filtering the Participant Templates list
in the database. Non-administrative users can
assign only the labels assigned to them. Users with
administrator rights can assign any label created in
the system.
During the Reservation Template definition, the
Label assigned to the Reservation Template is also
automatically assigned to the Participant Template.
The labels are defined by administrators in the MGC
Database Manager module. For detailed information
on template types and use, refer to the MGC
Manager User’s Guide Volume II, Chapter 7,
“Database Templates”.
4-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
The definition of the Advanced parameters may be skipped for most
participants, but if you need to change the defaults or define additional
settings, open the tab.
2. Click the Advanced tab.
The participant’s Properties - Advanced dialog box opens.
4-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
3. If required, define the following parameters:
Table 4-16: ISDN/ATM/MPI/T1-CAS Participant - Advanced
Field/Option
Description
Aggregation
Select the aggregation method for ISDN/ATM/MPI video
participants:
•
Auto - Connects participants to the conference
according to their endpoint capabilities. When
connecting to the conference, the endpoint and the
MCU exchange capabilities information. During this
exchange, the MCU identifies the aggregation mode
used and connects the endpoint accordingly.
•
•
H221 - The standard communication protocol, in which
a different number is assigned to each channel. When
connecting the participant to the conference (Dial-out),
each of these numbers are dialed.
Bonding - A communication protocol that aggregates
two to thirty 64 Kbps B channels, to act as one large
bandwidth channel. If this option is enabled, set the
Connection Type in the Identification tab to Dial-out
and enter the Phone number in the Bonding Phone
Number field.
•
Multi-Rate - A communication protocol in which
channels are aggregated to form one dedicated line.
The MGC Manager currently supports aggregation of 6
channels to form one line rate of 384 Kbps (64 X
6=384). In such a case, the network ensures that all six
channels are synchronized and there are no intervals
between the arrivals of the data packets.
Number of
Channels
Indicates the number of channels used for a video ISDN/
ATM/MPI connection.
Select Auto to use the conference’s Line Rate setting.
This is also the mode recommended for ATM connections.
If the participant’s setting is different from the conference
setting, select the appropriate number of channels. During
an On Going Conference this setting may be disabled.
4-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-16: ISDN/ATM/MPI/T1-CAS Participant - Advanced (Continued)
Field/Option
Video Protocol
Description
Select the video compression standard:
•
Auto - Select this option to use the conference’s Video
Protocol settings and to enable the dynamic
adjustment of the Video Protocol. For more details, see
“Defining Advanced Media Settings” on page 4-57.
•
•
H261 - the video compression standard mandatory to
all endpoints.
H263 - a compression standard that provides improved
video quality. This standard is not supported by all
endpoints.
•
•
H264 - a video compression standard that improves
video quality at a line rate lower than 384 Kbps.
H264* - a Polycom proprietary standard for video
compression that improves video quality at a line rate
lower than 384 Kbps.
Note:
— When video protocol is set to Auto in the
Conference Properties – Settings, this overrides
the Video Protocol settings in the Participant
Properties – Advanced dialog box as the dynamic
mode is enabled and the video settings are forced
by the MCU.
— When Video Protocol is set to H.263 or H.264 and
the endpoint does not support it, the participant is
connected as Secondary (Audio only).
— During an On Going ISDN/ATM/MPI conference,
this setting may be disabled.
Recording
Designate the participant as an audio recording port
connected to an external recording device:
Select one of the following:
•
None – The participant is not connected to an external
recording device.
•
Dial up – The participant is used as the recording port
to an external device.
For more details, see the MGC Manager User’s Guide
VoicePlus Edition, Chapter 8, “Recording and Playback
Using Prairie Systems”.
4-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-16: ISDN/ATM/MPI/T1-CAS Participant - Advanced (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Encryption
Media information can be encrypted using an AES 128
algorithm. The Encryption options are affected by the
settings of the participant level flag in the system.cfg.
Select the appropriate encryption setting for the
participant:
•
Auto - The conference encryption setting (encrypted/
non-encrypted) is applied to the participant. In this
mode, the participant connects as encrypted only if the
conference is defined as encrypted.
•
•
Off - The participant joins the Conference as non-
encrypted.
On - The participant joins the Conference as
encrypted.
For more details, about encryption see the MGC Manager
User’s Guide Volume II, Chapter 1, “Media Encryption”.
Auto Detect
Select this option to enable the MGC unit to automatically
detect the line rate and video capabilities of incoming ISDN
calls and connect the participant accordingly, without prior
definition of the participant properties. The participant can
be connected at the maximum line rate set for the
conference. When this option is selected, the following
parameters are automatically detected by the MCU and
therefore are disabled: Aggregation, Number of Channels,
Video Protocol and Restrict Only.
Note: This option is disabled for participants using the MPI
and ATM Interface Types.
Restrict Only
Select this check box to indicate that the ISDN/ATM/MPI
participant is using a restricted line whose transfer rate per
channel is 56 Kbps (instead of 64 Kbps). This option is
valid for a participant in Transcoding or Continuous
Presence conferences only.
4-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-16: ISDN/ATM/MPI/T1-CAS Participant - Advanced (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
AGC
The Auto Gain Control (AGC) mechanism regulates audio
noise and volume by balancing the received signal to all
participants. Different endpoints and phones produce
specific source noises and volume. To provide a constant
output amplitude, AGC can be applied to all incoming
audio streams prior to mixing, thereby dynamically
adjusting the amplification of the input signal.
AGC is automatically enabled for all participants. Clear this
check box to disable this option for the participant.
Enhanced Video
This option is applicable to Standard Video cards and is
not required for participants connecting to conferences
which run on Video+ cards (that provide high quality video
combined with high line rates using one video port instead
of two).
The MGC unit can provide high quality video (30 frames
per second for incoming and outgoing video streams) for
line rates up to T1/ E1 in Transcoding and Continuous
Presence conferences. This is done by allocating two
video ports to the participant. One video port is used for
encoding, while the other is used for decoding the
incoming video stream.
Select this option to enable the high quality video feature
for the participant.
Note:
•
•
•
•
To work with 30 frames per second, the High Frame
Rate flag in the system.cfg must be enabled.
To work with bit rates higher than 768 Kbps, the High
Bit Rate flag in the system.cfg must be enabled.
During an On Going ISDN/ATM/MPI connected
conference this setting can be greyed out.
This option is disabled for Video Switching
conferences.
Service Name
Enter the name of the Network Service to be used to
connect the ISDN/ATM/MPI/T1-CAS participant to the
conference exactly as it is defined in the Network Service
list (the system is case sensitive).
4-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-16: ISDN/ATM/MPI/T1-CAS Participant - Advanced (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Service Name
(cont.)
If left blank, the default Network Service is used,
depending on the selected connection type. For example,
if the selected connection type is ISDN, the default ISDN
Network Service is used.
For more information on Network Services, refer to the
MGC Administrator’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 3.
Sub-Service Name This field is applicable to ISDN participants only.
If a sub-service is used, enter the sub-service name
exactly as it appears in the selected Network Service
definition. If left blank, the default sub-service defined in
the selected Network service is used.
Node Type
Select the node type from the drop-down list. The available
options for ISDN/ATM/MPI participants are:
•
MCU - Choose this setting for a dial-out participant in a
DTMF Enabled Cascaded conference.
•
Terminal (default) - Use this setting at all other times.
Num-type
Select the type of communication line for ISDN/ATM/MPI
participants.
The available options are National; International; Network
These options represent programs provided by the carrier,
and are defined in the Network Service. Select Taken
from Service to indicate that the program should be
retrieved from the Network Service definition.
Save Participant/
Participant Linked
These check boxes are the same as the check boxes that
appear in the Properties Identification dialog box.
For more information, see the description of “Save
Participant” on page 4-107.
4. Click OK to complete the participant definition.
The participant is added to the On Going Conference, Reservation or the
Reservation Template, depending on the conference/participant
definition mode.
4-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
IP (H.323 and SIP) Participant Definition
The IP participant (endpoint) can be an H.323 or a SIP participant. Most of
the parameters are common to both IP participant types. Participants can be
defined while setting up an On Going Conference or Reservation. In addition,
you can define a Participant Template in the Participant Templates Database/
User Template file.
To define a new IP participant:
When defining a new participant, the Participant Properties - Identification
dialog box opens.
H323 Participant Properties
SIP Participant Properties
1. Define the parameters relevant to the participant type. Note that the
dialog box reflects your selection in the Interface Type field. H.323
participants are defined by their IP address and/or alias, whereas SIP
participants are defined by their IP address and/or URI.
4-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-17: IP Participant Properties - Identification
Field/Option
Description
Name
Enter the participant’s identifying name using up to
80 characters.
Connection Type
Select the connection type:
•
Dial-in - The participant dials the conference.
When dialing in to join the conference, the
participant dials the conference number,
comprising the IP Network Service Prefix and the
conference Numeric ID. Alternatively the IP
card’s IP address or alias can be dialed on the
endpoint. SIP participants dial the conference
URI (name and domain name).
Note: Undefined participants can join
conferences by dialing in, as long as there are
sufficient card resources.
•
Dial-out - The MCU dials out to the participant.
You must enter relevant contact details (SIP URI/
IP address) to enable the MCU to call the
participant.
Interface Type
Participant IP
Select the network type used by the IP endpoint to
connect to the conference:
•
•
H.323 - The endpoint uses the H.323 protocol.
SIP - The endpoint uses the SIP protocol.
Enter the IP address of the participant’s endpoint.
•
For H.323 participants:
— In a Dial-out connection, enter the IP
address or alias of the endpoint to be called
by the MCU. If you entered only an alias the
gatekeeper can resolve the participant’s
alias into an IP address.
— In a Dial-in connection, the participants IP
address or alias are entered. The IP address
or alias is used to identify and route the
participant to the appropriate conference.
•
For SIP endpoints, Participant IP is optional as
these participants are located by resolving their
names into IP addresses by SIP proxy.
4-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-17: IP Participant Properties - Identification (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Signaling Port
Indicates the signaling port used for participant
connection.
For H.323 the default port is 1720.
For SIP, the default port is 5060.
SIP Address
SIP Only
Enter the endpoint address in the format:
[user name]@[domain].
Note: The SIP URI adheres to URI rules: no spaces
or special characters such as commas, quotation
marks, inverted tags and so forth either in the user
name or in the domain part.
Address Type
Select the format in which the SIP address is written:
SIP Only
•
SIP URI - Uses the format of an E-mail address,
typically containing a user name and a host
name: sip:[user]@[host]. For example,
sip:[email protected].
•
TEL URI - Used when the endpoint does not
specify the domain that should interpret a
telephone number that has been input by the
user. Rather, each domain through which the
request passes would be given that opportunity.
As an example, a user in an airport might log in
and send requests through an outbound proxy in
the airport. If the users enters "411" (this is the
phone number for local directory assistance in
the United States), this number needs to be
interpreted and processed by the outbound
proxy in the airport, and not by the user's home
domain.
In this case, tel: 411 is the correct choice.
Alias Name
H.323 Only
If you are using the endpoint’s alias and not the IP
address, first select the type of alias and then enter
the endpoint’s alias as registered with the
gatekeeper. Enter the alias name using the naming
conventions appropriate to its type (see following).
4-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-17: IP Participant Properties - Identification (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Each alias can be of a different type:
Alias Type
H.323 Only
•
•
•
•
•
•
H.323 ID (alphanumeric ID)
E.164 (digits 0-9, *, #)
URL ID (URL style address)
Email ID (email address format)
Transport ID (IP address: port number)
Party Number (identical to the E.164 format)
Notes:
•
Select the appropriate alias type before entering
an alias name.
•
Although all types are supported, the type of
alias is dependent on the gatekeeper’s
capabilities. The most commonly supported alias
types are H.323 ID and E.164. Refer to your
gatekeeper documentation for information on its
supported alias types.
Extension/
Identifier String
This is the DTMF string sent to the recording or other
DTMF activated system; an outgoing DTMF
operation initiated by the MCU. This is useful for
identifying extensions associated with SIP users.
Each type of recording system has a specific DTMF
string structure, for example, when using the Prairie
recording services. For more details, see the MGC
Manager User’s Guide, VoicePlus Edition, Chapter
8.
4-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-17: IP Participant Properties - Identification (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
User Defined fields
1-4
In any or all of the four User Defined fields, enter
general information for the participant, such as the
participant’s E-mail address, telephone number,
company name, location, or any required
information.
The titles of the User Defined fields can be modified
in the Database Manager -> Defaults -> User
Defined Defaults and loaded to the MGC Manager
application. For details, see Chapter 3.
Note: The User Defined fields are displayed only if
the Show User Defined Fields in Participant
Parameters box is selected in the Database
Manager -> Defaults ->User Defined Defaults.
Broadcasting
Volume
You can control the volume of the audio transmitted
from the participant to the conference, as well as the
listening volume for the participant. On the volume
scale, 1 is the weakest and 10 the strongest volume.
One movement of the volume slider increases or
decreases the volume by one unit, equivalent to 3db.
The volume of each endpoint’s audio at connection
time is set to 5. To adjust the sound, move the
volume slider.
Listening Volume
Audio Only
VIP
Select this option to define the participant as an
audio-only participant, with no video capabilities.
When checked, changes the participant’s status to
VIP, to distinguish participants who require special
attention.
Note: The VIP status can also be changed during
the On Going Conference.
Save Participant
Select this option if you want to save this participant
as a template in the User Defined template file or in
the selected database group.
Note: This check box appears only when you define
a participant while creating a new reservation
[template] in the User Template file or when defining
a participant during an On Going Conference and a
database group is selected as the source.
4-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-17: IP Participant Properties - Identification (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Participant Linked
Select this option to save the participant as a
template in the database and link the participant to
the Reservation template. The participant is
assigned to the selected database Group. If this
option is cleared, the participant is embedded in the
Reservation template and his/her parameters are
not saved in the database for future use.
Note: This check box appears only when defining a
participant during the definition of a Reservation
template in the database.
2. Optional: Click the Advanced tab. The Advanced parameters definition
may be skipped for most participants if the default settings are used.
The IP Participant Properties - Advanced dialog box opens.
H323 and SIP Participant Advanced Properties
4-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
3. Define the following parameters:
Table 4-18: IP Participant Properties - Advanced
Field/Option
Description
Video Bit Rate
Kbits/sec
This option is enabled when the Auto Video Bit
Rate check box is cleared. It allows you to specify
the participant’s video transfer rate. When adding a
new participant during an On Going Conference this
option defaults to the conference setting.
Note: It is recommended to use the multiples of 100
bits per second.
Auto Video Bit
Rate
Select this check box to use the Line Rate defined
for the conference, or clear it to define the video rate
for the participant. This check box is automatically
selected (and cannot be cleared) when defining a
new participant during an On Going Conference.
Service Name
Enter the name of the IP Network Service handling
the call. Note that the system is case sensitive. If left
blank, the default IP Network Service (H.323 or SIP
depending on the Interface Type) is used.
4-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-18: IP Participant Properties - Advanced (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Video Protocol
This option defaults to the conference setting when
adding a new participant during an On Going
Conference.
Select the video compression standard:
•
Auto - Use the conference’s Video Protocol
settings and enable the dynamic adjustment of
the Video Protocol. For more details, see
“Defining Advanced Media Settings” on page 4-
57.
•
•
H.261 - The base video compression standard
that is supported by all endpoints/participants.
H.263 - A video compression standard that
provides enhanced video quality. This standard
is not supported by all endpoints.
•
•
H.264 - A video compression standard that
provides enhanced video quality especially in
line rates of up to 384 Kbps. This standard is not
supported yet by all endpoints.
H.264* - A Polycom proprietary standard for
video compression that improves video qaulity at
a line rate lower than 384Kbps.
Note: When the Video Protocol is set to Auto in the
Conference Properties - Settings dialog box, this
overrides the participant’s Video Protocol settings,
because Auto enables the dynamic mode in which
the video settings are forced by the MCU. In such a
case, the system first tries to connect the participant
using the H.264 video protocol. Only if the endpoint
does not support H.264, the system tries to connect
the participant using H.263 or H.261. If the
conference video protocol is set to H.264 or H.263
and the endpoint does not support this protocol, the
participant is connected as Secondary (audio only).
4-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-18: IP Participant Properties - Advanced (Continued)
Field/Option
Recording
Description
Designate the IP participant as an audio recording
port connected to an external recording device.
•
None - The participant is not connected to an
external recording device.
•
Dial up - The participant is used as the recording
port to an external device.
For more details, see the MGC Manager User’s
Guide, VoicePlus Edition, Chapter 8.
AGC
The Auto Gain Control (AGC) mechanism regulates
audio noise and volume by balancing the received
signal to all participants. Different endpoints and
phones produce specific source noises and volume.
To provide a constant output amplitude, AGC can be
applied to all incoming audio streams prior to
mixing, thereby dynamically adjusting the
amplification of the input signal.
AGC is automatically enabled for all participants.
Clear this check box to disable this option for the
participant.
Encryption
Media information can be encrypted using an AES
128 algorithm. The Encryption options are affected
by the settings of the participant level flag in the
system.cfg. Select the appropriate encryption
setting for the participant:
•
Auto - The conference encryption setting
(encrypted/non-encrypted) is applied to the
participant. In this mode, the participant
connects as encrypted only if the conference is
defined as encrypted.
•
•
Off - The participant joins the Conference as
non-encrypted.
On - The participant joins the Conference as
encrypted.
Note: SIP participants do not support this type of
encryption.
For more details, about encryption see the MGC
Manager User’s Guide Volume II, Chapter 1.
4-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-18: IP Participant Properties - Advanced (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Select the node type from the list:
Node Type
•
Terminal — The default. This setting is
applicable for all settings that are not DTMF
enabled cascaded conferences.
•
MCU — Select this setting for a dial-out
participant in a DTMF enabled cascaded
conference. For more details, see the MGC
Manager User’s Guide Volume II, Chapter 1.
Quality Of Service
Enhanced Video
Click this button to modify the QoS setting for this
participant. If no changes are made the definitions
are taken from the Network Service definition.
For details see “Quality of Service for IP
Participants” on page 4-125.
This option is applicable to Standard Video cards
and is not required for participants connecting to
conferences running on Video+ cards (that provide
high quality video combined with high line rates
using one video port instead of two).
The MGC unit can provide high quality video (30
frames per second for incoming and outgoing video
streams) for line rates up to T1/ E1 in Transcoding
and Continuous Presence conferences. This is done
by allocating two video ports to the participant. One
video port is used for encoding, while the other is
used for decoding the incoming video stream.
Select this option to enable the high quality video
feature for the participant.
Note:
•
•
•
To work with 30 frames per second, the High
Frame Rate flag in the system.cfg must be
enabled.
To work with bit rates higher than 768 Kbps, the
High Bit Rate flag in the system.cfg must be
enabled.
This option is disabled for Video Switching
conferences.
4-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-18: IP Participant Properties - Advanced (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Enable PSTN
Dial-in
For internal use only.
4. Click OK to complete the definition of the H.323 or SIP participant.
The participant is added to the On Going Conference, Reservation or to
the Reservation Template, depending on the conference definition mode.
4-124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Quality of Service for IP Participants
Quality of Service (QoS) is a collective measure of the level of service
delivered to a customer. QoS is the level of assurance for an application that
the network can meet its service requirements. The QoS parameters may be
defined at the participant level and at the network services level. The
participant properties setting has priority over the network services level.
For more details on services configuration, see the MGC Manager
Administrator’s Guide, Chapter 3, “Defining Network Services”.
In the Participant Properties dialog box, you can enable or disable QoS for
H.323 or SIP participants, or allow the values defined in the Network Service.
To define Quality of Service for a H.323 or a SIP participant:
1. In the Participant Properties - Advanced dialog box, click the Quality of
Service button.
The Participant Properties - IP Quality Of Service dialog box opens.
2. Define the following parameters:
3. Click OK to complete the QoS definition for the H.323 or SIP
participant. In the Participant Properties - Advanced dialog box, click
OK to apply the settings.
4-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
Table 4-19: IP Participant Properties - IP Quality of Service
Field/Option
Description
IP Quality of
Service
QoS refers to the media transfer portion of a point to point
or point to multipoint call. Select the QoS option:
•
•
•
Disable - QoS is not implemented for this participant.
Enable - To modify the participant QoS properties.
From Service - (Default) To use the QoS settings of
the IP Network Service that handles the call.
DiffServ/
Precedence
Select the QoS mechanism for prioritizing traffic on the IP
network:
•
•
DiffServ
Precedence - (enables additional parameters)
For more details, refer to the MGC Administrator’s Guide,
Chapter 3, “Defining Network Services”.
Audio and Video
You can prioritize audio and video IP packets to ensure
that all participants in the conference hear and see each
other clearly.
Select the desired priority. The scale is from 0 to 5, where
0 is the lowest priority and 5 is the highest, ensuring
highest quality and lowest latency.
The recommended priority for both audio and video is 4
to ensure that the delay for both packets is the same and
audio and the video packets are synchronized.
Selecting 5 for video and 4 for video will result in too
many packets waiting to be transmitted and delay
between the audio and the video may vary, causing lip
sync.
4-126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 4-19: IP Participant Properties - IP Quality of Service (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
ToS
Type of Service (TOS) defines optimization tagging for
routing the conferences audio and video packets.
Routers that support the Precedence mechanism can
implement classification by TOS optimization tags when
transferring IP packets.
Select the ToS (Type of Service) method that defines the
route used by LAN router to transfer the packets.
•
Delay - The recommended default for video
conferencing; prioritized audio and video packets
tagged with this definition are delivered with minimal
delay (the throughput of IP packets minimizes the
queue sequence and the delay between packets).
•
None - No optimization definition is applied. This is a
compatibility mode in which routing is based on
Precedence priority settings only. Select None if you
do not know which standard your router supports.
4-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Setting Up Conferences
4-128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Monitoring Conferences
You can monitor On Going Conferences and perform various operations
while conferences are running.
Three levels of monitoring are available with the MGC Manager:
•
•
•
General Monitoring - You can monitor the general status of all On
Going Conferences and their participants in the MGC Manager main
window.
Conference Level Monitoring - You can view additional information
regarding a specific conference and modify its parameters if required,
using the Conference Properties option.
Participant Level Monitoring - You can view detailed information on
the participant's status, using the Participant Properties option. During
attended conferences you can monitor the status of the participants
waiting in the Participants Queue.
This chapter describes the status indicators and icons and the various
monitoring options and methods according to these levels and according to
the type of participant or the type of connection to the conference. This
chapter also includes a description of gateway sessions monitoring.
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
General Monitoring
You monitor a conference to keep track of its participants and its progress.
When monitoring a conference, you can check whether all its participants are
correctly connected and whether errors and faults have occurred.
The MGC Manager allows operators to monitor several On Going
Conferences from the same or different MCUs simultaneously. The On Going
Conference information is easily available and clearly represented.
Participants in IVR enabled conferences can be in one of the following stages:
Greeting (Welcome), Attended, On Hold, and Conferencing.
Using an IVR service, the participant is guided to the conference using a
voice-prompt menu and DTMF input from the participant endpoint. The
connection is automated, but an Operator is at hand to assist the caller.
In IVR enabled conferences set as Attended with Operator assistance, the
Operator controls the participant connection to the conference moving the
participant from one stage to another. The move is performed either
interactively using drag-and-drop, using the right-click pop-up menu, or the
appropriate buttons on the Attended Participant Conference toolbar. Special
icons are used to indicate the participant status in an attended conference.
•
In the Greeting state, the participants connect to the Entry Queue or
directly to an IVR-enabled conference where they hear a welcome
message (and view a welcome video slide) and are guided through their
connection process using voice prompts. In the Entry Queue, participants
are routed to the destination conference according to conference
Numeric ID they enter. Participants connecting directly to an IVR-
enabled conference are allowed in to the conference once they have
entered the appropriate conference or chairperson password. If the Entry
Queue or the IVR-enabled conference is set to Attended mode (The
Entry Queue service or the IVR service is configured to “wait for
Operator Assistance”), the participants are moved to the Participants
Queue where they wait for the operator to connect them to the
conference.
•
In the Attended state, the participant is moved to the Operator
conference, where after a short conversation with the participant, the
Operator moves the participant to the appropriate conference (Home
conference) or places the participant on hold.
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
•
In the On Hold state, the participant is placed on hold where she or he
hears background music (and view the same welcome video slide) and
wait for the operator’s assistance. Participants are also placed on hold
and moved to the participants queue when they enter the wrong
conference Numeric ID (while in the Entry Queue) or the wrong
password where they wait for the operator to connect them to the
conference. This option must be enabled in the Entry Queue or the IVR
Service and if there is an Operator conference running on the MCU.
•
In the Conferencing state, the participant is connected to the conference.
Operator assistance can be requested via DTMF codes during the On
Going conference if it is configured in the IVR Service assigned to the
conference.
Using the Main Window Panes for Monitoring
You can view current statuses in the MGC Manager main window panes and
tables that show conference, connection, media and participant indicators.
Browser pane
Status pane
Monitor pane
You can adjust both the columns and the rows in the Monitor and the Status
pane tables to suit your monitoring priorities.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
•
•
To modify the order of columns, select and drag the column labels to the
desired location.
To sort items in a column, click a column heading once for descending
order, and click again to sort the items in ascending order.
Listing Conference Properties
The properties of an On Going Conference can be viewed in the Status pane
or in the Monitor pane of the main window. The Status pane enables you to
view the properties of a single conference or list all On Going Conferences
(without participant details), while the Monitor pane enables you to view
several conferences simultaneously, and in detail. This pane displays
additional parameters and allows you to filter the information, for example to
display only those participants who require the operator’s assistance.
Viewing On Going Conference Status
In the On Going Conferences list, you can view all the conferences currently
running on the MCU. You can view the statuses of the conferences either by
expanding the On Going Conferences tree or by clicking the On Going
Conferences icon. The system simultaneously lists all the activated
conferences and Entry Queues.
To display conference information in the Status pane:
1. In the MGC Manager window Browser pane, expand the MCU tree.
2. Expand the On Going Conferences icon to view the list of currently
running conferences.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The On Going Conferences and the details (properties) of each
conference are listed in the Status pane table, providing quick and easy
access to such information as conference dial-in numbers, H.323 service
prefixes, conference numeric ID, and passwords.
Table 5-1 describes the information displayed about the conferences in
the main window Status pane. The columns are listed in the default order,
however you can rearrange the columns, see “Using the Main Window
Panes for Monitoring” on page 5-3.
Table 5-1: On Going Conference - Status Pane Columns
Column Name
Description
Name
The name of the conference and an icon indicating
the conference type and status. For a detailed
description of icons and conference types see
Table 5-2 on page 5-10.
Status
Additional information about the conference. For a
detailed description see Table 5-2 on page 5-10.
Connection
The connection status of the conference. For a
detailed description, see Table 5-2 on page 5-10.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Table 5-1: On Going Conference - Status Pane Columns (Continued)
Column Name
Description
Starts At
End Time
ID
The time the conference started.
The scheduled end time of the conference.
A sequential ID number assigned to the conference
by the system, for use by the Call Detail Record
(CDR) utility.
Connected
The number of participants currently connected to
the conference.
Dial-in Number
Join Conference
The dialing number that participants can use to
access the conference via an ISDN line.
The names of conferences the operator has joined:
•
In an Operator Conference - indicates the name
of the conference joined by the operator.
•
In an On Going Conference - indicates the name
of the operator who joined the conference (the
Operator conference name is identical to the
operator’s login name).
Entry Password
The password to be used by participants to enter the
conference.
Chairperson
Password
The password to be used by a participant to enter
the conference as the chairperson.
Numeric ID
The unique-per-MCU Conference Numeric ID as
assigned by the operator or the system. This number
can be used by IP participants as a part of a dialing
string, when accessing the conference.
H323 Service
Prefix
The IP Network Service prefix that can be used as
part of the dialing string by IP endpoints.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Listing On Going Conference Participants in the Status Pane
You can view the detailed status information of the participants in an On
Going Conference.
To display participant information in the Status pane:
1. Expand the MCU tree to list its options.
2. Expand the On Going Conferences tree to view the list of currently
running conferences.
3. In the On Going Conferences list, click the icon of the conference whose
participants you want to view in the Status pane.
The participant details are displayed in the Status pane table. You can
adjust the columns order to suit your monitoring priorities.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Listing On Going Conference Participants in the Monitoring
Pane
You can display several conferences and their participants in the Monitoring
pane to monitor both the conferences and their participants in one window.
To display participant information in the Monitor pane:
1. In the Browser pane, expand the On Going Conferences list.
2. Right-click the icon of the conference to monitor, and then click
Monitor to view the conference and its participants in the Monitor pane.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The conference details are listed in the Monitor pane. Each row in the
Monitor pane table represents a conference or a participant. Each column
contains status information about the item that is being monitored.
To view the participants of another conference, repeat step 2.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
MGC Manager Icons
The following tables list and describe all status icons currently used by the
MGC Manager.
Table 5-2 lists the status icons and describes the information that can be
monitored in the MGC Manager main window. Columns are listed in the
default order.
Table 5-2: On Going Conference - Monitor Pane Columns
Column
Name
Icon
Indication
Description
Name
The name of the On Going Conference or participant, and an
icon indicating the conference and participant type and status.
Conference Indicators
Video
In this type of conference,
conference
participants use audio and video
channels to connect. This
conference may include both Audio
Only and video participants.
Audio Only
conference
This type of conference can be run
on an Audio Only MCU (Voice
Plus) or on a unified MCU.
Note: Audio Only conferences are
described in the MGC Manager
User’s Guide, VoicePlus Edition.
Operator
conference
Audio only or video. Allows the
operator and a single participant to
talk in a side conference without
disturbing the On Going
conference. For this purpose, the
participant is moved to the
Operator conference from the
Entry Queue, IVR Queue,
Welcome Queue, Greet and Guide
or On Going Conference.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 5-2: On Going Conference - Monitor Pane Columns (Continued)
Column
Name
Icon
Indication
Description
Name (cont.)
End-of-
conference
alert
Indicates that the conference is
about to end.
Faulty audio
or video
conference
An exclamation point next to the
conference icon indicates that the
conference has a problem and
requires operator’s assistance.
The cause of the problem is listed
in the Connection column.
Secure
conference
A conference has been secured by
the chairperson to prevent outside
participants and operators from
joining, monitoring or controlling it.
For all secure conference statuses,
see Table 5-7 on page 5-27.
Participant Indicators
Dial-in participants who were undefined prior to the conference
start, are named using the conference name and a sequential
number that appears between brackets.
Standard
participant
Any dial-in or dial-out participant
connected to the conference.
Chairperson/
Leader
The participant defined as the
conference chairperson/leader.
The chairperson can manage the
conference using touch-tone
signals (DTMF codes), for example
lock or unlock the conference to
dial-in participants, initiate a voting
session, be the exclusive speaker,
mute all other participants.
Lecturer
The participant defined as the
conference Lecturer.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Table 5-2: On Going Conference - Monitor Pane Columns (Continued)
Column
Name
Icon
Indication
Description
Name (cont.)
Operator
The participant defined as the
MGC Manager Operator. The
operator manages an On Going
Conference, connects and
disconnects participants, moves
participants between conferences,
assists participants, and more.
VIP
participant/
VIP
A participant or a chairperson
defined as a VIP, for preferential
assistance. The VIP status does
not change the role of the
participant.
chairperson
Questioner
A participant who is currently
waiting in the Question-and-
Answer queue.
Current
The current questioner in a
questioner
Question-and-Answer session.
Disconnected When any type of defined
participant
participant is disconnected from
the conference, the respective icon
is disabled.
(Gray)
Faulty
connected
participant
An exclamation point next to the
icon indicates that the participant
has a problem and requires
operator’s assistance. The cause
of the problem is listed in the
Connection column.
Status
Displays additional information about On Going Conferences
and their participants, and the number of connected participants.
Locked
conference
The conference is locked to dial-in
participants.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 5-2: On Going Conference - Monitor Pane Columns (Continued)
Column
Name
Icon
Indication
Description
Status (cont.)
On Hold
The conference is on hold; all
participants hear background
music and, in a video conference,
view a video slide.
On Hold and
Locked
The conference was placed on
hold and is locked to dial-in
participants.
IVR Service
Voting
A video conference with an
enabled IVR Service.
Voting session is in progress,
where participants express their
preference on a set of choices
using the touch-tone keypad.
Connected
The conference is running in a
regular fashion.
Connection
Indicates the connection status of the conference or a
participant.
Additional statuses are available during a Greet and Guide
conference.
Conference Connection Status
No Indication
The conference is running
smoothly.
Empty
No participant was defined for this
conference, or none of the defined
participants are connected.
Not Full
Not all the participants who were
defined for this conference, are
connected.
Faulty
Connection
Participants are connected, but the
connection is problematic,
therefore the conference cannot
run normally.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Table 5-2: On Going Conference - Monitor Pane Columns (Continued)
Column
Name
Icon
Indication
Description
Connection
(cont.)
Single
Participant
Only one participant is defined, or
only one of the defined participants
is connected
Resource
Deficiency
The resources currently installed in
the MCU, such as audio cards,
cannot handle the requested
conference because it exceeds its
limitations.
Bad
Resources
A fault occurred in one of the
cards.
Participant Indicators
Connected
The participant is successfully
connected to the conference.
Disconnected The participant is disconnected
from the conference. This status
may occur when the participant is
disconnected from the On Going
Conference either by the operator
or from the participant side.
(Gray)
Connecting
Displayed during the connection
process of a participant to the
conference.
Stand By
In a conference that was set to
Dial-out Manually, the dial-out
participant is waiting to be
connected to the conference by the
operator.
Waiting for
Dial-in
The system is waiting for the
defined dial in participant to dial
into the conference.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 5-2: On Going Conference - Monitor Pane Columns (Continued)
Column
Name
Icon
Indication
Description
Connection
(cont.)
Partial
connection
The connection process is not yet
complete; the video channel has
not been connected.
Faulty
Connection
The participant is connected, but
problems occurred in the
connection, such as
synchronization loss.
Secondary
Connection
The participant is connected
without video (audio only). This
status occurs when the
participant's endpoint does not
support the video parameters
required by the conference.
Noisy Line
The line of this participant was
detected by the system as noisy.
Note: This indicator is used only
when the automatic noisy line
detection option was enabled in
the “system.cfg”.
Participant
Numbers\
IP Address\
SIP Address
Displays the participant and MCU phone numbers or IP address/
alias, depending on the supported network and connection type.
In dial-in connection, displays the CLI number (ISDN) or IP
address/alias of the participant calling the MCU (marked by the
letter P) and the MCU number or IP address/alias dialed by the
participant (marked by the letter M). In dial-out connection
displays the dialed number (ISDN) or IP address/alias (H.323) of
the participant.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Table 5-2: On Going Conference - Monitor Pane Columns (Continued)
Column
Name
Icon
Indication
Description
Connection
Type
Identifies the defined type of participant's connection to the
conference.
Dial-out
The MCU (conference) dials to the
participant.
Dial-in
The participant calls the MCU
(conference).
Direct
connection
Leased Line connection (ISDN
only).
Audio
Video
Sync.
Indicates whether the participant's audio is connected and the
status of the audio channel. For details see Table 5-4.
Indicates whether the participant’s video channel is connected,
and the status of the video connection. For details see Table 5-5.
Indicates whether the participant's site is synchronized. For
H.323 participants, indicates the general synchronization status
of Video Switch, Protocol Sync Loss and Video Intra Sync.
•
•
OK - there is no synchronization problem.
l-sync loss - there is a general synchronization problem with
the MCU.
•
•
•
r-sync loss - there is a general synchronization problem with
the participant site.
l-video sync loss - there is a video synchronization problem
with the MCU.
r-video sync loss - there is a video synchronization problem
with the participant site.
To see the number of times that the sync loss problem occurred
(either in the remote or the local site) see the Sync Loss Cont
and V Sync Loss Count columns.
Tx Rate
The line rate in which data sent from the MCU is received by the
endpoint. For H.323 participants indicates the total line rate of all
the channels (agreed rate) in which data sent from the MCU is
received by the endpoint.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 5-2: On Going Conference - Monitor Pane Columns (Continued)
Column
Name
Icon
Indication
Description
Rx Rate
The line rate in which data sent from the endpoint is received by
the MCU. For H.323 participants indicates the total line rate of all
the channels (agreed rate) in which data sent from the endpoint
is received by the MCU.
Retries Left
Indicates the remaining number of attempts the system makes to
reach disconnected participants and connect them to the
conference. You set this parameter in the Options menu
Communication option. Once the participant connects to the
conference, the number of retries is set to 0.
Media
Identifies the participant's media types: Audio, Video and Data.
Member
Video
Sources
Identifies the participant who is viewed by other conference
participants. In a Video Switching conference, the current video
source is the speaker of this conference. In a Continuous
Presence conference - depending on the Video Layout - several
participants may be viewed simultaneously.
Channels #
Identifies the number of channels that are used for connecting
this participant.
Note: This parameter is not displayed for H.323 participants.
Aggregation Displays the aggregation method of the channels that are used
for connecting this participant: H.221, Bonding or Multi Rate.
Note: This parameter is not displayed for H.323 participants.
ID
The participant ID as assigned by the system.
Sync Loss
Count
For ISDN/ATM/MPI participants, indicates the general
synchronization status. R indicates the endpoint (remote) status
while L indicates the MCU status. A dash “– “indicates that there
is no sync loss problem, while numbers indicate the number of
times that the sync loss problem occurred at the remote or the
local site.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Table 5-2: On Going Conference - Monitor Pane Columns (Continued)
Column
Name
Icon
Indication
Description
V Sync Loss Indicates the video synchronization status. R indicates the
Count
endpoint (remote) status while L indicates the MCU status. A
dash “–” indicates that there is no sync loss problem, while
numbers indicate the number of times that the video sync loss
problem occurred at the remote or the local site.
Disconnec-
tion Cause
Displays the disconnection cause for a participant who is
disconnected from the conference.
Q&A
Position
Indicates the position held by the participant in the Q&A Queue:
“1” being the next to speak, “2” being second up, and so on. This
information is cleared when the participant begins to speak.
Q&A Waiting Displays the total time spent by the participant waiting in the Q&A
Time
Queue. This information is cleared when the participant begins to
speak.
Last Vote
During a voting session, displays the last vote that the selected
participant entered (using a DTMF code).
Sub
Conference
Name
Indicates whether the participant is in an Invite Session.
The Invite option is available in Audio Only Conferences and
enables the chairperson to dial-out (during an On Going
Conference) to a participant inviting them to join. Displays “Invite”
for the chairperson and the invited participant.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Additional Participant Statuses
Table 5-3 lists additional participant icons that are displayed when the
participant is connected to an IVR-enabled conference. If none of these
statuses occur, the Status column in the Status pane remains empty.
Table 5-3: Participant in IVR-enabled Conference Status Icons
Icon
Description
The participant is connected to the MCU and has entered the
Entry Queue or the IVR queue.
The participant was moved to the Operator conference and is
being assisted by the operator.
The participant has requested the operator’s assistance.
The participant has requested the operator’s assistance for
the conference. Usually this means that the operator is
requested to join the conference.
The participant was placed on hold - is not currently taking
part in any conference. While on hold, the participant hears
background music and (in video conferences) views the
Welcome slide.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Participant’s Audio Status
Table 5-4 lists icons that indicate the current audio status of the participant.
Table 5-4: Participant Audio Status Icons
Icon
Description
The audio channel of the participant is connected.
(Green)
The audio channel is disconnected.
(Gray)
This participant is the current conference speaker.
This participant is the conference’s Exclusive Speaker; in this
mode, all other participants are automatically muted.
Transmission of audio from the conference to the participant is
blocked (video only conferences).
The audio channel of the participant is muted by the participant
(from the endpoint).
The audio channel of the participant is muted by the participant
and by the MCU.
The audio channel of the participant is muted by the participant.
Audio transmission from the conference to the participant site is
blocked (video only conferences).
The audio channel of the participant is muted by the operator.
The audio channel of the participant is muted by the operator.
Audio transmission from the conference to the participant site is
blocked (video only conferences).
The audio channel of the participant is muted by the participant
and the operator.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 5-4: Participant Audio Status Icons (Continued)
Icon Description
The audio is muted by the participant and by the operator.
Audio transmission from the conference to the participant site is
blocked (video only conferences).
The audio channel of the participant is muted by the operator
and the MCU.
The audio channel of the participant is automatically muted by
the MCU. (Exclusive Speaker mode, Lecture Show).
The audio channel of the participant is automatically muted and
blocked by the MCU. Audio transmission from the conference
to the participant site is blocked (video only).
The audio channel of the participant is muted by the participant
and by the MCU. Audio transmission from the conference to
the participant is blocked (video only).
The audio channel of the participant is muted by the operator
and by the MCU. Audio transmission from the conference to
the participant is blocked (video only).
The audio channel of the participant is muted by the participant,
operator and the MCU.
The audio channel of the participant is muted by the participant,
the operator, and the MCU. Audio transmission from the
conference to the participant is blocked (video only).
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Participant’s Video Status
Table 5-5 lists icons that indicate the current video status of the participant.
Table 5-5: Participant Video Status Icons
Icon
Indication
Description
Video participant
connected
The video channel of the participant is
connected.
(Green)
Video participant
disconnected
The participant is disconnected from
the video conference.
(Gray)
(Gray)
Video participant
connected as
audio only
The video channel could not be
connected, therefore the participant is
connected as Secondary (audio only).
Video channel
muted
The video channel is muted by the
participant from the endpoint.
Video channel
muted
The video channel is muted by the
operator.
Video channel
muted
The video channel is muted by the
participant and by the operator.
Video channel
muted
The video channel is muted by the
MCU (Lecture Show).
Video channel
muted
The video channel is muted by the
participant and the MCU (Lecture
Show).
Video channel
muted
The video channel is muted by the
operator and the MCU (Lecture Show).
Video channel
muted
The video channel is muted by the
participant, the operator and the MCU
(Lecture Show).
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Monitor Filter
Using the Monitor Filter feature, you can select to view only those
participants who have connection problems or require the operator’s
assistance. Participants may need assistance when:
•
•
•
•
•
•
they are unable to connect to the conference
manual dial-out is selected for a conference
they have requested help
they were placed on hold
the line is noisy
they are waiting in the Question and Answer queue
To display only those participants who require your attention:
1. Expand the On Going Conferences list.
2. Right-click the icon of the conference whose participants you want to
monitor, and then click Monitor Filter.
The Participants Monitoring Filter dialog box opens.
3. Select the check boxes to indicate the participant statuses that you want
to monitor. Clear the check boxes of the participant statuses that you do
not want to monitor. You can request to monitor any or all options.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Table 5-6 describes the available categories of participant status that you
can filter and view in the Monitor pane.
Table 5-6: Participant Monitoring Filters
Filtering Option
Description
Faulty Participant Participants who have problems connecting to the
conference, or cannot connect their video channel
(join the conference as Secondary), or whose
endpoint has lost its synchronization.
Participants
Requesting
Assistance
Participants who have requested the operator’s
assistance and are waiting to be assisted. In Attended
conferences, this option also includes the participants
who have to wait for the operator’s assistance to
connect to the conference.
Asked Question
Noisy Line
Participants who are waiting in the Q&A queue.
Participants whose audio channel is detected as
noisy. The system uses a special algorithm to identify
the endpoints that add background noise to the
conference. Noise on a line can be caused by a
variety of sources ranging from background noise,
faulty equipment and noises emanating from the line
itself.
Note: The Noisy Line Detection feature is enabled/
disabled in the “system.cfg” by defining the detection
sensitivity. For more information, see “Noisy Line
Detection and Automatic Muting” on page 5-30
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Monitoring All Conferences
The system can be configured to monitor all conferences according to the last
Monitoring Filter that was set for any conference in the MGC Manager.
When this feature is enabled, the system automatically displays all the
conferences and all the participants that require the operator’s attention, in the
Monitor pane.
To toggle between automatic and manual monitoring:
•
On the Options menu, click Monitor All to activate automatic
monitoring.
A check mark next to Monitor All indicates that the option is activated.
Each click of the Monitor All option enables or disables this option.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Secure Conference Mode
Enabling the Secure mode locks the conference and prevents participants and
operators, from joining the conference. A secure conference cannot be
monitored or controlled in any way. While a conference is in the Secure
mode, the operator cannot view the participants list or any other conference
properties, but can manually terminate it.
The conference chairperson can enable or disable the Secure mode from the
DTMF input device (touch-tone telephone or the endpoint’s remote control),
using the appropriate DTMF code (the default code is #70). During the secure
conference, the chairperson and participants can perform various operations,
such as voting and Q&A sessions, via their DTMF input device using the
appropriate DTMF codes. However, because secure conferences cannot be
monitored, these operations or status changes are not displayed in the MGC
Manager Monitor pane. A special icon is used to indicate that the conference
is in Secure mode.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Secure Conference Icons
Table 5-7 lists the icons and definitions that indicate the current status of a
Secure conference.
Table 5-7: Secure Conference Status Icons
Icon
Indication
Description
Secure
conference
The (audio only or video) On Going Conference is
in the Secure mode; the conference properties
and the participants list are hidden.
Faulty
secure
conference
An exclamation point appears next to the secure
conference icon when one of the following
statuses occurs:
•
Empty - No participant was defined for this
conference, or none of the defined participants
are connected.
•
Single Party - Only one participant is defined,
or only one of the defined participants is
connected.
•
•
Not Full - Not all of the defined participants are
connected.
Faulty Connection - Participants are
connected, but the connection is problematic,
and the conference cannot run normally.
•
Resource Deficiency - The resources
currently installed in the MCU, such as audio
cards, are insufficient for the requested
conference.
•
Bad Resources - A fault occurred in one of the
cards.
Due to the locked nature of conference, no action
can be taken to resolve these problems.
End-of-
The secure conference is about to end.
conference
alert for
Secure
conference
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Dynamic Highest Common Mechanism (in Video Switching)
In Video Switching conferences, the Highest Common mechanism enables
the MCU to select the optimal video parameters for the conference according
to the highest video capabilities that are common to all the endpoints
participating in the conference. The Highest Common mechanism improves
the connectivity between endpoints, eliminates Secondary connections, and
facilitates Entry Queue Access and participant’s moves during conferences.
The Highest Common mechanism is applied to these video parameters:
•
•
•
•
•
Video Protocol
Video Format
Video Frame Rate
H.263 Annexes - N, F, T and I
ProMotion
The selected common video is dynamically adjusted with each participant
connection to and disconnection from the conference. The Highest Common
mechanism is available with both H.320 and H.323 endpoints.
When the conference line rate is lower than 384 Kbps, the system first tries to
connect the participants using the H.264 video protocol. Only if the endpoint
does not support H.264, the system tries to connect the participants using
H.263 or H.261. For example, if all the connected endpoints support the
H.263 video protocol, the conference video protocol is set to H.263. When an
endpoint connects to the conference using H.261, the conference Video
Protocol changes to H.261, and all the endpoints will now connect to the
conference using H.261. When this endpoint leaves the conference, the Video
Protocol changes back to H.263, followed by the endpoints changing to video
protocol H.263. In this example, if the Video protocol was set to H.263, the
endpoint connecting using H.261 would have been connected as Secondary
(without the video channel) as it could not meet the conference settings.
When monitoring Video Switching conferences, the participant’s video
parameters can change during the conference, reflecting changes in the
conference video settings according to participant connections and
disconnections during the conference. Sometimes, lower video quality is
viewed during the conference as a result of changes in the video protocol (for
example changing from H.263 to H.261) or video resolution (for example,
from CIF to QCIF) and other video parameters.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Audio Tones
While defining the conference parameters, you can enable any of the audio
tones (Entry tone, Exit tone, and End of Conference Alert tone) to be heard
during an On Going Conference. If Roll Call is enabled for the conference,
the audio tones are replaced with an appropriate message.
Exit Tone - is played when a participant disconnects from the conference.
All the connected participants hear this tone.
If Roll Call is enabled, the system announces the self-recorded name of the
participant leaving the conference.
Entry Tone - is played when a participant connects to the conference.
This tone is heard by all the conference participants currently connected to the
conference (but not by the connecting participant).
If Roll Call is enabled, the system announces the self-recorded name of the
participant connecting to the conference.
End Time Alert Tone x Min - the end of conference reminder is played once
to all the connected participants, x minutes before the end of the conference.
The x value is defined during the conference setup.
If Roll Call is enabled, the system plays the special audio message: “the
conference is about to end”.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Noisy Line Detection and Automatic Muting
During an On Going Conference, you can monitor noisy participant lines by
selecting the Noisy Line monitor filter. For more details, see “Monitor Filter”
on page 5-23.
When the Noisy Line monitor filter is enabled, the Noisy Line icon
is used as an indicator in the Connection column, in both the Status and
Monitor tables.
In addition, you can enable the SilenceIT option to automatically mute the
audio participants who are identified as having a noisy line. SilenceIT uses an
algorithm that detects continued background music or other noise that is not
in the range of human speech. SilenceIT can be applied to Audio participants
in Audio Only and Video conferences. This feature is enabled for conferences
with an IVR Service, during the conference setup/reservation stage, using the
Conference Properties - Settings tab option.
For a detailed description of the SilenceIT feature, see the MGC Manager
User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 2, “Using SilenceIT”.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Viewing the Participants Queue
You can view the Participants Queue list in the Browser pane, the Status pane,
or in the Participants Queue window.
The Participants Queue lists:
•
•
•
participants whose connection to the conference is managed by an
operator (in Attended conferences)
participants who failed to enter the correct conference Numeric ID or the
conference password in the Entry Queue
participants who have requested operator’s assistance during the
conference
Participants connecting to the Entry Queue, IVR Queue or Greet and Guide
conference (AV Message Service) and participants requiring the operator’s
attention are listed. In addition, participants in the Greeting, Attended and On
Hold stages are also listed in the Participants Queues.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Special management tools are available to speed up and facilitate the
operator’s work while assisting the participants waiting in the queue.
•
•
•
An Operator conference must be running in order to monitor the Participants
Queue. If no On Going Operator Conference is active, the operator will not be
able to attend to the participants waiting in the queue.
Only the participants in an IVR-enabled conference, in which the Enable
Operators Assistance option is activated for the IVR Service, can request
help during the conference.
Only the participants in an Entry Queue or IVR-enabled conference that is set
for the Attended mode (On-hold for Operator Assistance, selected in the IVR
Service Properties Welcome Message tab), are automatically moved to the
Participants Queue when connecting to the conference.
To display the participants waiting in the Participants Queue:
1. Connect to the MCU and expand its options tree.
2. Expand the Participants Queue icon to list the participants in the
Alternatively, click the Participants Queue button
in the main
toolbar to display the participants waiting in the queue in a separate
window.
For the detailed description of the Participants Queue tools and
management, see “Listing Participants in the Participants Queue
Window” on page 8-40.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Viewing Site Names in Video
During Continuous Presence video conferences, you can view the endpoint
site names in the endpoint’s video layout windows. Both H.320 and H.323
endpoints can display up to 33 characters of the site’s name.
Figure 5-1 shows an example site name display in the Polycom ViaVideo
endpoint window.
Figure 5-1: Site Name Display in ViaVideo
The system can only display the site names that have been defined in the
endpoints. Endpoint site names are displayed when the following flags have
been enabled in the “system.cfg” file, VIDEO PLUS FLAGS section:
DISPLAY_PARTY_NAME=YES
PARTY_NAME_ALWAYS_ON=YES
•
The endpoint site names cannot be modified from the MGC Manager or the
Click&View applications.
•
•
With H.320 participants, the Chair Control parameter must be set to Auto.
Display of participant names is not available in conferences using the QCIF
video format.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Conference Level Monitoring
In addition to the general conference information that appears in the Status
and the Monitor tables, you can view the details of the conference current
status and setup parameters, using the Conference Properties dialog boxes.
While checking the properties, you can also edit several parameters.
To view parameters of an On Going Conference:
1. In the Status pane, Browser pane or Monitor pane, right-click the icon of
the conference to monitor, and then click Properties.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The Conference Properties dialog box opens.
A new tab, Ongoing State, appears in the Properties dialog box:
The Scheduler tab does not appear during the On Going Conference definition,
but is used during the Reservation definition. During the On Going Conference it
allows you to modify the conference duration.
For a detailed description of conference definition modifications that can
be performed during a conference, see Chapter 6, “Operations Performed
During On Going Conferences”.
2. Click the Ongoing State tab to view the current conference status.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
The Conference Properties - Ongoing State dialog box opens.
The following conference parameters are displayed:
Table 5-8: On Going Conference properties - On Going State
Field/Option
Description
Conference
Status
Displays the possible faulty statuses of a conference.
A problem that occurred during conference, for
example a Resource Deficiency, is indicated by a
checked check box. These statuses are also listed in
the Connection column in the Monitor or the Status
pane. For a detailed description of conference
statuses, see Table 5-2, “On Going Conference -
Monitor Pane Columns,” on page 5-10.
Recording
Displays the name of the participant (port) that was
defined as the recording port for the conference. The
Recording Port is used for connection to an external
recording device.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 5-8: On Going Conference properties - On Going State (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Audio Source
Displays the name of the current conference speaker.
Exclusive
Speaker
Displays the name of the Exclusive Speaker
designated for the conference, for example in Lecture
mode. You can select another speaker from the list
during the conference.
Current Cascade
Mode
If the Cascading option is enabled for the conference,
displays the name of the Master conference. For a
description of the cascading mode, see the MGC
Manager User’s Guide Volume II, Chapter 5.
FECC/LSD
Token Holder
If the FECC/LSD option was enabled for a video
conference, displays the name of the participant who
is the current holder of the FECC/LSD token and can
control the far-end camera.
For more details on this option, see ”Far End Camera
Control (FECC) and Low Speed Data (LSD)” in the
MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 1.
FECC/LSD Rate
If the FECC/LSD option was enabled for a video
conference, and the LSD channel rate was defined,
displays the line rate used to transfer the FECC
commands.
For more details on this option, see ”Far End Camera
Control (FECC) and Low Speed Data (LSD)” in the
MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 1.
Withdraw FECC/
LSD Token
Click this button to withdraw the FECC/LSD Token
from the current participant.
For more details on this option, see ”Far End Camera
Control (FECC) and Low Speed Data (LSD)” in the
MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 1.
Chair Control -
Chair Token
Holder
Displays the name of the participant holding the chair
token. For more details, see the “H.243 Chair Control”
in the MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II,
Chapter 5.
Withdraw Chair
Token
Click this button to withdraw the chair token from the
current holder and return it to the MCU for
assignment to other endpoints.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Table 5-8: On Going Conference properties - On Going State (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Content Token
Holder
If the conference was defined as a video session with
Dual Stream H.239/People+Content or People and
ContentV0, displays the name of the endpoint that is
currently broadcasting the content. For more details,
see the MGC Manager User’s Guide Volume II,
Chapter 1.
Withdraw
Content Token
Click this button to withdraw the Content token from
the current holder and to return it to the MCU for
assignment to other endpoints.
Refresh Video
Click this button to refresh the video image.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Participant Level Monitoring
Participants can join conferences in one of the following three ways:
•
•
•
Via an Entry Queue
Directly to an IVR-enabled conference
As a pre-defined dial-in or dial-out participant
The connection process can be monitored by the operator. When joining via
an Entry Queue or directly to a conference, the connection process can be
attended or unattended. The attended process is described in Chapter 8,
“Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing”. In
unattended conferencing the operator is involved only if there are problems
that require attention.
Displaying Participant Properties
In addition to the information that is listed in the Status and the Monitor
panes, you can view detailed information regarding the status and properties
of each listed participant, using the Participant Properties dialog boxes. This
information is especially useful when a problem occurs during the connection
of the participant to the conference.
To display the participant’s properties:
•
In the Status pane, Browser pane or Monitor pane, click the Participant
icon.
Alternatively, right-click the icon of the participant to monitor, and then
click Properties.
The Participant Properties dialog box opens.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Monitoring ISDN/ATM/MPI/T1_CAS Participants
Using the Participant Properties dialog box, you can verify the properties of
Connection Info2, Resource Details, Disconnection Cause, H221 (or another
used protocol) and Video Sources tabs contain information that is relevant to
the participant status only while the conference is running and is used to
monitor the participant’s status when connection problems occur.
For a detailed description of the participant properties that are set up in the
Identification and Advanced tabs, see Chapter 4, ”ISDN/ATM/MPI/T1-CAS
Participant Definition” on page 4-102.
To view and modify the participant's properties during a conference:
1. In the Participant Properties dialog box, click the Identification tab.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Information is displayed in the Participant Properties - Identification
dialog box. You can view the name and the dial-in numbers that were
used by the participant to connect to the Entry Queue/Conference.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Table 5-9 describes the user defined Identification properties that you can
modify during an On Going Conference:
Table 5-9: ISDN Participant Properties - Identification
Field/Parameter
Description
Name
Indicates the participant’s name.
User Defined 1-4
These 4 fields enable you to enter additional information
for the participant, for example the E-mail address or the
telephone number, or any other required information.
Broadcasting
Volume
Indicates the volume at which the participant is heard by
other participants. If not modified, the volume stays at the
default level 5.
Listening Volume
Indicates the volume at which the participant hears other
participants. If not modified, the volume stays at the default
level 5.
VIP
While the participant is connected, indicates whether the
participant status is defined as VIP.
2. If required:
—
change the participants name by entering a new name in the Name
field.
—
—
—
enter information in any of the user defined fields
adjust the broadcasting / listening volume using the slider
change the VIP status by selecting or clearing the VIP check box
The participant’s Identification and Advanced parameters can be modified during
an On Going Conference only if the participant is disconnected from the
conference.
3. Click the Connection Info1 tab.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The Participant Properties - Connection Info1 dialog box opens.
The following information is displayed in Connection Info1:
Table 5-10: ISDN Participant Properties - Connection Info1
Field/Parameter
Description
Participant State
Indicates the connection status of the participant as
it appears in the Monitor and Status panes. If there
is a problem, the appropriate status appears. For
example, Disconnected indicates that the participant
was disconnected from the conference.
Disconnect/
Reconnect
Click this button to disconnect the participant from
the conference. The button changes to Reconnect.
Click Reconnect to connect a disconnected
participant to the conference.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Table 5-10: ISDN Participant Properties - Connection Info1 (Continued)
Field/Parameter
Description
Member in
Checked boxes indicate which multimedia channels
(Audio, Video and Data - T.120) are connected.
Sometimes, if the participant is partially connected,
only the audio channel is connected.
The LSD check box indicates that the LSD channel
is open. For more details, see the MGC Manager
User’s Guide Volume II, Chapter 1.
Note: For Audio Only participants, only the Audio
check box is checked.
Channels Status
Displays the status of each of the participant’s
channels in a table. You can use the cursor to
change the width of the columns or use the scroll
bars to browse. The status table columns are:
•
Channel # - Indicates the number of channels
used by the participant and whether the channel
is connected (which is indicated by a check
mark) or disconnected.
•
Participant Phone # - In a dial-in connection,
indicates the participant’s CLI (Calling Line
Identification) as identified by the MCU. In a dial-
out connection, indicates the participant’s phone
number dialed by the MCU for each channel.
•
MCU Phone # - In a dial-in connection, indicates
the MCU number dialed by the participant. In a
dial-out connection, indicates the MCU (CLI)
number as seen by the participant. This is the
number entered in the MCU Number field in the
Network Service.
Note: For Audio Only participants, only one channel
is displayed.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 5-10: ISDN Participant Properties - Connection Info1 (Continued)
Field/Parameter
Description
H221
Indicates the synchronization status.
Counters Status
•
•
•
•
l-sync loss () - Checked when there is a general
synchronization problem with the MCU.
r-sync loss () - Checked when there is a general
synchronization problem with the participant site.
l-video sync loss () - Checked when there is a
video synchronization problem in the MCU.
r-video sync loss () - Checked when there is a
video synchronization problem in the
participant's endpoint.
The counter indicates the number of times the
system tried to synchronize. When the
synchronization is lost, an exclamation point (!)
appears on the Conference icon and the Participant
icon.
Down Speed
Downspeeding occurs during call setup and is an
automatic process performed by the MCU. During
call setup, Downspeeding allows Bonded calls to
connect with missing or unsynchronized channels
by excluding these channels from the call setup
process. This results in a lower line rate for the
connection. However if the channels are restored
the original line speed is restored.
Downspeeding is supported in Continuous Presence
and Transcoding video sessions only. The
Downspeed process is enabled and disabled in the
“system.cfg” file.
When Down Speed is activated, three types of
messages can be displayed:
•
•
•
Downspeeding - Downspeed is in progress.
Downspeeded - The process is completed.
Empty - The process is inactive.
Chair Token
When checked, indicates that the participant is
holding the Chair Token.
FECC/LSD Token
When checked, indicates that the participant is
holding the Data Token.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Table 5-10: ISDN Participant Properties - Connection Info1 (Continued)
Field/Parameter
Content Token
Description
When checked, indicates that the participant is
holding the Content Token.
When the connection process is completed successfully, the transmission
rate and the aggregation method used by the endpoint are indicated in the
Monitor and Status tables.
4. To view general information regarding the participant connection and to
(optionally) mute or unmute the participant’s audio or video channels,
click the Connection Info2 tab.
The Participant Properties - Connection Info2 dialog box opens.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The following information is displayed in Connection Info2:
Table 5-11: ISDN Participant Properties - Connection Info2
Field/Parameter
Description
Connection Time
The date and time the participant connected to the
conference.
Note: The time format is derived from the operating
system time format.
Disconnection
Time
The date and time the participant was disconnected
from the conference.
Loopback Status
For future version.
Connection
Retries Left
Indicates the number of retries left for the system to
connect the participant to the conference.
Tx Rate
The line rate at which data sent from the MCU is
received by the endpoint.
Rx Rate
The line rate at which data sent from the endpoint is
received by the MCU.
Mute (By
Operator)
Used to mute the participant’s audio or video
channels by the operator. If checked, the
participant's audio/video channel is muted.
Mute (By
Participant)
If checked, indicates that the audio and/or video
channels have been muted by the participant.
Mute (By MCU)
If checked, indicates that the audio and/or video
channels have been muted by the MCU (as in the
Exclusive Speaker mode or in a Lecture Show).
Block
Used to block the participant’s audio channel. If
checked, the audio channel is blocked, but the
participant will still be heard by other participants.
Attending
Displays the participant or operator status in a Greet
and Guide conference or in a conference with an
IVR Service.
•
Oper Participant - This option is checked when
viewing the operator parameters.
•
Attending - This option is checked when the
participant is in an Attended state.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Table 5-11: ISDN Participant Properties - Connection Info2 (Continued)
Field/Parameter
Description
Participant
Displays the status of the Attended participant:
Attending State
•
Attended - The participant is being assisted by
the operator (in an Operator conference)
•
On Hold - The participant was placed on hold
and hears background music. In video
conferences, the participant also views the
Welcome slide.
For more details on Attended conferences, see the
MGC Manager User’s Guide Volume II, Chapter 4.
5. If the participant is in a Continuous Presence conference, click the Video
Sources tab to check the video layout selected for the participant.
The Participant Properties - Video Sources dialog box opens.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
This dialog box displays the participant’s video layout and video forcing
settings (the participants that are forced to each of the layout windows).
The following information is displayed:
Table 5-12: ISDN Participant Properties - Video Sources
Field/Parameter
Description
Layout view
Displays the current video layout the participant is
viewing. Each participant window includes:
•
Name box - indicating the name of the
participant shown in the window.
•
Drop-down list - names of the other conference
participants who can be selected to be “forced”
into the video layout window.
Layout options
A checked option button indicates which video
layout is currently used by the participant.
•
Personal Layout - the layout selected for this
participant (disabled for conferences running on
a Standard video card).
•
Conference Layout - the layout selected for the
conference.
In a Continuous Presence conference running on a Video+ card, this
dialog box indicates whether the participant is viewing the video layout
of the conference or their personal video layout. If required, you can:
—
select the video layout viewing mode (Conference or Personal
Layout)
—
if in the Personal Layout mode, select the video layout for this
participant (video force)
When running a conference on a Standard video card, only the Conference
Layout can be viewed by the participants.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
6. To view the MCU resources used to handle the participant in the
conference, click the Resource Details tab.
The Participant Properties - Resource Details dialog box opens.
This dialog box lists the resources that may be used to handle the
participant’s call. The following information is displayed:
Table 5-13: ISDN Participant Properties - Resource Details
Column/
Parameter
Pane/Table
Option/Description
Resource
Details
Displays information about the MCU cards which handle
the participant connection.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 5-13: ISDN Participant Properties - Resource Details (Continued)
Column/
Parameter
Pane/Table
Option/Description
Resource
Details (cont.) Type
Resource
Displays the type of MCU cards used to
run the conference. The following types
are listed:
•
•
•
MUX - the Video/MUX card used to
handle H.320 video calls.
Audio Codec - The port that performs
the audio encoding and decoding.
Audio Bridge - The audio bridge that
mixes the audio signal received from
various ports.
•
•
•
Video - The unit on the video card that
manages the video signal received
from one endpoint.
T.120 Bridge - The resource on the
data card that manages the data
conference.
T.120 Codec comprises the T.123
protocol - The resource that transfers
the data from the endpoint to the MCS
in a T.120 conference.
•
IP - A network interface module that
handles IP participants.
Board ID
Identifies the MCU slot in which the card
that handles the participant, is installed.
Unit ID
Identifies the unit on the card that handles
the participant.
Allocated
Indicates whether the MCU resources
listed in the Resource Type column are
used to run the conference or not.
Note: The video card is used only in
Continuous Presence conferences.
Net Resource
Details
Displays information about the network interface module
that handles the monitored participant.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Table 5-13: ISDN Participant Properties - Resource Details (Continued)
Column/
Parameter
Pane/Table
Option/Description
Net Resource
Details
(cont.)
Channel
Board ID
The number of the participant’s channel.
The slot number in which the Network card
used to handle the participant, is installed.
Unit ID
The span that handles the participant in
the conference.
Port ID
The port number on the Network card that
was allocated to the participant.
Allocated
Indicates whether the Network card
installed in the MCU is used to run the
conference or not.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
7. If the participant did not connect to the conference, click the
Disconnection Cause tab to display the cause.
The Participant Properties - Disconnection Cause dialog box opens.
This dialog box lists the categories and parameters which indicate the
cause of participant's disconnection from the conference. The
information is displayed according to the protocol/standard defined for
the participant, and the parameters vary accordingly. For example,
different parameters play a role in the disconnection of H.221
participants and H.245 or H.264 participants.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
The following information is displayed:
Table 5-14: Disconnection Cause parameters
Cause
Description
Call Disconnection
Reason
Operator Disconnect - The operator disconnected
the participant from the conference. The Cause field
displays the name of the operator who disconnected
the participant.
No Net Connection - The network channels could
not be connected. This may also be caused when
the communication lines are unavailable or busy.
Participant hang up - The participant disconnected
from the conference.
V-Gate No Response - Applicable in an ATM
connection, when the V-Gate is unable to negotiate
a connection with the endpoint.
Security Failure - An encryption failure occurred.
Bonding Failure - The connection could not be
established between the participant and the MCU
when Bonding is used.
Bad H243 Connection - Problems with the
connection protocol.
Resource Deficiency - Not enough hardware
resources (MUX, video, audio, data or network
cards) to handle the participant call.
Cause
If there is a problem in the connection, which is
indicated by one of the call disconnection reasons,
the system displays an explanation for this problem.
For example, the No Net Connection disconnection
reason may be selected, while the disconnection
explanation called party line is busy appears in the
Cause field.
For a detailed description of disconnection causes
and parameters, see Appendix A.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
8. If problems are indicated during the participant connection to the
conference and you want to further investigate the reasons, click the
H221 tab.
The Participant Properties - H221 dialog box opens.
Displays the
endpoint’s actions
when establishing
connection with the
MCU
Lists the
endpoint’s
audio, video,
and line
capabilities as
sent from the
remote site
Displays the MCU’s
actions when
establishing
connection with the
participant’s endpoint
The H221 dialog box displays real-time information about the
capabilities that are being exchanged between the MCU and the endpoint
during the connection process. When the connection process is aborted,
you can use this information to identify the cause of the connection
problem and the stage at which the connection process stopped.
Connection problems are caused by discrepancies between the
participant's capabilities as received from the participant's endpoint, the
capabilities as defined in the Participant's Properties dialog box, and the
capabilities as defined in the Conference Properties dialog box.
For example, the Remote Capabilities list may indicate that the
participant is using a restricted line (56 Kbps per channel instead of
64 Kbps). However, this Restricted option was not selected in the
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
participant's properties dialog box nor was it set for the conference (if the
conference is Restricted, a special indication appears in the Local
Communication Mode list). In such a case, you may need to change the
participant and conference definition to Restricted or change the
conference video session to Transcoding.
Connecting Auto-Detect Participants
When a participant defined as Auto Detect dials into the MCU, each channel
is detected by the MCU and the system tries to connect the participant using
the Bonding protocol. If the connection using Bonding is successful, the
negotiation with the endpoint communicates the number of additional
channels to be connected. The connection of the participant proceeds using
the same procedure for Bonding connection. If the connection using Bonding
fails, the MCU tries to connect the endpoint using the H221 standard. If this
fails, the connection with the endpoint is terminated. If the capabilities
exchange is successful, the endpoint is connected according to the line rate
communicated by the endpoint during the capabilities exchange, and using
the standard H.221 aggregation procedure. These negotiations and the final
transmission rate are indicated in the Participant Properties - H221 dialog
box.
When a dial-out participant connects to the conference, the system exchanges
capabilities with the endpoint and attempts to connect the participant using
Bonding. If Bonding is unavailable, the participant is connected in H.221
mode. Once the aggregation method is determined, the MCU attempts to
connect the participant in the line rate defined for the conference. If it fails,
the MCU will connect the participant using a lower line rate.
The Bonding option is enabled for the MCU in the “system.cfg” file. The Default
setting is BONDING = YES
•
The Bonding Yes/ No flag (in “system.cfg”) enables the system administrator
to disable the “Bonding” option when this feature is not required by the
system. If BONDING=NO, the system rejects all ISDN participants (except
participant using leased lines) whose aggregation mode is set to “Bonding,”
“Auto” or “Auto Detect” at the reservation stage. In such a case, an
appropriate error message is displayed: ”BONDING_NOT_SUPPORTED”.
•
When the Bonding fails and the H.221 is selected, there may be problems
connecting the participant if the operator entered only one dial number and
the participant’s line rate is higher than 2B (128 Kbps).
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Monitoring IP Participants
the ISDN participants. When verifying the properties of an IP participant, the
following tabs are displayed in the Participant Properties dialog box:
Connection Info1, Connection Info2, Resource Details, Disconnection Cause,
H245, and Video Sources. These tabs contain information that is relevant only
to the participant status while the conference is running and are used to
monitor the participant’s status when there are connection problems. For a
detailed description of the participant properties that are set up in the
Identification and Advanced tabs, see Chapter 4, ”IP (H.323 and SIP)
Participant Definition” on page 4-114.
The participant’s Identification and Advanced parameters can be modified during
an On Going Conference only if the participant is disconnected.
To view and modify the participant's properties during a conference:
1. In the Participant Properties dialog box, click the Connection Info1 tab.
The Participant Properties - Connection Info1 dialog box opens.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
The Connection Info1 window displays the information sent from the IP
card to the MCU control unit. This information is refreshed every two
seconds. The information is derived from:
—
—
—
RTP
RTCP reports
Media channels
The RTP information is created by the RTP processor of the IP card, such
as packet loss, overflow, packet fragmentation, jitter buffer parameters,
and delays. The RTP statistics are displayed in two views, Accumulated
and Interval:
—
In the Accumulated view, the system displays statistics that it
gathered since the session start (since the participant connected to
the conference).
—
In the Interval view, the system displays the statistics for the last
five minutes, and it is updated continuously.
The RTCP information is taken from the RTCP reports sent and received
by the MCU (IP card) to/from the endpoints. This information is
refreshed every 5 seconds.
An exclamation point appears in the Faulty column in the Channel Status
box when a faulty condition is detected for a channel, for example, the
packet loss has exceeded a threshold defined in the system. The
parameters thresholds are defined in the system.cfg file and are based on
standard network behavior. An exclamation point indicates that further
investigation may be required, using the additional parameters in the
Advanced pane. This is a real-time indication; when the faulty condition
is resolved the exclamation point disappears.
The following information is displayed in the Channel Status table:
Table 5-15: IP Participant Connection Info1 - Channel Status
Field/Option
Description
Participant
State
The connection status of the participant as it appears in the
Monitor and Status panes. If there is a problem with
participant’s connection, the appropriate status indication
appears, for example, Disconnected.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 5-15: IP Participant Connection Info1 - Channel Status (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Disconnect/
Reconnect
Depending on the current participant status in the On Going
Conference, this button allows you to disconnect or reconnect
the participant.
Member In
Channels: Audio, Video, T.120, Content and FECC
The checked boxes indicate which multimedia channels
(audio, video, FECC, Content and data) are connected. For
example, if the participant is partially connected, only the
audio channel is connected.
Channels
Status
Indicates the channel types used by the participant and
whether the channel is connected (which is indicated by a
check mark) or not. Incoming channels are the endpoint’s
capabilities as established in the signaling negotiations.
Outgoing channels are the MCU’s capabilities as established
in the signaling negotiations. The following channels are
listed:
H.225 - The call-signaling channel.
H.245 - The Control channel over which the MCU and the
endpoint capabilities are exchanged.
Audio in - Incoming Audio channel for the media stream.
Audio out - Outgoing Audio channel for the media stream.
Video in - Incoming Video channel with a QCIF media stream
with a fixed bitrate for all endpoints.
Video out - Outgoing dynamic video channel with a CIF media
stream and higher (4CIF) bitrate for each participant.
Content in - Indicates whether the incoming Content channel
(in H.239 People+Content conferences) is open.
Content out - Outgoing data media channel (in H.239 and
People+Content conferences).
FECC in - Indicates whether the incoming FECC channel is
open.
FECC out - Indicates whether the outgoing FECC channel is
open. No other information is relevant for this channel.
T120 in - Indicates whether the incoming T.120 channel is
open.
T120 out - Indicates whether the outgoing T.120 channel is
open.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Table 5-15: IP Participant Connection Info1 - Channel Status (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Notes:
Channels
Status (cont.)
•
The FECC channels appear in the Channel list only when
FECC is enabled for the conference.
•
When FECC is enabled, T.120 channels are disabled and
vice versa.
Faulty
A red exclamation point indicates a faulty channel condition
enabling further investigation if required. This is a real-time
indication: when resolved the mark disappears.
Bit Rate
The actual transfer rate for the channel.
If FECC is enabled for the conference, this column indicates
the FECC channel transfer rate: 6.4 or 4.8 (if encryption is
enabled for the participant).
Packet Loss
Indicates the accumulated count of all packets that are
missing since the channel opened. This field is for information
only and does not cause the display of the exclamation point
as it may indicate a problem at the connection stage and not a
current event. It can indicate problems with the network,
which may affect the audio and video quality.
Fraction Loss
(Peak)
The ratio between the number of lost packets and the number
of transmitted packets since the last RTCP report.
Peak (in parentheses) indicates the highest ratio recorded
since the channel opened.
Number of
Packets
The number of received or transmitted packets (according to
the channel type) since the channel has opened. This field is
for information only and does not cause the display of the
exclamation point.
Jitter (Peak)
Latency
Displays the network jitter (the deviation in time between the
arriving packets) as reported in the last RTCP report. This is
usually caused by network congestion or route changes.
Peak (in parentheses) reflects the maximum network jitter
since the channel opened.
Indicates the time it takes a packet to travel from one end to
another in milliseconds. The listed value is derived from the
RTCP report.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 5-15: IP Participant Connection Info1 - Channel Status (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Sync Counters
Status
Channel - The channel type.
Source - The name of the participant currently viewed by this
participant. In a Software Continuous Presence conference,
the Source displays the names of the participants currently
viewed in the Video Layout window.
Position - The video layout position indicates the place of
each participant as they appear on-screen during an On
Going Software Continuous Presence conference. For
example: In the 2 x 2 Video Layout window, participant Josh,
is indicated by a small blue box in the top left corner of the
image.
In all other conferences the Position indicator is a blue
square, and the participant’s position is not indicated.
The position each participant occupies can be defined in the
Conference Properties - Video Sources window. If no video
forcing is applied (Auto Select), the system assigns
participants to the video windows randomly.
There are three stages in the synchronization that occur
during the connection between the endpoint and the MCU:
Video Switch, Protocol and Video Intra. These
synchronization aspects indicate whether the video
information has been correctly transmitted and received
between the endpoint the MCU. The system indicates if there
was any problem in any of the synchronization stages
between the endpoint and the MCU. Check marks in any of
the check boxes indicate that the system failed to
synchronize, and the cause of the failure.
Video Switch - Video Switch is a certain pattern (sequence)
of bits in the video information. The identification of this
pattern is used for the first stage in the synchronization
process. Once the synchronization is established, the system
moves to the next stage in the synchronization process. This
option is checked when there is a problem in the first stage of
the synchronization. The counter indicates the number of
times the system tried to synchronize.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Table 5-15: IP Participant Connection Info1 - Channel Status (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Sync Counters
Status (cont.)
Protocol Sync Loss - Indicates whether the system was able
to synchronize the bits order according to the selected video
protocol (H.261 or H.263). This option is checked when there
is a problem in the second stage of the synchronization. The
counter indicates the number of times the system tried to
synchronize.
Video Intra Sync - Intra is a special video frame that is used
for synchronization. Indicates whether the synchronization on
a video H.261 or H.263 Intra frame was successful.
Video Resolution - The video resolution of the participant.
l-sync video
loss (0)
A checked check box indicates that there is a video
synchronization problem in the participant's endpoint. The
counter indicates the number of times the MCU had to re-
synchronize.
Note: This parameter is only relevant in Continuous Presence
conferences.
r-sync video
loss (0)
A checked check box indicates that there is a video
synchronization problem in the MCU. The counter indicates
the number of times the endpoint had to re-synchronize.
Note: This parameter is only relevant in Continuous Presence
conferences.
FECC Token
When checked, indicates that the participant is holding the
Data Token.
Content Token
When checked, indicates that the participant is holding the
Content Token.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
If the Faulty indicator (exclamation point) appears next to a channel and you
want to investigate the source of the problem, you can display additional
information for that channel.
2. In the Channel Status table, click the Channel to investigate, and then
click the Channel Info button.
The Channel Info area opens.
The Channel Info area displays additional parameters relating to the
transmission of packets and their processing by the MCU, for the
selected channel. The information is specific to the type of channel you
select in the Channels Status channels list, for example video in or video
out, audio in or audio out, etc.
You can resize the column width or use the scroll bars to browse.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
The following detailed information is displayed in the Channel Info:
Table 5-16: IP Participant Properties - Video In Channel Info
Field/Option
Description
MCU Address
The IP address of the H.323 card installed in the MCU
to which the participant is connected and the UDP port
number allocated to the participant incoming media
stream on the MCU side.
Party Address
Media Info
Algorithm
The IP address of the participant and the port number
allocated to the media stream on the participant side.
This table provides field/value information about
currently used video properties and settings.
Indicates the audio or video algorithm and protocol.
Frame per
packet (audio
only)
The number of audio frames per packet that are
transferred between the MCU and the endpoint. If the
actual Frame per Packets are higher than Frame per
Packets declared during the capabilities exchange, a
Faulty flag is displayed.
Resolution
(video only)
Indicates the video resolution in use. If the actual
resolution is higher than resolution declared in the
capabilities exchange, the Faulty flag is displayed. For
example, if the declared resolution is CIF and the
actual resolution is 4CIF, the Faulty flag is displayed.
Frame Rate
(video only)
The number of video frames per second that are
transferred between the MCU and the endpoint.
Annexes (video
only)
Indicates the H.263 annexes in use at the time of the
last RTCP report. If the actual annexes used are other
than the declared annexes in the capabilities
exchange, the Faulty flag is displayed.
Channel Index
For Polycom Internal use only.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 5-16: IP Participant Properties - Video In Channel Info (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
RTP Statistics -
RTP Packets
This information may indicate problems with the
network which can affect the audio and video quality.
Actual loss
The number of missing packets counted by the IP card
as reported in the last RTP Statistics report. If a packet
that was considered lost arrives later, it is deducted
from the packet loss count. Packet loss is displayed
with the following details:
•
Accumulated N - number of lost packets
accumulated since the channel opened.
•
Accumulated % - percentage of lost packets out
of the total number of packets transmitted since the
channel opened.
•
•
Interval N - number of packets lost in the last RTP
report interval (default interval is 5 minutes).
Interval % - percentage of lost packets out of the
total number of packets transmitted in the last RTP
report interval (default interval is 5 minutes).
•
Peak - the highest number of lost packets in a
report interval from the beginning of the channel's
life span.
Out of Order
The number of packets arriving out of order. The
following details are displayed:
•
Accumulated N - total number of packets that
arrived out of order since the channel opened.
•
Accumulated % - percentage of packets that
arrived out of order out of the total number of
packets transmitted since the channel opened.
•
•
Interval N - number of packets that arrived out of
order in the last RTP report interval (default interval
is 5 minutes).
Interval % - percentage of packets that arrived out
of order out of the total number of packets
transmitted in the last RTP report interval (default
interval is 5 minutes).
•
Peak - the highest number of packets that arrived
out of order in a report interval from the beginning
of the channel's life span.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Table 5-16: IP Participant Properties - Video In Channel Info (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Fragmented
Indicates the number of packets that arrived to the IP
card fragmented (i.e., a single packet broken by the
network into multiple packets). This value can indicate
the delay and reordering of fragmented packets that
require additional processing, but is not considered a
fault.
The Fragmented information is displayed with the
following details:
•
Accumulated N - total number of packets that
were fragmented since the channel opened.
•
Accumulated % - percentage of fragmented
packets out of the total number of packets
transmitted since the channel opened.
•
•
Interval N - number of fragmented packets
received in the last RTP report interval (default
interval is 5 minutes).
Interval % - percentage of fragmented packets out
of the total number of packets transmitted in the
last RTP report interval (default interval is 5
minutes).
•
Peak - the highest number of fragmented packets
in a report interval from the beginning of the
channel's life span.
RTP Statistics -
Jitter
Mechanism
The values this information provides may indicate
problems with the network which can affect the audio
and video quality.
Jitter Buffer Size The maximum permitted delay in milliseconds in the
expected arrival time (buffer size) determining whether
packets are processed or considered as lost.
For example, if the jitter buffer size is 15-milliseconds
and a packet from an endpoint arrives with a
12-millisecond delay, the packet is processed.
•
•
N - the current jitter buffer size.
Peak - the highest jitter buffer size from the
beginning of the channel's life span.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 5-16: IP Participant Properties - Video In Channel Info (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Late Packets
The number of packets discarded as a result of
arriving later than the set jitter buffer size.
•
•
•
Accumulated N - total number of packets that
arrived later than set in the jitter buffer size since
the channel opened.
Interval N - number of packets that arrived later
than set in the jitter buffer size, in the last RTP
report interval (default interval is 5 minutes).
Peak - the highest number of packets that arrived
later than set in the jitter buffer size, in a report
interval from the beginning of the channel's life
span.
Overflows
The number of times the jitter mechanism is reset due
to bitrate overflow. Overflow is the excess flow of
packets not processed. High values may indicate a
problem with the network or an endpoint.
Sample packet
interval
The time a packet is delayed in the jitter buffer until it is
used. (This information is used as part of a random
sampling procedure for internal behavior tracking.)
Error Resilience
Indicates the state of the RTP mechanism that repairs
video frames resulting from packet loss, to improve
video quality.
Repairs
The number of repaired packets.
(video only)
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
3. Click the Connection Info2 tab.
The Participant Properties - Connection Info2 dialog box opens.
Table 5-17: Connection Info2 parameter description
Field
Description
Connection Time
The date and time the participant connected to the
conference.
Disconnection
Time
The date and time the participant was disconnected
from the conference.
Loopback Status
For future version.
Connection
Retries Left
Indicates the number of retries left for the system to
connect the participant to the conference.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 5-17: Connection Info2 parameter description
Field
Description
Tx Rate
The total line rate of all the channels (agreed rate) in
which data sent from the MCU is received by the
endpoint.
Rx Rate
The total line rate of all the channels (agreed rate) in
which data sent from the endpoint is received by the
MCU.
Mute (By
Operator)
Used to mute the participant’s audio or video
channels by the operator during the conference. If
checked, the participant's audio/video channel is
muted. To mute the participant, click this check box.
Mute (By
Participant)
Indicates the channels (Audio and Video) that have
been muted by the participant.
Mute (By MCU)
Indicates the channels (Audio and Video) that have
been muted by the MCU. This is applicable in
Exclusive Speaker mode and Lecture Show.
Block
To block the audio transmission to the participant
site. Clearing this check box will restore the audio
transmission to this site.
Attending
Displays the participant or operator status in a Greet
& Guide conference or in an IVR enabled
conference.
Oper Participant – This option is checked when
viewing the operator parameters.
Attending – This option is checked when the
participant is in a Attended state.
Participant
Attending State
Displays the status of the Attended participant:
Attended – The participant is being assisted by the
operator (in the Operator conference)
On Hold – The participant was placed on hold and
hears background music. In video conferences the
participant also views the Welcome slide.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Table 5-17: Connection Info2 parameter description
Field
Description
Gatekeeper Status
Indicates the status of the participant’s registration
with the gatekeeper and the bandwidth allocated to
the participant.
ARQ – Admission Request - indicates that the
participant has requested the gatekeeper to allocate
the required bandwidth on the LAN.
Admitted – indicates that the gatekeeper has
allocated the required bandwidth to the participant.
DRQ – Disengage Request – the endpoint informs
the gatekeeper that the connection to the
conference is terminated and requests to disconnect
the call and free the resources.
None – indicates that there is no connection to the
gatekeeper.
Requested
Bandwidth
The bandwidth (in Kbps) requested by the
participant from the gatekeeper in the Admission
Request.
Allocated
The actual bandwidth (in Kbps) allocated to the
participant by the gatekeeper when the participant is
admitted to the conference.
Requested Info
Interval
Some gatekeepers request an alive and well
message from the endpoint to keep the resources
allocated to it. This box indicates the frequency with
which this message is sent to the gatekeeper.
Gatekeeper
Routed
Indicates whether the participant’s call is routed via
the gatekeeper.
4. If the participant is in a Continuous Presence conference, click the Video
Sources tab to check the video layout selected for this participant.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The Participant Properties - Video Sources dialog box opens.
This dialog box displays the participant’s video layout and video forcing
settings (the participants that are forced to each of the layout windows).
For more information, see Chapter 6, “Using DTMF Codes During a
Conference” on page 6-95.
In a Continuous Presence conference running on the Video+ card, this
dialog box indicates whether the participant is viewing the conference
video layout or the personal video layout. You can select the video layout
viewing mode (Conference or Personal Layout) and, if in Personal
Layout mode, select the video layout for this participant. For more
details, see Chapter 6, “Changing Video Layout for the Participant” on
page 6-33.
When running a conference on the standard video card only the
Conference Layout can be viewed by the participants.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
The following information is displayed:
Table 5-18: IP Participant Properties - Video Sources
Parameter/Field
Description
Layout view
Displays the current video layout the participant is
viewing. Each participant window includes:
•
Name box - indicating the name of the
participant shown in the window.
•
Drop-down list - for video forcing, of the names
of the other conference participants who can be
“forced” into the window.
Layout option
Option buttons indicating the layout the participant is
currently using.
•
Personal Layout - the layout selected for this
participant (disabled for conferences running on
the Standard video card).
•
Conference Layout - the layout selected for the
conference.
5. If problems are indicated during the participant’s connection process to
the conference, and you want to further investigate the reasons, click the
H245 tab.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The Participant Properties – H245 dialog box opens.
Displays the
endpoint’s actions
when establishing
connection with the
MCU
Lists the endpoint’s
audio, video and line
capabilities as
received from the
remote site
Displays the MCU’s
actions when
establishing
connection with the
participant
This dialog box indicates the capabilities exchanged between the MCU
and the endpoint.
The following information is displayed in the H245 tab:
Table 5-19: IP Participant Properties - H.245
Parameter/Field
Description
Remote
Capabilities
Lists the participant's Line Rate and Audio/ Video
capabilities as received from the remote site.
Remote
Communication
Mode
Displays the actual capabilities used by the endpoint
when establishing the connection with the MCU.
Local
Communication
Mode
Displays the actual capabilities used by the MCU
when establishing the connection with the
participant.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
6. Click the Disconnection Cause tab to view the causes for the
participant’s inability to connect to the conference.
The Participant Properties - Disconnection Cause dialog box opens.
The following information is contained in the Disconnection Cause
dialog box.
Table 5-20: H.323 Participant Properties - Disconnection Causes
Pane Name
Category and Description
Call
The disconnection category.
Disconnection
Reason
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 5-20: H.323 Participant Properties - Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Pane Name
Category and Description
Call
Operator
The operator disconnected the
Disconnection
Reason (cont.)
Disconnect
participant from the conference.
The Cause field displays the name
of the operator who disconnected
the participant.
No Net
Connection
The network channels could not be
connected. This may also be
caused when the communication
lines are unavailable or busy.
Participant hang
up
The participant disconnected from
the conference.
V-Gate No
Response
Applicable in an ATM connection,
when the V-Gate is unable to
negotiate a connection with the
endpoint.
Security Failure
Bonding Failure
An encryption failure occurred.
The connection could not be
established between the
participant and the MCU when
Bonding is used.
Bad H243
Connection
Problems with the connection
protocol.
Resource
Deficiency
Not enough hardware resources
(MUX, video, audio, data or
network cards) to handle the
participant call.
Gatekeeper
Failure
The participant’s failure to connect
to the conference is caused by the
gatekeeper.
H323 Failure
The participant’s failure to connect
to the conference is caused by the
MCU (H.323 card).
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
Table 5-20: H.323 Participant Properties - Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Pane Name Category and Description
SIP Failure The participant cannot connect to
Call
Disconnection
Reason (cont.)
the conference as its type does not
support SIP participant
connections. For example, COP
conferences.
Cause
If there is a problem in the connection, which is indicated
by one of the call disconnection reasons, the system
displays an explanation for this problem. For example,
the No Net Connection disconnection reason may be
selected, while the disconnection explanation called
party line is busy appears in the Cause field.
For a detailed description of disconnection causes and
parameters, see Appendix A.
Video
Disconnection
Reason
Describes those cases where a participant’s video
cannot be connected and the participant is using only the
audio channel. The detailed cause is indicated in the
Cause box with a Possible Solution displayed beneath.
(Secondary)
Incoming video
channel does not
match conference
video settings
During the capabilities exchange
between the endpoint and the
MCU, the endpoint capabilities do
not support the capabilities
required by the MCU.
For example, the conference
Video protocol is set to H.263
while the endpoint supports only
H.261. In the Cause box, the
system lists the conference video
parameters and the endpoint’s
video parameter that does not
match the conference.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 5-20: H.323 Participant Properties - Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Pane Name
Category and Description
Video
Disconnection
Reason
(Secondary)
(cont.)
Remote device
does not support
the current video
parameters
During the connection to the
conference, the endpoint fails to
adjust (lower) its video settings to
the conference settings. For
example, when the conference
frame rate is set to QCIF, the
endpoint sends video in CIF and
cannot lower the video resolution
to QCIF.
Remote device
failed to change its
video parameters
In a Video Switching conference
with video parameters set to Auto
(activating the highest common
mechanism), when the conference
video parameters are adjusted
according to the participants
currently connected to the
conference, the participant’s
endpoint could not adjust its video
parameters. Consequently, the
connection status changed to
Secondary.
Video stream
violation during
session
The endpoint’s video parameters
exceed the parameters set for the
conference. For example, if the
conference frame rate is set to 15
fps and the endpoint sends video
at 30 fps (frames per second), the
endpoint is connected as
Secondary.
Video channel
rejected due to
inadequate H.323
card resources
The resources of the H.323 card
were insufficient for the
participant’s video channel.
7. Click the Resource Details tab to view the MCU resources allocated to
the participant.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
The Participant Properties – Resource Details dialog box opens.
The following information is displayed:
Board ID – the number of the slot where the IP card used to handle the
participant is installed.
Unit ID – Displays the unit number (on the card) used to handle the
participant in the conference.
Allocated – Indicates whether the IP card is used to run the conference
or not.
All other resources are identical to ISDN participants and are described
in Table 5-13 on page 5-50.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Monitoring Gateway Sessions
If a gateway is configured on your MCU, you can monitor the On Going
gateway sessions.
To view the list of current gateway sessions:
•
Double-click the On Going Gateway Sessions icon or click the plus [+]
icon next to the On Going Gateway Sessions icon.
The list of gateway sessions opens.
Displays Dial-up string
showing call setup
between two H.323
endpoints
Displays the incoming
gateway Dial-up string
from the H.323 local
endpoint
Displays the outgoing
gateway Dial-up string
to the H.323 remote
endpoint
Figure 5-2: Gateway Sessions Indicators
Figure 5-2 shows a gateway call between two IP networks. The dialing string
is composed of the H.323 Network Service prefix (GW Service prefix), the
profile identifier, and the remote H.323 endpoint’s alias in E.164 format
(1045). The system displays the alias of the remote H.323 endpoint in the
gateway session name, and the participant name.
The same status icons that indicate the standard participant status, are used to
indicate the participant status in a gateway session. For the description of all
conference status icons, see Table 5-2 on page 5-10.
In a Double Gateway call, the system displays only the local endpoint and
gateway session parameters.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Monitoring Conferences
To view the participants status in the gateway session:
•
Double-click the conference icon or click the plus [+] icon next to the
gateway session.
The list of participants of the gateway session opens.
In Figure 5-3 the IP participant dials the GW Service prefix, the pound sign #
and the ISDN phone number of the H.320 endpoint. The system displays the
phone number of the ISDN participant (293711111) and the alias of the H.323
endpoint initiating the gateway session. The same numbers appear as the
participant names.
Figure 5-3: Gateway Session - H.323 Participant Status Indicators
As shown in Figure 5-4, the H.320 endpoint dials to an H.323. The dialing
string is comprised of the MCU ISDN dial-in number (one of the numbers
allocated to gateway calls) and the H.323 alias (in E.164 format). The H.323
is entered as the extension number and is sent to the gateway in TCS4 format.
The system displays the ISDN endpoint’s CLI number (or NOCLI if no CLI
number is detected) as part of the gateway session name and the ISDN
participant name.
Figure 5-4: Gateway Session - ISDN Participant Status Indicators
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Operations Performed During On
Going Conferences
During an On Going Conference, the operator can perform many
management tasks at the conference level or at the participant level, using
the MGC Manager or the WebCommander application.
Operations at the participant level affect individual connections, while those
at the conference level affect all participants of the conference. Some
conference-level operator’s actions affect individual participants, for
example when during a Q&A (Question-and-Answer) session they grant
individual participants permission to ask questions and add them to the
queue.
Operators can terminate a conference before the originally scheduled
ending, or extend its duration. Alternatively, they can disconnect an
individual participant while the conference is in progress, or temporarily
mute the transmission to enable other participants to hold a private
discussion. Operators can manage video sources, establish an operator-
controlled dial-out connection during the conference and add new
participants while the conference is in session.
Some conference management tasks can also be performed by chairpersons
from their endpoint, using DTMF codes or the WebCommander application.
This chapter describes the activities and options available to the operator or
the chairperson during an On Going Conference.
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
Overview
The MGC Manager operator performs different roles during attended and
unattended conferences.
Attended Conferences
In attended conferences, participants accessing an Entry Queue, an IVR
Queue or a Greet and Guide Queue are moved to the Participants Queue
where they wait for the operator to assist them. The operator’s role during this
stage is to move the participants from the Participants Queue to the
destination conference. During an On Going Conference, the operator can
take part in the conference and perform various tasks, for example assist
participants privately; conduct a voting session; manage a Question-and
Answer session; place participants on hold, and lock the conference to dial-in
participants.
Unattended Conferences
In unattended conferences, participants use DTMF codes in response to
menu-driven voice prompts and in this way are guided to the conference.
Unless there is a problem in the connection or the participant did not enter the
correct conference Numeric ID or password, operator intervention is not
required. In unattended conferences the operator usually leaves the
management of the conference to a designated participant, usually the
chairperson/meeting organizer. The conference chairperson can perform
certain operator’s functions, such as start a voting session, control the
Question-and-Answer session, mute incoming parties, place the conference
on hold and lock or unlock the conference.
All operator functions can be performed either via the WebCommander
interface or using DTMF codes from the participant’s endpoint.
Participant Level Operations
The following operations can be performed at the participant level:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Make dial-out connections
Change the participant connection type (dial-in/dial-out)
Change the participant’s Line Rate before connection to the conference
Disconnect and reconnect participants
Change the properties of a disconnected participant
Downspeed
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
•
•
Name undefined dial-in participants
Move participants from one conference to another (using the drag and
drop option or the participant menu)
•
•
•
Attended Conferencing”)
Move a participant to the Home conference (only in an a Attended
conference - see Chapter 8, “Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and
Attended Conferencing”)
Place a participant on-hold (only in an a Attended conference - see
Chapter 8, “Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended
Conferencing”)
•
•
•
•
Designate a participant as Exclusive Speaker
Change a participant’s status to Conference Chairperson
Designate a participant as a VIP
Modify the participant’s User Defined fields information (MGC
Manager only)
•
•
•
•
•
Control the participant's listening and broadcasting volume
Mute or unmute a participant
Block the transmission of the audio channel to the participant’s site
Enable Auto Gain Control (AGC) function
Perform participant operations via DTMF Codes
Participant and Conference Level Video Management
•
Change the conference and participant Video Layout in a Continuous
Presence conference
•
Video Force at the conference and the participant level
Conference Level Operations
The following operations can be performed at the conference level:
•
•
•
•
Add new participants to a conference
Mute dial-in participants upon their connection to the conference
Mute audio for a conference
Lock and unlock a conference
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
•
•
•
•
•
Change the conference and chairperson password
Change a conference's duration
Enable the end of conference reminder
Change the conference billing code
Modify conference User Defined fields information (MGC Manager
only)
•
•
Add remarks
Enable broadcasting of Annex D still video image to all participants (in
Transcoding and Continuous Presence conferences)
•
•
•
•
Print the conference details to a file, printer or clipboard
Control the Question-and-Answer session
Conduct Voting sessions
Place a conference on hold (Audio Only conferences only - see the MGC
Manager User’s Guide, VoicePlus Edition)
•
Perform chairperson operations via DTMF Codes
Operations performed during On Going Audio Only Conferences are described
in the MGC Manager User’s Guide, VoicePlus Edition, Chapter 3, “Managing
Audio Only Conferences”.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Participant Level Operations
Making Dial-Out Connections
When the Dial-Out Manually option is selected for the conference, the
operator has to manually connect dial-out participants to the conference.
Sometimes, when the connected participant is accidentally disconnected from
the conference, the operator has to manually re-connect the participant to the
conference.
To establish a dial-out connection:
1. In the Monitor pane, Status pane or Browser pane, list the conference
participants.
2. Right-click the participant icon to connect to the conference, and then
click Connect Participant.
Wait for the connection to be established. During the connection process,
the participant's status, which is displayed in the Status column, changes
from Standby to Connecting and the Connection icon is displayed in the
Connection column. When the connection is established, the participant's
status is indicated in the Status column of the Status pane and the
Connection icon changes from Disconnected to Connected.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each participant to be manually connected to the
conference.
•
•
Use this procedure to reconnect participants who were previously
disconnected from the conference or failed to connect to the conference.
If you have difficulties connecting dial-out ISDN participants, make sure that
the specific switch used for the connection does not require the addition of
the pound key (#) at the end of the dial string. If yes, modify the properties of
the disconnected participant.
For listing of all participant connection status icons, see Chapter 5,
”MGC Manager Icons” on page 5-10.
Changing the Participant Connection Type (Dial-In/Dial-Out)
Sometimes you need to change the connection type used by the participant to
connect to the conference. For example, when the participant cannot dial in
and you want the MCU to dial to the participant. You can toggle between the
dial-in and dial-out connection type, using the Participant Properties -
Identification dialog box, or from the Participant right-click menu.
•
The Connection Type parameter can be changed only when the participant is
disconnected from the conference and both dial-in and dial-out parameters
are defined in the Participant Properties - Identification dialog box.
•
If the dial-in phone numbers are not defined for the ISDN participant when
switching to dial-in and the Meet Me Per option is set to MCU - Conference,
the system automatically allocates the appropriate phone numbers from the
list of dial-in numbers defined in the ISDN Network Service that was selected
for participants.
•
If the Meet Me Per option is set to Party or Channel, and no CLI number is
defined for the participant, the system will reject the participant’s call.
To toggle between Connection Types:
1. In the Monitor pane, Status pane or Browser pane, list the participants
defined for the conference.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
2. Right-click the participant's icon whose connection type needs to be
changed, and then click Dial In or Dial Out (depending on the
participant's current definition) to select the desired connection type.
The system toggles between dial-in and dial-out depending on the
current participant connection type.
Changing the Participant's Line Rate Before Connection
You can modify the line rate for a disconnected ISDN participant to connect
to the conference when there is a problem connecting the participant with the
defined line rate.
This option is available in the Participant Properties - Advanced dialog box,
or from the participant's right-click menu.
•
•
The right-click menu option is available only to ISDN/ATM participants.
In the Video Switching mode, the line rate of all participants must be the
same.
To change the line rate from the Participant right-click menu:
1. Expand the On Going Conferences or the Reservations list.
2. Expand the On Going Conference tree to display its participants.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
3. In the Monitor pane, Status pane or Browser pane, right-click the icon of
the participant to connect, click Line Rates, and then select/check the
desired line rate from the Line Rates list.
The participant (endpoint) will connect to the conference using the
selected line rate.
To change the line rate from the Participant Properties – Advanced tab:
1. In the Monitor pane, Status pane or Browser pane, right-click the icon of
the disconnected participant, and then click Properties.
The Participant Properties - Identification dialog box opens.
2. Click the Advanced tab.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The Participant Properties - Advanced dialog box opens.
IP Participant
ISDN Participant
a. For an ISDN participant, adjust the line rate by selecting the settings
in the Aggregation, and Number of Channels fields.
b. For an IP participant, clear the Auto Video Bit Rate check box.
3. Click OK.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
Disconnecting and Reconnecting Participants
On occasion, a participant may not need to continue with the conference. In
such a case, you can remove a participant from the conference by:
•
•
Disconnecting the participant
Deleting the participant
When you disconnect a participant, resources remain allocated to that
participant and the defined properties are retained by the system’s memory,
therefore you can easily reconnect the participant if necessary. This is useful
when participants wish to discontinue temporarily with intention to return to
the conference at a later stage. Deleting a participant completely removes all
participant information from the conference and releases the resources that
were allocated to that participant. Therefore, to reconnect a participant who
was deleted from the conference, you have to define the parameters again as
you would do for a new participant.
To disconnect a participant:
1. In the Monitor pane, Status pane or Browser pane, list the participants
connected to the conference.
2. Right-click the icon of the participant to disconnect, and then click
Disconnect Participant.
The participant is disconnected from the conference.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The status Disconnected appears in the Status column next to the
participant's name and the appropriate icon is displayed in the
Connection column.
To reconnect a disconnected participant, right-click the participant icon, and then
click Connect Participant. For details, see “Making Dial-Out Connections” on
page 6-5.
To delete a participant:
When a participant no longer needs to be part of a conference and there is no
intention to reconnect, you can delete the participant from the conference.
This action also releases the resources allocated to a participant.
1. In the Monitor pane, Status pane or Browser pane, list the participants
connected to the conference.
2. Right-click the participant icon, and then click Delete.
A message appears, requesting you to confirm the deletion process.
3. Click Yes to delete the selected participant.
The participant's name disappears from the participants list in the
Monitor, Status and Browser panes. To reconnect a participant who has
been deleted from a conference, you must add the participant to the
conference as a new participant.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
Changing the Properties of a Disconnected Participant
You can change several properties of a defined participant who is
disconnected, for example, before reconnecting that participant.
•
Name - Modify the automatically assigned name to the participant’s real
name to correctly display it in the Monitor and Status panes. Participant
name is also included in the CDR file which is used for billing.
•
•
•
Connection Type - Alter the participant connection from dial-in to dial-
out or vice versa.
Phone Number or IP address - Change the participant’s dial-in/dial-out
phone number or IP dress as required.
Interface Type - Change the participant’s interface (and protocol),
provided that the endpoint supports both ISDN and IP.
•
•
•
•
VIP status - Change the participant’ status from or to VIP.
Participant State - Reconnect the participant.
Mute (By Operator) - Mute or unmute the participant.
Service Type - Change the name of the network service that the
participant is using to connect
•
•
AGC - disable AGC when required (enabled is the default)
Recording - change the recording settings from None (no recording) to
Dial-up or vice versa.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Downspeeding
Downspeeding reduces the conference line rate to enable bonding participants
with faulty channels to connect to the conference with the remaining
channels.
To enable Downspeeding:
•
Right-click the On Going Conference icon, or the Reservations icon, and
then click Down Speed (On 6B Participants).
Naming Undefined Dial-in Participants
Dial-in participants, who were not defined prior to the conference start
(undefined participants) are automatically named by the system when
connecting to the conference. This default name is derived from the
conference name and a sequential number.
You can modify the automatically assigned name to the participant’s real
name to correctly display it in the Monitor and Status panes. The name
change is updated in the Call Detail Record (CDR) which is used for billing.
Usually you will change the name while you attend the participant (in the
Operator conference).
You can also change the name of the participants who are waiting in the Entry
Queue or when they are connected to the conference.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
To name a “Meet Me” dial-in participant:
1. List the participants in the Operator conference, in the On Going
Conference or in the Participants Queues.
2. Right-click the participant icon, and then click Properties.
The Participant Properties - Identification dialog box opens.
3. In the Name field, type the participant’s new name.
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
4. Click OK.
The participant name is updated in the Browser, Monitor and Status
panes. This name will also be saved to the CDR (Call Detail Record) file.
Moving Participants Between Conferences
MGC Manager enables the operator to move one or more participants from
one On Going Conference to another. Moving can be done either interactively
- by drag-and-drop, or from the participant’s right-click menu. However,
differing resource requirements of the two conferences as well as the defined
capabilities of the participant endpoints have to be taken into account.
Guidelines for moving participants
•
When the video protocol is set to Auto, it enables the dynamic
adjustment of the highest common video in Video Switching
conferences. Therefore, when moving a participant using the H.263 or
H.264 video protocol to a conference that was set to Auto video protocol,
the system will automatically adjust the video protocol of that participant
to the one currently set for the destination conference.
•
For video switching conferences, when moving an IP participant from
one conference to another, the operator should ensure that the destination
conference has the same capabilities as the source conference.
•
•
Participants can be moved between conferences if both the source and
the destination conference have the same line rate and video settings.
It is only possible to move participants between On Going Conferences
that are controlled by the same MCU and are run by the same type of
audio and video card. For example you cannot move a participant with
the Audio+ card capability to a conference where participants have only
the Standard Audio card capability.
•
•
VoIP participants can be moved to any conference that is running on an
Audio+ card.
In video Transcoding or Continuous Presence conferences, participants
can be moved between conferences, unless:
—
The destination conference uses video Annexes which are not used
in the source conference.
—
The destination conference is set to one of the Dual Stream options.
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
To interactively move a participant from one conference to another:
1. First, expand the On Going Conferences list in the Browser pane, to
display the source conference icon and the destination conference icon.
2. Drag the icon of participant from the source conference and drop it on
the icon of the destination conference.
To move several participants at the same time, click the icons of the participants
to move while pressing down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> key. Then drag and drop them
on the destination conference icon.
The Drag Confirmation dialog box opens.
3. Click Yes to confirm the action.
The participant is moved to the destination conference.
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
To move a participant to another conference using the right-click menu:
1. In the Browser, Monitor or Status pane, expand the participants list in the
source conference.
2. Right-click the icon of the participant you want to move, click Move
Participant, and then click the name of the destination conference from
the list of active conferences.
The participant is transferred to the selected destination conference.
To move several participants together:
1. Using the standard Windows conventions, select the icons of the
participants to move.
2. While the list is highlighted, right-click one of the participants icons,
click Move Participant to open the list of active conferences, and then
click the name of the destination conference to which to move the
participants.
The selected participants are transferred to the selected destination
conference.
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
Designating an Exclusive Speaker
During On Going Conferences, you can designate one participant as the
conference lecturer/speaker. All other participants are automatically muted so
they do not interrupt the lecture. Alternatively, the chairperson can designate
themselves as the conference Exclusive Speaker by entering the DTMF code
assigned to this function (the default code is *5) on the DTMF input device
(usually remote control). For more about DTMF codes, see “Using DTMF
Codes During a Conference” on page 6-95.
To designate a participant as the conference Exclusive Speaker:
•
In the Browser pane, the Monitor pane or the Status pane of the main
window, right-click the participant's icon, and then click Exclusive
Speaker.
The selected participant becomes the conference speaker and all the
other participants are automatically muted by the system.
The Exclusive Speaker icon is displayed in the Audio column in
the Monitor and Status panes.
The Muted by MCU icon is displayed in the Audio column of all
other participants.
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
To cancel the Exclusive Speaker mode:
•
In the Browser pane, the Monitor pane or the Status pane of the main
window, right-click the participant's icon, and then click Cancel
Exclusive Speaker.
Alternatively, the chairperson can cancel the Exclusive Speaker mode by
entering the DTMF code assigned to this function. The default code is
<#5>.
Changing a Participant’s Status to Conference Chairperson
During On Going Conferences, operators can designate a participant to
function as the conference chairperson. The chairperson can perform various
operations during the conference, such as lock or unlock the conference to
undefined dial-in participants, initiate a voting session, become the
conference exclusive speaker while muting all other participants and more.
Participant can designate themselves as chairperson using a DTMF code (the
default code is <*78>). In this case, the system requests the participant to
enter the Chairperson password in order to become the chairperson. If the
participant entered an incorrect password, an audio prompt is played,
indicating that the wrong password was entered and that the participant
should re-enter the conference chairperson password.
This option is enabled in conferences in which the assigned IVR Service has
the following definitions:
•
•
The Conference Chairperson option is enabled.
A DTMF code is assigned to the Change Chairperson function.
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
To change a participant’s status to conference chairperson:
•
In the Browser pane, the Monitor pane or the Status pane of the main
window, right-click the participant's icon, and then click Change to
Chairperson.
The selected participant becomes the conference chairperson while all
the other participants remain regular participants.
To revert the chairperson’s status to regular participant:
•
In the Monitor pane or the Status pane of the main window, right-click
the chairperson's icon, and then click Change to Regular Participant.
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Designating a VIP Participant
During an On Going Conference, you can designate a participant as VIP. The
VIP is identified to the operator as a participant who requires preferential
attention during the conference. However, the VIP status does not change the
role of the participant.
VIP participants are indicated with the VIP
icon.
To designate a participant as VIP:
1. In the Browser pane, the Monitor pane or the Status pane of the main
window, right-click the participant's icon, and then click Properties.
The Participant's Properties dialog box opens.
2. Click the Identification tab.
The Participant's Properties - Identification dialog box opens.
3. Select the VIP check box to assign the new status to the participant, and
then click OK.
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
The selected participant becomes a VIP in the On Going conference. The
other participant’s properties are unchanged.
To revert from the VIP status to regular participant:
1. In the Browser pane, the Monitor pane or the Status pane of the main
window, right-click the participant's icon, and then click Properties.
The Participant's Properties - Identification dialog box opens.
2. Clear the VIP check box, and then click OK.
The selected participant reverts to a regular participant.
Modifying a Participant’s User Defined Properties
In the Participant Properties - Identification dialog box User Defined fields
1, 2, 3 and 4, you can enter (or edit) additional information that identifies the
participant, such as the E-mail address, company name or job title. You can
also change the titles of the User Defined fields as required. These fields are
displayed by default, however if you do not see them, you can configure the
dialog box to include them. This is done in the Database Manager
application.
To display the User Defined fields in Participant Properties:
1. Log in to the Database Manager.
2. Expand the defaults icon to list the options.
3. Right-click the User Defined Defaults icon, and click Add User Defined
Default.
The User Defined dialog box opens.
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
For details of this procedure, see the MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II,
Chapter 6, “Database Manager”
The Participant Properties - Identification User Defined fields are displayed only
if the Show User Defined Fields in Conference Properties option is selected in
the Database Manager -> User Defined Defaults.
To modify User Defined fields:
1. In the Browser pane, the Monitor pane or the Status pane of the main
window, right-click the participant's icon, and then click Properties.
The Participant's Properties - Identification dialog box opens.
Enter general information about the participant into the User Defined
fields, and then click OK.
The information is updated.
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
Adjusting the Broadcasting and Listening Volume
The broadcasting and listening volume of the participant's audio transmission
can be changed during an On Going Conference. This operation is applicable
to all interface types.
To adjust the broadcasting and listening volume for the participant:
1. In the Browser, Monitor or Status panes, right-click the participant’s
icon, and then click Properties. Alternatively, double-click the
participant icon.
The Participant Properties dialog box opens.
2. If required, click the Identification tab.
The Participant Properties - Identification dialog box opens.
3. Move the slider to the right or to the left to adjust the audio volume.
On the volume scale, 1 is the lowest and 10 is the highest volume. The
Broadcasting and the Listening volume of each endpoint at the time of
connection is set to 5. Each movement of the volume slider increases or
decreases the volume by one unit, equivalent to 3 dB.
6-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
4. Click OK.
Participants in an On Going Conference can also control the volume of their
endpoint. To do this, they use DTMF codes to increase or decrease the volume of
the audio transmitted from and to their endpoint. The default DTMF code to
increase the Broadcasting volume is *9, to decrease - #9. The default DTMF code
to increase the Listening volume is *76, and to decrease #76.
See “Using DTMF Codes During a Conference” on page 6-95.
Muting/Unmuting Participant’s Audio or Video
Occasionally, a conference organizer may want to exclude the audio or video
channel of a participant from part of an On Going Conference.
You can mute a participant's audio and/or video signals via the participant's
right-click menu or in the Participant Properties dialog box. A participant
whose audio or video signal is muted hears and sees the other participants
while the other participants cannot hear or see the muted participant.
Alternatively, participants' audio and video signals can be muted from their
own endpoint, through the endpoint application. (The default DTMF code for
muting individual’s line is *6, and #6 for unmuting the line.)
•
•
•
An endpoint muted by the operator remains muted until you unmute it.
Disconnecting and reconnecting participants unmutes muted participants.
Only connected participants can be muted.
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
To mute a participant using the participant right-click menu:
•
In the Browser pane, the Monitor or the Status pane, right-click the
participant icon, and then click Mute Audio to mute the audio signal, or
Mute Video to mute the video signal.
Alternatively, to mute the audio signal, select the participant’s icon, and
then press the appropriate shortcut key combination (the default shortcut
key combination is <Ctrl+M>).
The menu changes to UnMute Audio, or UnMute Video (respectively).
The status of the audio channel in the Audio column in the Status and
Monitor panes changes to “Mute Audio”.
The status of the video channel in the Video column in the Status and
Monitor panes changes to “Mute Video”.
Muting is also indicated by an icon,
or
in the Audio or Video
columns of the Monitor and Status tables.
6-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
To unmute a participant using the participant right-click menu:
•
In the Browser pane, Monitor pane or the Status pane, right-click the
participant icon, and then click Unmute Audio to unmute the audio
signal, or Unmute Video to unmute the video signal.
Alternatively, to unmute the audio signal, select the participant’s icon,
and then press the appropriate shortcut key combination (the default
shortcut key combination is <Ctrl+U>).
To mute a participant using the Participant Properties dialog box:
1. In the Monitor pane or the Status pane, right-click the participant icon,
and then click Properties.
The Participant Properties dialog box opens.
6-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
2. Click the Connection Info2 tab.
The Participant Properties - Connection Info2 dialog box opens.
3. In the Mute (By Operator) box, select the Audio check box to mute the
audio signal, and/or select the Video check box to mute the video signal.
A check mark appears in the selected check box.
4. Click OK.
The dialog box closes. The icon for muted Audio or Video appears in the
Monitor and Status panes of the main MGC Manager window. The
muting takes effect immediately.
To unmute a participant using the Participant Properties dialog box:
1. In the Monitor pane or the Status pane, right-click the participant icon,
and then click Properties.
The Participant Properties dialog box opens.
2. Click the Connection Info2 tab.
The Participant Properties - Connection Info2 dialog box opens.
3. In the Mute (By Operator) box, clear the Audio check box to unmute the
audio signal, and/or clear the Video check box to unmute video signal.
6-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
4. Click OK.
The dialog box closes. The icon for unmuted Audio or Video appears in
the Monitor and Status panes of the main MGC Manager window.
Unmuting takes effect immediately.
For a detailed list of all status icons related to muting/unmuting the
conference participants, see Table 5-4 on page 5-20 in Chapter 5.
Blocking/Unblocking Audio
You can block the audio transmission from the conference to a certain
endpoint, preventing this participant from hearing the conference audio.
Unblocking releases the audio to the endpoint. Blocking the audio sent to the
endpoint does not mute the endpoint’s audio and the other conference
participants can still hear the participant. This feature is applicable only to
video participants.
The audio transmission to a participant site can be blocked either in the
participant right-click menu or in the Participant Properties - Connection
Info2 dialog box.
To block audio transmission to the participant sites:
1. In the Browser pane, Monitor pane or the Status pane, right-click the
participant’s icon, and then click Block Audio.
The participant’s audio icon
in the Audio column in the Monitor
and Status panes now indicates that the audio transmission to the
participant’s site is blocked.
6-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
2. Alternatively, block audio transmission to the participant site from the
Participant Properties - Connection Info2 dialog box:
a. Right-click the participant’s icon, and then click Properties.
The Participant Properties dialog box opens.
b. Click the Connection Info2 tab.
The Participant Properties - Connection Info2 dialog box opens.
6-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
c. In the Block box, select the Audio check box.
d. Click OK to apply the changes.
To release a blocked site and resume audio transmission:
•
In the Browser pane, Monitor pane or the Status pane, right-click the
participant’s icon, and then click Unblock Audio.
Or:
•
In the Participant Properties - Connection Info2 dialog box, clear the
Block- Audio check box and then click OK.
The Audio transmission to the participant site is resumed.
Enabling/Disabling Auto Gain Control (AGC)
The Auto Gain Control (AGC) mechanism balances noise and audio volume
of the received signals for all conference participants. Different endpoints and
phones produce different types of source noise and volume. Auto Gain
Control is applied to all incoming audio streams prior to mixing, and
dynamically changes the amplification of the input signal to provide a
constant output amplitude.
The intensity of input signals can vary due to the following factors:
•
•
•
•
Microphone properties and adjustments
Background noise
Speaker’s distance from microphone
Speaker’s manner of speech
•
•
The AGC option is applicable to all participants using Audio+ resources.
The AGC option is enabled in the “system.cfg” in the AUDIO PLUS FLAGS
section. By default, the AGC flag is set to YES, and when defining new
participants, the AGC option is selected.
In some cases, you may need to disable AGC for a participant during the
conference (if the line is too noisy and affects the quality of the audio
achieved by the AGC mechanism). You can enable or disable AGC using the
participant right-click menu or from the Participant Properties dialog box.
6-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
To disable AGC for an On Going Conference participant:
1. In the Status or Monitor panes, right-click the participant icon, and then
click Turn off AGC.
2. Alternatively, disable AGC from the Participant Properties dialog box:
a. In the Status or Monitor panes, right-click the participant icon.
b. Click Properties.
The Participant Properties dialog box opens.
c. Click the Advanced tab.
d. Clear the AGC check box to disable the AGC feature for this
participant.
e. Click OK to apply the change.
6-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Video Management Operations
Controlling Video Layout
During the conference, operators can adjust several video layout parameters
on the participant level and on the conference level.
Changing Video Layout for the Participant
In Continuous Presence conferences, Personal Layout is a customized display
layout that is viewed only by the participant for whom it was defined. Video
display layouts available for the conference and Personal Layouts are
determined by the type of the Continuous Presence mode that was selected for
the conference at reservation stage (during the conference definition) -
Classic or Quad Views. You can modify the Personal Layout for a participant
using the following applications:
•
MGC Manager - the operator selects the personal layout for a participant
in the Participant Properties - Video Sources dialog box.
•
WebCommander - the meeting organizer selects the personal layout for a
participant in the On Going Conference window. For more information,
see the MGC WebCommander User’s Guide.
•
Click&View - participants can change the layout from their endpoint by
entering the appropriate DTMF codes.
Personal Layout is disabled if Same Layout was selected for the conference.
6-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
To modify the Personal Layout for a participant using MGC Manager:
1. Right-click the icon of the connected participant you want to modify and
then click Properties.
The Participant Properties dialog box opens.
2. Click the Video Sources tab.
The Participant Properties - Video Sources dialog box opens.
3. Select the Personal Layout option.
6-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
4. Click the arrow next to the number of squares/panes to be displayed on
the participant’s screen.
The available video layouts for the selected view are displayed.
5. Click the desired layout.
The Video Layout pane is updated in the Participant Properties - Video
Sources dialog box.
You may video force participants to the video layout window using the standard
method as described in “Video Forcing on the Participant Level” on page 6-42.
6. Click Apply or OK and close the dialog box.
The new layout is displayed on the participant’s endpoint. However, the
layout selected for the conference remains unchanged, and is viewed by
all conference participants in Conference Layout view.
6-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
7. If required, repeat this procedure to modify Personal Layouts for other
participants.
•
•
Quad Views layouts are available only when the conference is defined as
Continuous Presence - Quad Views.
The Visual Effects selected for the conference apply to personal layout at the
time of change and if Visual Effects are modified for the conference they are
not applied to the Personal Layout.
Changing the Video Layout for a Continuous Presence Session
During Continuous Presence conferences, you can change the video layout
that was set for the conference.
To change the video layout during a Continuous Presence conference:
1. In the Browser pane, expand the On Going Conference list.
2. Right-click the On Going Conference icon, and then click Properties.
The Conference Properties dialog box opens.
3. Click the Video Sources tab.
The Conference Properties - Video Sources dialog box opens.
6-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
4. To select another video layout, determine the number of windows to
appear on the screen, and click the arrow next to the numbered Video
Layout icon.
A pop-up menu appears, displaying the available video layouts for the
selected number of windows.
5. Click the desired video layout.
6. Click Apply to save these changes and modify additional properties or
click OK to confirm and exit the Conference Properties dialog box.
The video layout is updated for all participants/endpoints.
The Continuous Presence - Classic layout can display maximum of nine video
windows. The Continuous Presence- Quad Views layout can display maximum of
sixteen video windows. If there are more participants than windows, voice
activated switching can occur.
Setting the Auto Video Layout
During Continuous Presence video conferences you can select or deselect the
Auto Layout option.
When this option is activated, the system automatically selects the conference
layout based on the number of participants in the conference. When a new
video participant is connected or disconnected, the conference layout
automatically changes to reflect the new number of video participants. Audio
Only participants do not affect the selected layout.
When the option is deactivated, the system uses the previously selected
conference layout.
For details of the layouts that are automatically selected by the system for
different numbers of connected participants, see “Auto Layout” on page 4-75.
•
•
Software CP conferences cannot be set to Auto Layout.
The Auto Layout feature can be used with Lecture Mode (for the lecturer
display), but cannot be enabled with Lecture Show.
•
Auto Layout can be used with Same Layout and Conference On Port (COP).
In this mode, the system selects the layout as if one additional participant was
added to the conference to show the self view of the speaker. For example, in
a standard CP conference, if there are five participants in the conference, the
system shows only four windows, as the speaker does not see him/herself.
However, in Same Layout or COP mode, Auto Layout selects a layout for five
participants (and not four) to show the speaker.
6-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modifying Video Layouts in Lecture Mode Settings
During Continuous Presence conferences, you can select the Lecture Mode,
Lecture Show, or Presentation Mode settings, change their properties, or
deselect them. For a detailed description, see Chapter 10, “Lecture and
Presentation Options”.
Lecture Mode, Lecture Show, and Presentation Mode are disabled in Software
Continuous Presence conferences.
Video Forcing
In Continuous Presence conferences, the operator can select which participant
will appear in each of the video layout windows.
Video forcing can be applied at the conference level or at the participant level.
Video forcing at the conference level applies to all the conference participants
while video forcing at the participant level applies only to the participant
whose video layout is being modified.
Video Forcing Guidelines
•
A participant cannot appear in two or more windows at the same time.
When attempting to select a participant who was already selected in
another window, the system clears the participant from the first window
and assigns the participant to the second window.
•
•
•
Video forcing performed at the participant level overrides the conference
forcing.
A participant cannot view him/herself in a layout window, unless the
Same Layout option is checked.
A participant should be assigned to the same type of layout window for
the conference layout as that in the participant level. This is especially
important when the video layout is set to mixed view images, such as
1+4, 1+5, 1+7, and 1+8 (applicable to the Classic mode).
•
When changing the Video Layout at the conference level, the video
forcing settings are cancelled, and video switching is audio-activated.
6-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Video Forcing on the Conference Level
There are two methods to perform video forcing at the conference level:
•
•
In the Conference Properties - Video Sources dialog box
From the Conference right-click menu
To define Video Forcing in the Conference Properties:
1. Right-click the On Going Conference icon, and then click Properties.
The Conference Properties dialog box opens.
2. Click the Video Sources tab.
The Conference Properties - Video Sources dialog box opens.
The video
layout
selected for
the
conference
Video
layout
window
If Auto
Select is
selected, the
system
chooses the
participant
The name of the participant currently
viewed in this window
3. In the Video Layout pane, in the window to which you want to force a
participant, select the participants name from the list.
The participant selected for a certain video window is viewed in this
window until further changes take place.
6-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
4. Repeat the previous step to force participants to other windows.
Windows that are not assigned any participant display the current
speaker and last speakers. Selecting the Black Screen option displays a
dark grey window instead of a participant.
5. To cancel the video forcing for a window, select Auto Select from the
participants list. In such a case, the switching between participants is
audio activated.
To Video Force interactively:
1. Right-click the On Going Conference icon, and then click Video Force
(Drag & Drop).
6-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The Video Layout window opens, showing the currently selected layout.
2. In the Browser pane, drag and drop the participant icon from the On
Going Conference to the appropriate video layout window in the Video
Layout window.
The participant name appears in the field at the bottom of the video
layout windows.
You can also video force participants to the video windows by selecting
the participants name from the window’s list.
3. Click Apply to update the conference video layout and continue with
forcing to other windows, or click OK to apply the changes and exit this
dialog box.
6-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
Video Forcing on the Participant Level
For each conference participant you can select the participants to be viewed in
each of the video layout windows assigned to them.
1. Right-click the icon of the participant whose video layout you want to
force, and then click Properties.
The Participant Properties dialog box opens.
2. Click the Video Sources tab.
The Participant Properties - Video Sources dialog box opens.
Name of the
participantcurrently
forced to this
window
3. In the Video Layout pane, select from the Participant list the name of the
participant to be viewed in the selected window.
6-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The participant selected for a certain video window is constantly viewed
in the window until further changes take place.
4. Repeat the previous step to select the participants to be viewed in the
other windows. Windows that were not assigned any participant will
display the current speaker and previous speakers, according to the
conference settings.
5. To cancel the video forcing in a desired window, click Auto select from
the Participant list.
6. Click OK to apply the changes and exit this dialog box,
Video Forcing at the Participant level overrides Video Forcing at the Conference
level.
6-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
Conference Level Operations
Adding New Participants to a Conference
Occasionally you may be required to add a participant after a conference has
begun. To do this, you can use one of the following methods
•
Define a new participant:
—
—
using the conference right-click menu
using the conference toolbar
using the Conference Properties dialog box
•
•
Add a defined participant from the Participant Database or from a
Participant Template file.
Copy a participant from another conference or a conference template.
For detailed information on using databases and templates, see the MGC
Manager User’s Guide Volume II, Chapters 6 and 7 respectively.
For detailed information on defining participants, see Chapter 4, “Defining
Participant Properties”.
When defining a participant, during an On Going Conference, only the participant
properties relevant to the conference to which the participant is added are
enabled. For example when defining a participant during an On Going Audio
Only conference, only audio participants can be defined.
6-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
To define a new participant using the conference right-click menu:
1. Expand the On Going Conferences list, right-click the icon of the
conference to which to add the participant, and then click New
Participant. Alternatively, use the shortcut key (default key is <F8>).
The Participant Properties dialog box opens.
2. Set up the required properties in the Identification and Advanced tabs of
the Participants Properties dialog box.
3. Click OK.
The new participant is added to the conference. The participant's name is
listed in the Monitor and Status panes of the main window.
To define a new participant from the conference toolbar:
1. Expand the On Going Conferences list, click the icon of the conference
to which to add the participant, and then click the New Participant
button
on the Conference toolbar.
The Participant Properties dialog box opens.
2. Repeat the steps 2 and 3 as in the previous procedure.
6-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
To define a new participant from the Conference Properties dialog box:
1. Expand the On Going Conferences list, right-click the icon of the
conference to which to add the participant, and then click Properties.
The Conference Properties dialog box opens.
2. Click the Participants tab.
The Conference Properties - Participants dialog box opens.
3. Click the New button.
The Participant Properties dialog box opens.
4. Set up the required properties in the Identification and Advanced tabs of
the Participants Properties dialog box.
5. Click OK.
The new participant is listed in the Conference Participants list.
6. Click OK to complete the conference editing and return to the MGC
Manager main window.
The participant's name appears in the Monitor and Status panes of the
main window.
6-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
To add a Participant Template to the conference:
You can add a participant template to the conference from the Participant
database or from a Participant Template file.
1. In the On Going Conferences list, right-click the conference icon, and
then click Properties.
The Conference Properties dialog box opens.
2. Click the Participants tab.
The Conference Properties - Participants dialog box opens. The
participants list is displayed according to the selected Reservation
template. However, you can change the Database Group or the
Participant Template file to display additional participant templates.
3. To add a participant from another Group in the database:
a. Click the From database button.
The Open Parties in database dialog box opens.
b. Select the desired Group from the Group list and click OK.
The list of Participant templates in displayed in the Pre-defined
Participants box in the Conference Properties – Participants dialog
box.
4. To add a participant from a Participant Template file,
a. Click the Browser button.
The Open dialog box opens.
b. Select the appropriate Participant Template file from the browser
list, and click Open.
The list of Participant templates is displayed in the Pre-Defined
Participants box in the Conference Properties - Participants dialog
box.
6-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
5. In the Pre-defined Participants list, select the participant to add to the
conference, and then click the Move (>>) button.
The participant is added to the Conference Participants list.
6. Click OK to complete the selection.
To copy the participant properties from an On Going Conference or
Reservation:
1. In the Browser pane, expand the Reservations or the On Going
Conferences list, and then expand the On Going Conference icon to list
its participants.
6-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
2. Right-click the icon of the participant to copy, and then click Copy
Participant, or use the appropriate shortcut key (the default key is
<Ctrl>+<C>).
3. Right-click the conference icon to which to copy the participant, and
then click Paste Participant, or use the appropriate shortcut key (the
default key is <Ctrl>+<V>).
The participant’s details are copied to the selected conference under the
same name.
Alternatively, to paste the participant while changing the participant’s
name and other parameters:
a. Click Paste Participant As.
The Participant - Properties dialog box opens.
6-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
The participant is added to the conference with the new parameters.
When defining a participant, during an On Going Conference, only the participant
properties relevant to the conference to which the participant is added are
enabled. For example when defining a participant during an On Going Audio
Only conference, only audio participants can be defined.
For detailed information on defining participants, see “Defining
Participant Properties” on page 4-101.
To copy the participant properties from a Database Reservation
template:
You can copy a participant from a participant template to a conference.
1. Open the Reservation in Database window, as described in Chapter 3,
“Templates Database” on page 3-33.
2. Expand the Groups tree until you locate the Reservation template
containing the participant that you wish to copy.
3. Expand the Reservation template icon to list its participants.
6-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
4. Right-click the icon of the participant to copy, and then click Copy or
use the appropriate shortcut key (the default key is <Ctrl>+<C>).
The participant details are copied to the clipboard.
Alternatively, to copy the participant under a new name:
a. Click Copy As.
The Participant - Properties dialog box opens.
b. Change the participant’s name, and then click OK.
The participant’s details will be copied to the clipboard under the
new name.
5. In the On Going Conferences list, right-click the conference icon to
which you wish to copy the participant, and then click Paste.
The participant’s details will be copied to the new conference under the
same name.
Alternatively, to copy the participant’s details to the new conference
under a new name:
a. Click Paste Participant As
The Participant - Properties dialog box opens.
b. Type the name that you wish to save the participant as, or modify
any of the participant’s properties, such as the User Defined fields.
c. Click OK.
The participant’s details will be copied to the On Going Conference,
under the new name.
6-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
To copy the participant Properties from a Database Participant
template:
1. Open the Participants in Database window as described in Chapter 3,
“Templates Database” on page 3-33.
2. Expand the Groups tree until you locate the participant you want to copy.
3. Right-click the icon of the participant to copy, and then click Copy or
use the appropriate shortcut key (the default key is <Ctrl>+<C>).
The participant is copied to the clipboard.
Alternatively, to copy the participant under a new name:
a. Click Copy As.
The Participant - Properties dialog box opens.
b. Type a new name for the participant, or modify any of the
participant’s properties, such as the User Defined fields.
c. Click OK.
The participant is copied to the clipboard under the new name.
4. In the On Going Conferences list, right-click the conference icon to
which to copy the participant and then click Paste Participant.
6-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The participant’s details will be copied to the new conference under the
same name.
Alternatively, to copy the participant’s details to the new conference
under a new name:
a. Click Paste Participant As
The Participant - Properties dialog box opens.
b. Type the participant name, or modify any of the participant’s
properties, such as the User Defined fields.
c. Click OK.
The participant’s details will be copied to the new conference under
the new name, or with the modified properties.
To move the participant’s details using the drag and drop method:
1. In the MGC Manager, expand the On Going Conferences or Reservations
list until you locate the source conference from which to copy the
participant.
—
In the Reservations database, expand the Groups tree until you
locate the source conference from which to copy the participant.
—
In the Participants database, expand the Groups tree until you locate
the participant to copy.
2. In the MGC Manager, expand the On Going Conferences list until you
locate the destination conference to which to copy the participant.
3. Click the icon of the participant that you want to copy and then drag the
participant icon to the icon of the destination conference.
The participant is copied to the new location.
6-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
Muting Dial-In Participants Upon Connection
You can set a conference to automatically mute all dial-in participants that
were not defined prior to or during the On Going Conference. This feature,
referred to as the Mute “Meet Me” Parties feature, can be enabled during
conference scheduling or during the On Going Conference.
This option is applicable to undefined participants connecting to a Meeting Room,
Meet Me per Conference or Entry Queue Access conference.
This feature does not apply to standard pre-defined dial-in participants.
During an On Going Conference this feature can be enabled or cancelled in
one of the following methods:
•
•
•
From the conference right-click menu
From the Conference Properties dialog box
From the chairperson DTMF input device (remote control/telephone),
pressing the appropriate DTMF code (default code for enabling this
feature is *86 and for cancelling it #86)
To enable Mute ‘Meet Me’ Parties from the Conference right-click
menu:
1. Expand the On Going Conferences list.
2. Right-click the icon of the conference whose dial-in participants
connecting to the conference are to be muted, and then click
Mute ‘Meet Me’ Parties.
6-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
From this point on, all incoming parties are automatically muted by the
MCU and the appropriate icon is displayed in the Audio column.
Participants remain muted until you manually unmute them.
To cancel Mute ‘Meet Me’ Parties from the Conference right-click menu:
When the Mute “Meet Me” Parties option is cancelled, undefined
participants who dial in, are not muted. However, the participants who were
previously muted by the MCU using this feature, are not automatically
unmuted when this option is cancelled.
1. Expand the On Going Conferences list.
2. Right-click the icon of the conference for which you want to cancel the
Mute “Meet Me” Parties operation, and then click Unmute ‘Meet Me’
Parties.
To enable Mute ‘Meet Me’ Parties from the Conference Properties dialog
box:
1. In the Monitor pane, Status pane or Browser pane, right-click the
conference icon, and then click Properties.
2. Click the Settings tab.
The Conference Properties - Settings dialog box opens.
6-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
If only a few fields are displayed in the General Settings box, click the
Advanced >> button to display all fields.
3. Select the Mute ‘Meet Me’ parties check box.
4. Click OK.
From this point on, all incoming parties are automatically muted by the
MCU and the appropriate icon is displayed in the Audio column.
Participants remain muted until you manually unmute them.
To cancel Mute ‘Meet Me’ Parties from the Conference Properties dialog
box:
1. In the Monitor pane, Status pane or Browser pane, right-click the
conference icon, and then click Properties.
The Conference Properties dialog box opens.
2. Click the Settings tab.
The Conference Properties - Settings dialog box opens.
3. Clear the Mute ‘Meet Me’ parties check box and then click OK.
Muting Audio for a Conference
The MGC Manager enables you to mute several participants at the same time,
using the Conference Properties – Video Sources dialog box. This option is
advantageous when you need to mute many participants during a conference.
In this dialog box, the system lists all the participants currently connected to
the conference. You can manually select the participants to be muted by
selecting the check boxes. Alternatively, you can mute all the participants that
are not video forced (selected for display in one of the Video Layout window
by selecting the Check not Forced Parties button. For example, in a lecture
conference, the lecturer can be forced in one window, while all the remaining
participants (that are not video forced) are muted.a
6-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
To mute audio at the conference level:
4. In the Browser pane, Monitor pane or the Status pane, right-click the On
Going Conference icon, and then click Properties.
The Conference Properties dialog box opens.
5. Click the Video Sources tab.
The Conference Properties - Video Sources dialog box opens.
6-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
The Audio Muted Participant box lists all the participants currently
connected to the conference. A clear check box indicates that the
participant's audio channel is in the normal mode (unmuted), while a
checked box indicates that the participant's audio channel is muted.
6. Select the check boxes of the participants to be muted.
Alternatively, to mute all the participants except those who are video
forced (that is, those who are displayed in one of the video layout
windows) click the Select Unforced Participants button. All the
participants that are not video forced are checked. You can now unmute
and mute an individual participant in the Audio Muted Participants box.
7. Click OK.
The participants’ audio icon
in the Audio column in the Monitor
and Status panes now indicates that the audio channel was muted by the
operator.
Locking/Unlocking a Conference
The operator or chairperson can lock or unlock an On Going Conference to
dial-in participants. In addition, you can lock a conference during setup
(whether you are defining a new conference in the Reservation template or in
the Conference Properties dialog box) and, if required, unlock it while it is
ongoing. The purpose of conference locking is to:
•
•
Limit the number of dial-in participants connecting to the conference
Prevent additional participants from connecting to the conference once
all the required participants are connected
•
Save resources
You can lock and unlock the conference from the right-click menu, from the
toolbar or from the Conference - Properties dialog box.
Alternatively, the chairpersons can lock or unlock a conference from their
endpoint using the appropriate DTMF code (the default code to lock a
conference is *7, and the default code to unlock a conference is #7).
To lock a conference from the Conference right-click menu:
1. Expand the On Going Conferences list.
6-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
2. Right-click the icon of the conference to lock, and then click Lock
Conference.
The Locked Conference icon
indicates the new status of this
conference in the Status column in the Monitor and the Status panes.
6-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
To lock a conference from the Conference Properties dialog box:
1. Expand the On Going Conferences list, right-click the icon of the
conference to lock and then click Properties.
The Conference Properties dialog box opens.
2. Click the Settings tab.
The Conference Properties - Settings dialog box opens.
If only a few fields are displayed in the General Settings box, click the
Advanced >> button to display all fields.
3. Select the Conference Lock check box.
The Locked Conference icon indicates the new status of the conference in
the Status column in the Monitor and Status panes.
6-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
To lock a conference using the Conference toolbar:
1. Expand the On Going Conferences list, and then click the icon of the
conference to lock.
2. Click the Lock Conference button
on the Conference toolbar.
The Locked Conference icon indicates the new status of this conference
in the Status column in the Monitor and Status panes.
The Lock Conference button indicates the current lock status of the conference.
In the example, the conference is unlocked. Placing a cursor on top of the button
displays a tooltip with the operation that will be performed once the button is
clicked.
To unlock a locked conference from the Conference right-click menu:
1. Expand the On Going Conferences list.
2. Right-click the icon of the conference to unlock, and then click Unlock
Conference.
The status of this conference in the Status column in the Monitor and the
Status panes is updated to Unlocked and the conference icon reverts to
regular.
6-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
To unlock a conference using the Conference Properties dialog box:
1. Expand the On Going Conferences list, right-click the icon of the
conference to unlock, and then click Properties.
The Conference Properties dialog box opens.
2. Click the Settings tab.
3. Clear the Conference Lock check box.
The conference status is updated in the Monitor and Status panes.
To unlock a locked conference using the Conference toolbar:
1. Expand the On Going Conferences list, and then click the icon of the
conference to unlock.
2. Click Unlock Conference button
on the conference toolbar.
The regular conference icon indicates the new status of this conference in
the Status column in the Monitor and Status panes.
6-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Changing the Conference and Chairperson Password
During an On Going Conference, the conference and/or chairperson password
can be modified by the chairperson or participant (depending on the
permission configuration) using DTMF codes or by the operator via the MGC
Manager. For DTMF operations, see “Using DTMF Codes During a
Conference” on page 6-95.
To modify the conference or chairperson password:
1. Right-click the On Going Conference icon, and then click Properties.
The Conference Properties dialog box opens.
2. Click the General tab.
The Conference Properties - General dialog box opens.
3. Enter a new conference and/or chairperson password, and click OK.
From this point on, dial-in participants have to enter the new password
otherwise they will not be able to connect to the conference.
6-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
Alternatively, the chairperson can change the Conference and/or
Chairperson password using the appropriate DTMF code. (The default
code to change passwords is *77.)
Changing the Conference Duration
At times, operators may find it necessary to extend the duration of a
conference or terminate a conference before its scheduled completion time.
The conference can be manually or automatically extended or terminated.
For a description of how to automatically extend or terminate a conference,
see the MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume. II, Chapter 1, “Extending the
Conference Duration”.
Extending a Conference Manually
You can manually extend the conference duration even after the conference
has started.
To extend an On Going Conference:
1. In the Browser, Monitor or Status panes, right-click the icon of the
conference whose duration you want to extend, and then click
Properties.
The Conference Properties dialog box opens.
6-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
2. Click the Scheduler tab, and then modify the conference Ending Time.
3. Click OK to apply the settings.
The Conference Properties dialog box closes. The conference’s duration
is adjusted to extend until the Ending Time you defined in the Scheduler.
The time format is derived from the Operating System time format defined in the
Regional Settings.
6-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
Terminating a Conference Manually
You can manually end the conference before its scheduled end time. Usually,
this option is used when all the participants disconnect from the conference,
or if the meeting organizer has requested it.
To terminate a conference manually:
1. In the Browser, Monitor or Status panes, expand the On Going
Conferences list, right-click the icon of the conference to end, and then
click Terminate.
Alternatively, use the shortcut key (The default key is <Del> or click
the Terminate button
on the Conference toolbar.
A dialog box opens prompting you to confirm the action.
2. Click Yes.
The conference is terminated. The conference name and its icon are
removed from the On Going Conferences list.
6-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Enabling the End of Conference Reminder
The End of Conference Reminder icon
appears before the end of the
conference, reminding you to extend the conference if necessary. The icon
remains on display until the conference ends. This icon is displayed at a
pre-defined time before the end of the conference.
The timing of the end of conference reminder is defined in the Conf Alert
function in the Options menu.
To enable the End of Conference reminder:
1. On the Options menu, click Conf Alert.
The Conference End Time Alert dialog box opens.
2. Set the time period (in minutes) before the end of the conference to
display the End of Conference Reminder icon. For example, if you enter
5, the End of Conference Reminder icon will be displayed five minutes
before the end of the conference. Entering 0 disables the appearance of
the icon.
6-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
3. Click OK to apply the settings.
The system will display the End of Conference Reminder icon x minutes
(where x is the number of minutes entered in this dialog box) before the
end of the conference.
Changing the Conference Billing Code
During an On Going Conference, the billing code can be modified by the
chairperson or the operator via the MGC Manager.
To modify the Billing code:
1. Right-click the On Going Conference icon, and then click Properties.
The Conference Properties dialog box opens.
2. Click the General tab.
The Conference Properties - General dialog box opens.
3. Enter a new Billing code, and click OK.
From this point on, the modified Billing code is applicable to this
conference.
6-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Changing the Conference User Defined Parameters
During an On Going Conference, the User Defined fields can be modified by
the chairperson or the operator via the MGC Manager. The User Defined 1, 2
and 3 fields enable you to enter general information about the conference,
such as the company name, the contact person name, the contact person’s
E-mail or telephone number, or any required information.
The User Defined fields are displayed only if the Show User Defined fields option
in the Conference Properties is selected in the Database Manager User Defined
Defaults. The titles of the User Defined fields can also be modified in the
Database Manager -> Defaults -> User Defined Defaults and then loaded to the
MGC Manager application.
To modify the Conference User Defined fields:
1. Right-click the On Going Conference icon, and then click Properties.
The Conference Properties - General dialog box opens.
2. Modify the information in the User Defined fields, and then click OK.
6-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
Adding Remarks During an On Going Conference
Operators can add remarks during an On Going Conference in the Conference
Properties - General dialog box. Remarks entered previously by the operator
or other operators can be read during the On Going conference. Remarks can
also be added from the Web via the WebCommander application. The
remarks are added to the CDR file, for retrieval during the billing stage.
Remarks are added in the On Going Conference Properties - General dialog
box, in the Remarks field. Previous remarks written for the conference are
displayed in the Remarks History box, in the ascending order (latest entry at
top of the list).
6-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
To enter a remark during an On Going Conference.
1. Expand the On Going Conference list, right-click the On Going
Conference definition you want to update, and click Properties.
The On Going Conference Properties dialog box opens.
2. Click the General tab.
The On Going Conference Properties - General dialog box opens.
3. Enter text (up to 300 characters) in the Remarks box.
4. To add multiple remarks, click Update Remark (which moves the
previous remark to the Remarks History box and writes it to the CDR
file) and then repeat step 3.
5. Click OK.
The dialog box closes and the new remark is written to the CDR file and
moved to the Remarks History box.
6-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
Broadcasting Annex D Still Video Image (Slide)
An endpoint with Annex D capabilities can send an Annex D still video
image (slide) to the MCU to be broadcast to all other participants in a
Transcoding or a Continuous Presence video conference.
When an endpoint sends the Annex D image, the following operations are
performed by the MCU:
•
•
The MCU automatically switches the video layout to Full Screen (1x1)
The MCU video forces the sender to be seen by all participants when an
MCV (Multipoint Command Visualization) signal is sent from the
endpoint
•
The MCU transmits the Annex D image in full 4CIF quality to all the
connected conference participants
An Annex D slide can be transmitted by an endpoint using one of the
following methods:
•
The endpoint first requests the chair token and becomes the chairperson.
Sometimes during the conference, while acting as the chairperson, the
endpoint may send the Annex D still image.
•
The endpoint sends an MCV signal to the MCU requesting the
Chairperson. If the request is accepted by the MCU, the endpoint
becomes the chairperson and transmits the still image. To release the
Chair token and restore the conference to its previous state the Cancel-
MCV command is sent by the endpoint. This procedure conforms to the
H.320 standard.
•
The endpoint sends an Annex D image without an MCV signal, or a
request for the chair token prior to the image transmission. The MCU
recognizes the incoming Annex D image, processes it and broadcasts it
to all other participants. In such a case, only the participants who can
view the sender can see the Annex D still image.
The Annex D image is sent to all endpoints. If an endpoint has two screens,
the still video image is viewed on one screen while the live video will be seen
on the second screen, without being interrupted. If the endpoint has only one
screen, the live video is interrupted for a few seconds to display the still
image. The image is stored in the endpoint’s memory and can be viewed at
the discretion of the individual participants. At the end of the transmission,
the conference video is restored.
6-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The image handling process takes a number of seconds (a long time,
relatively) since a full 4CIF image is created while the VCP video card
receives four instances of the same still image and transmits them. The
estimated processing time for an Annex D image is 2 seconds.
When the request to send the Annex D image is received, the Video MCU can
be in one of the following states:
Table 6-1: Annex D Image Processing and Video MCU State
Video MCU state when receiving
Video MCU behavior
Annex D image
The Annex D sender is video muted.
The chair request /image transmission
is denied.
Some of the other endpoints are video
muted.
The request is accepted. These
participants are able to see the image,
but are not seen by other participants.
The Lecture Mode is ON and the
The chair request /image transmission
sender of the Annex D image is not the is denied.
lecturer.
The Lecture Mode is ON and the
The request is accepted.
sender of the Annex D is the lecturer.
The Video Force feature is enabled,
The request for Annex D overrides the
and a participant other than the sender forced video therefore the Annex D
is selected in the full screen (1x1).
processing continues.
The operator selects (forces) an
endpoint other than the sender, in the
full screen window at the conference
level.
The chair request /image transmission
is denied. (According to H.320
recommendation.)
The following operations can be performed during the transmission of Annex
D images:
•
Speaker changes, in order to return to the proper image upon the
completion of the Annex D transmission
•
•
Video mute requests from participants
Add/delete participants by the operator
6-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
The following requests or commands will be ignored during an Annex D
broadcast:
•
Video forcing by the operator, at the conference level and at the
participant level
•
Video forcing by the chairperson, at the conference level and at the
participant level
•
•
•
•
•
Video forcing by an endpoint at the conference level
Request to mute any endpoint (including the slide sender)
Request to start or end the Lecture mode
Changing the Lecture mode parameters
Changing the Video Layout parameters
To run this feature, video cards of version 1.4x and higher, are recommended.
Sending an Annex D image using video cards of version 1.2x and below (1 MB
cards), will cause the VCP of the slide sender to stop encoding the video while
receiving the slide. During this time, the image of the sender freezes at the remote
sites.
Table 6-2 lists the transmission standards supported by Annex D.
Table 6-2: Annex D Format Support
Standard/
Conference
Type
H.320/H.261 H.320/H.263
H.323/H.261
H.323/H.263
Video
Switching
Supported
Supported
N/A
Supported
Supported
N/A
Supported
Supported
Supported
Supported
Continuous
Presence
Software
Not supported Not supported
Continuous
Presence
6-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Printing Conference Data
Once a reservation is made, the system allocates the appropriate resources to
the conference. You can print this data, for example the conference name, ID,
start time, duration, line rate, or the participant parameters - to a printer, file or
clipboard (to be used by other applications).
The printed data of reservations can be sent to the conference participants in
advance, letting them know the actual conference settings and the dial-in
numbers they will use when connecting to the conference.
The printed data can be used to keep record of all On Going Conferences and
planned activities for the MCU or operators.
You can print data for a single On Going Conference or Reservation, or for all
the On Going Conferences or Reservations.
Before printing conference information to a printer, make sure that a default
printer is defined in your workstation.
To print details of a single conference:
1. Expand the On Going Conferences list or the Reservations list.
2. Print conference details using one of the following options:
—
In the Reservations list, right-click the reservation whose data you
want to print, and then click Print Reservation.
6-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
—
In the On Going Conferences list, right-click the conference whose
data you want to print, and then click Print Reservation Data.
The Print dialog box opens.
3. In the Name Of Operator field, enter the name of the operator who
initiated the report.
4. In the Report To box, select the report destination:
—
—
—
File - to print the conference data to a text file
Printer - to print the conference data to a printer
Clipboard - to copy the conference data to the clipboard for use by
other applications
6-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
5. Click OK.
—
If File is selected, the Save As dialog box opens.
Select the destination folder. The system assigns the conference
name as the default file name. However, you can define another file
name. Click Save.
—
—
If Printer is selected, the Print dialog box opens. Select the required
printer and then click OK. The conference data is printed using the
printer's current settings.
If Clipboard is selected, the conference data is copied to the
clipboard, from where it can be pasted in other text processing
applications.
6-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
The following is a sample of Reservation or Conference information. The
first section lists the Reservation general parameters and the second section
lists the Participants parameters.
Operator Data
-------------
OperatorName - Duke
Reservation Data
----------------
Reservation Name - Polycom
Id - 1122
Conf. Entry Password -
Web/Chairperson Password -
Start Time - Feb 10, 2004 07:07:00 PM
Duration - 02:00:00
Line Rate - 2B
Restrict - No
Audio Alg - Auto
Video Protocol - Auto
Video Format - Auto
Frame Rate - Auto
T120 Rate - None
Attended - None
AV Message Name -
Operator Conference - No
Talk Hold Time - 1.5
Audio Mix Depth - 3
Video Layout - Single Frame
Lecture mode - Off
VideoSession - Video Switching
Cascade Mode -
Participants - Lynne
-----
Connection Type - Dial Out
Interface Type - H323
Service Name - 323
IP - 172.22.132.183
Signaling port - 1720
Alias name -
Alias Type - H323 Id
Channel Width - 64 kbps
Number of Channels - 2
Bonding Mode - Auto
Chair - No
Voice - Data
Node Type - Terminal
Restrict Only - No
Duke IP
-------
Connection Type - Dial Out
Interface Type - H323
Service Name - 323
IP - 172.22.133.39
Signaling port - 1720
Alias name -
Alias Type - H323 Id
6-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Channel Width - 64 kbps
Number of Channels - 2
Bonding Mode - Auto
Chair - No
Voice - Data
Node Type - Terminal
Restrict Only - No
To print details of all On Going Conferences or Reservations:
1. Print details using one of the following options:
—
In the Reservations list, right-click the Reservation icon, and then
click Print All.
—
On Going Conferences list, right-click the On Going Conferences
icon, and then click Print All.
The Print All dialog box opens listing the On Going Conferences or
Reservations currently handled by the MCU whose data can be
printed.
2. To exclude conferences from the printing session, clear the check box
next to the name of the conference or reservation.
6-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
3. Click OK.
The Print dialog box opens.
4. Enter your name as the report initiator, select the report destination, and
then click OK.
If File is selected as the printing destination, the data of all the conferences are
printed to the same text file.
—
If File is selected, the Save As dialog box opens.
Select the destination folder. Specify the file name and then click
Save.
—
—
If Printer is selected, the Print dialog box opens. Select the required
printer and then click OK. The conference data is printed using the
printer's current settings.
If Clipboard is selected, the conference data is copied to the
clipboard, from where it can be pasted in other text processing
applications.
6-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Managing Question-and-Answer Sessions
The Question-and-Answer (Q&A) session provides a method of organizing
the participants questions or comments during a lecture or a large conference.
Usually during a large conference or lecture, all participants excluding the
lecturer or the main speaker, are muted by the system. A participant who
wants to ask a question or comment on the subject being discussed, presses
the appropriate code on the DTMF input device (the default code is *22) to
enter the Q&A queue. The participants are placed in the Q&A queue in the
order in which they have requested to ask a question.
You can also place participants in the Q&A queue from the MGC Manager
application using the Q&A Toolbar.
Once in the Q&A queue, you can select the participant to ask the question or
let the next participant in line ask the question. If the participant is muted by
the MCU (in the Exclusive Speaker mode), you have to unmute the
participant before you let him or her ask the question.
You can stop the questioner any time during the question or you can end the
current Q&A session using the appropriate code on the DTMF input device or
by selecting the appropriate function in the MGC Manager application.
You can change the position of the participants in the queue, moving a
selected participant’s position up or down the queue or to the first or last
position in the queue.
•
•
A Q&A session requires the use of a DTMF input device.
The Q&A session managing options are applicable only to conferences with
an assigned IVR Service (running on an Audio+ card).
Controlling Q&A Queues with the Toolbar
You can easily manage the Q&A queues using the dedicated toolbar. Enable
this toolbar by clicking a participant icon in an On Going Conference or by
clicking the icon of a participant waiting in the Q&A queue.
The Q&A toolbar is detailed in Table 3-8 on page 3-19.
6-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
Adding Questioners to Q&A Queues
Participants can be added as questioners to the Q&A queue using one of the
following options:
•
Questioners are added to the Q&A queue once they press the appropriate
DTMF code on their DTMF input device (default DTMF code is *22).
An appropriate audio message is played to confirm the participant
addition to the Q&A queue.
•
Questioners can also be added the queue manually from the MGC
Manager application. In the Browser, Status or Monitor panes, right-click
the icon of the participant to add to the queue, click Q&A Management,
and then click Add Participant to Q&A.
The participant icon changes, to indicate that the participant was added to the
Q&A queue.
6-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
In addition, the Monitor pane displays information on the participant’s
position in the Q&A queue and how long the participant has been waiting in
the queue to ask the question.
The Q&A Position column shows the order of the participants who have
requested to ask a question in the Q&A queue.
The Q&A Waiting Time column displays the length of time the participant has
been waiting in the Q&A queue.
In the above figure, the Q&A columns were moved to the left. By default, these
columns are located on the right of the Monitor and Status panes and you need
to use the scrolling arrows to display them.
Changing a Participant’s Position in the Q&A Queue
You can change the position of any participant in the Q&A queue when you
want certain participants (such as participants designated as VIP) to ask
questions first, and others to be moved to the end of the queue.
To change the participant’s position in the Q&A queue:
•
Select the participant to move by clicking the Participant icon, and then,
on the Q&A toolbar, click:
—
—
Move Participant to First Position in Q&A
button
button
or
Move Participant to Last Position in Q&A
6-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
•
Alternatively, change the position of a participant in the Q&A queue by
right-clicking the Participant icon, clicking Q&A Management, and
then clicking the position to which the participant should move.
Using the right-click menu, you can move the participant to the
following positions in the Q&A queue:
—
—
—
—
First position
Last position
Up one position
Down one position
Allowing Participant Questions
Participants in the Q&A queue can ask a question after the permission is
granted to them by the conference chairperson or the operator.
•
The chairperson enters the appropriate code on the DTMF input device
to let the first participant in the queue ask the question. The default code
for this action is *23. An audio confirmation is played.
•
The operator lets the first participant in the queue ask a question using
one of the following methods:
—
Click the Next Questioner button
on the Question-and-Answer
toolbar.
6-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
—
Right-click the Conference icon, then click Next Questioner.
•
On occasion, the operator can disregard the participants position in the
queue and allow them to ask the question. To do this, the operator uses
one of the following methods.
—
Click the Participant icon
and then click the Ask Question
button
on the Question-and-Answer toolbar.
—
Right-click the Participant icon
, click Q&A Management,
and then click Ask Question.
6-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
The selected participant’s icon now indicates the change of status to current
questioner:
Ending Participant Questions
Ending the questioner session can be done by participants or by the
chairperson.
•
The participant can indicate that they have completed asking the question
and are waiting for the answer. To do this, the participant enters the
appropriate code on the DTMF input device. The default code for this
action is #22.
•
•
The chairperson can stop the current questioner by pressing the
appropriate DTMF code on the DTMF input device. The default DTMF
code for this action is #23.
The operator can end the questioner session by right-clicking the Current
Questioner icon, clicking Q&A Management, and then clicking Stop
questioner session.
6-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
•
The operator can end the questioner session by clicking the Current
Questioner icon and then clicking the Stop Questioner icon
on the
Q&A toolbar.
The selected participant’s icon reverts to the passive/normal status.
Removing Participants from the Q&A Queue
You can remove a participant from the Q&A queue at any time during the
Q&A session. In such a case, the session will continue as before but the
participant will not be able to ask questions in this session. You can remove a
participant in one of the following ways:
•
Right-click the participant’s icon, click Q&A Management, and then
click Remove Participant from Q&A.
•
Select the participant’s icon, and then click the Remove Participant from
Q&A button
on the Q&A toolbar.
The participant’s Q&A icon is replaced by the standard participant icon
(according to the participant’s role).
Clearing Q&A Queues
The chairperson and the operator can clear the Q&A queue at any given time
during the Q&A session (remove the participants currently waiting to ask
questions, from the queue) using the following methods:
•
The chairperson can enter the appropriate code on the DTMF input
device. The default code for this action is #24.
•
The operator can click the Clear Q&A button
on the Q&A toolbar.
The Q&A queue is emptied and all participant Q&A icons are replaced by
standard participant icons (according to their role).
6-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
Managing Voting Sessions
In a voting session, participants express their preference on a set of choices
using the touch-tone keypad or remote control during an On Going
Conference. The system uses digits to correlate participant votes to the items
for which they are voting.
A voting session can include up to 10 choices for one subject. Each choice is
assigned a digit (between 0 to 9) and a descriptive title. For example, in an
employees meeting, the employees have to vote for one of the benefit plans
suggested by the management. Each plan is assigned a digit (for example, if
there are 5 plans, the choices can be 0 to 4) and a short description.
A voting session consists of three main stages:
•
•
•
Preparation stage - Before the voting session begins, the operator or the
chairperson creates the list of choices and their descriptions. The
operator or the chairperson then informs the conference participants of
the choices available for selection and the digit assigned to each option.
Voting stage - When voting, each participant enters the digit that
represents the participant’s choice, using the DTMF input device. As
each vote is counted, the information is presented on-line in the Voting
window.
Results stage - When the voting is completed, the final results can be
saved to a file.
Voting sessions are available in IVR enabled conferences (that are run on
Audio+ cards) and require the use of a DTMF input device.
Conducting a Voting Session
The operator or the chairperson manages the voting session.
6-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
To manage a voting session conference:
1. In the Browser, Status or Monitor panes, right-click the conference icon,
and then click Voting.
The Voting dialog box opens.
Voting
settings
Voting
results
Command buttons
6-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
The Voting dialog box is divided into three main sections:
—
—
—
The Voting Settings pane - where you define the voting session
parameters such as the voting subject and choices, and whether the
voting is anonymous.
The Voting Results pane - where the system displays the voting
results, updating them as the voting session progresses. You can
select the viewing mode of the voting results.
Command buttons - where you click a button according to the
operation to be performed.
2. In the Voting Settings pane, define the voting session parameters as
follows:
Table 6-3: Voting Parameters
Field/Option
Description
Title
Type in the Voting subject. This title is also used as the
file name when saving the results to a file.
Choices
The digits 0 to 9 on the left (which cannot be modified)
represent the digit that should be pressed on the
telephone keypad or the remote control.
Enter a descriptive text for each of the choices to be
selected during the voting session. For example, for
digit 0 enter the first choice, for digit1 enter the second
choice, etc.
Note: This text will appear in the voting results and is
saved in the text file together with the voting results.
Anonymous
Vote
Select this check box to conduct an anonymous voting
session.
Start Time
Displays the voting session start time.
3. Present the voting choices to the conference participants.
Once the voting choices are clear to all, you can start the voting itself.
4. Click Start Voting.
Alternatively, the chairperson can start the voting session from the touch-
tone telephone or remote control (once the voting session parameters are
6-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
defined by the Operator or via the Web browser) by entering the
appropriate DTMF code (the default code is *81).
Each participant casts their vote using the DTMF input device, by
entering the code that was assigned to their preferred choice.
You can cancel the voting anytime during the voting session by clicking the
Cancel Voting button or by entering #82 on the DTMF input device.
The results are shown in the Voting Results pane.
votes
choices
Table 6-4 describes the voting results options.
Table 6-4: Voting Results Display Options
Field/Option
Description
Number of
participants
Displays the number of participants currently
connected to the conference.
Number of voters
Displays the number of participants who have
already voted. This number is updated continuously
according to the number of voters.
6-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
Table 6-4: Voting Results Display Options (Continued)
Field/Option Description
Show results as
percentage with
reference to:
Select this check box to display the number of votes
for each choice as percentage. If checked, select
the category from which to calculate the percentage:
•
Voters Only - Displays the percentage of
participants who voted for each choice, out of
the total number of voters.
•
All Participants - Displays the percentage of
participants who voted for each of choice, out of
the total number of connected participants.
Show results as
number of votes
Select this option to display the absolute number of
votes cast for each choice.
Details Results
Click this button to display a summary of the voting
results.
Note: Detailed results can be viewed only when the
Stop Voting button has been clicked to complete
the voting stage.
5. Click the Stop Voting button to conclude the voting session.
Alternatively, end the voting session by entering the appropriate code on
the DTMF input device. The default code for this action is #81. At this
point you can display the voting results on-screen and choose to save
them to a file.
6. Click the Details Results button to display the full information about the
results of the voting session.
6-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The Voting Details window opens. For each option, the system displays
the total number of votes.
Number of votes per choice
Names of participants who voted for
this choice
—
—
If the vote was not anonymous, you can view the names of the
participants who have voted for each of the listed choices. To
display names, click the [+] icon next to the choice name.
If the vote was anonymous, the system displays only the number of
votes for each choice.
7. Click OK to close the Voting Details window.
8. In the Voting window, click the Save Results button to save the results to
a text file.
The Save As dialog box opens. The File Name field displays the default
name, derived from the voting session’s title. You can modify this file
name. The file can be saved only in the text or ASCII format (*.txt).
6-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
9. Using the standard Windows conventions, select the destination folder
for the file, and then click Save.
10. At this point you can perform one of the following operations in the
Voting window:
a. Click OK to exit the voting session.
b. Click Restart Voting to restart the voting on the same subject if the
first voting session was interrupted or there is a need to recount the
votes.
c. Click New Vote to create a voting session for a new subject/item.
To view the voting results file:
•
Using any word processor, open the text file.
The following is a sample of a voting results text file.
6-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Using DTMF Codes During a Conference
During an On Going Conference participants can perform various operations
using touch-tone signals (DTMF codes).
•
•
Service is assigned to the conference.
The definition of operations that can be performed by all conference
participants or just by the chairperson is done in the IVR Service - DTMF
Codes assigned to the conference.
•
The DTMF codes and the permission to use them can be modified for
individual IVR Services.
Table 6-5 lists the operations that can be performed by all participants or the
chairperson during an On Going Conference.
Table 6-5: Operations performed during a conference using DTMF codes
DTMF
Code
DTMF Function
Permission
Request private assistance
*0
Everyone
To r e q u e s t p r i v a t e a s s i s t a n c e , p r e s s : s t a r, z e r o .
Request assistance for conference
To request operator's assistance for the conference,
press: zero, zero.
Chairperson
00
Mute my line
To mute your line, press: star, six.
Unmute my line
*6
Everyone
Everyone
#6
To unmute your line, press: pound, six.
Lock conference
To lock the conference to dial-in participants, press:
star, seven, zero.
Unlock conference
To unlock the conference, press: pound, seven, zero.
*70
Chairperson
Chairperson
#70
6-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
Table 6-5: Operations performed during a conference using DTMF codes
DTMF
Code
DTMF Function
Permission
Secure conference
*71
Chairperson
To switch the conference to secure mode, press: star,
seven, one.
Unsecure conference
#71
Chairperson
To cancel the secure mode, press: pound, seven,
one.
Increase my broadcasting volume
To increase your volume, press: star, nine.
*9
Everyone
Everyone
Decrease my broadcasting volume
#9
To decrease your volume, press: pound, nine.
Mute All except me
To mute all participants except yourself, press: star,
five.
*5
Chairperson
Chairperson
Cancel Mute All except me
To cancel mute settings of all participants except
yourself, press: pound, five.
#5
Change password
*77
Chairperson
To change the chairperson or conference password,
press: star, seven, seven.
Place conference on hold
To place the conference on hold, press: star, one.
*1
Chairperson
Chairperson
Reinstate on hold conference
#1
To reinstate a conference on hold, press: pound, one.
Mute dial-in participant
To mute dial-in participants, press: star, eight, six.
*86
Chairperson
Chairperson
Cancel Mute dial-in participant
To cancel the muting of dial-in participants, press:
pound, eight, six.
#86
Start voting session
To start a voting session, press: star, eight, one.
*81
Chairperson
Chairperson
Stop voting session
#81
To end a voting session and get the results, press:
pound, eight, one.
6-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 6-5: Operations performed during a conference using DTMF codes
DTMF
Code
DTMF Function
Permission
New voting session
To start a new voting session, press: star, eight, two.
*82
Chairperson
Chairperson
Cancel voting session
#82
To cancel the voting session, press: pound, eight,
two.
Ask a question
To ask a question, press: star, twenty two.
*22
Everyone
Everyone
Cancel my question
#22
To cancel a question, press: pound, twenty two.
Next in line question
To let the next questioner ask a question, press: star,
two three.
End current question
*23
Chairperson
Chairperson
#23
To terminate the current question, press: pound, two
three.
Cancel all questions
To cancel all questions, press: star, two, four.
*24
*4
Chairperson
Chairperson
Chairperson
Dial out to invitee
To dial out to invitee, press: star, four.
Admit invitee and continue dial-out
To admit an invitee and continue dial-out press: star,
one.
*1
(submenu)
Disconnect invitee and continue dial-out
To disconnect an invitee and continue dial-out, press:
star, two.
*2
Chairperson
(submenu)
Admit invitee and return to the conference
To admit an invitee and return to the conference,
press: star, three.
Disconnect invitee & return to conference
To disconnect an invitee & return to conference press:
star, four.
*3
Chairperson
Chairperson
(submenu)
*4
(submenu)
6-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
Table 6-5: Operations performed during a conference using DTMF codes
DTMF
Code
DTMF Function
Permission
Play Menu
*83
Everyone
To play the DTMF help menu, press: star, eight, three.
(To enable this feature the relevant file must be
assigned to the function in the IVR Message Service.)
Enable Roll Call
To enable Roll Call, press: star, three, two.
Disable Roll Call
*32
Chairperson
Chairperson
# 32
To disable Roll Call, press: pound, three, two.
Roll Call - review names
*33
Chairperson
Chairperson
To initiate the roll call and playback of the participant
names, press: star, three, three.
Roll Call - stop review names
To end playback of participant names, press: pound,
three, three.
#33
Start Dial Out
To start the dial-out, press: star, two, five.
*25
*87
**
Chairperson
Chairperson
Everyone
Conference Termination
To end the conference, press: star, eight, seven.
Start Click&View
To start the Click&View application, press: star, star.
Change to Chairperson
*78
Everyone
To change the status of a participant to Chairperson,
press: star, seven, eight.
Increase my listening volume
To increase your volume, press: star, seven, six.
Decrease my listening volume
*76
Everyone
Everyone
#76
To decrease your volume, press: pound, seven, six.
6-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 6-5: Operations performed during a conference using DTMF codes
DTMF
Code
DTMF Function
Permission
Override Mute All But Me*
Everyone
To enable participants to unmute their endpoints while
the Exclusive Speaker Mute mode is imposed.
* To enable this function, a DTMF code must be
configured.
These operations are listed and defined in the IVR
Service - DTMF Codes dialog box. The same
operations are also available from the MGC Manager
application.
For a description of the IVR Message Service setup,
see Chapter 6, “IVR and Entry Queue Services”.
SilenceIT Menu
9
Everyone
The DTMF code to be used to play the SilenceIT
menu. This code is used by the participant that who is
muted due to a noisy line.
Unmute and Return to Conference
Unmutes and returns the participant to the
conference.
Everyone
Everyone
Everyone
1
2
3
Return to Conference Muted
Returns the muted participant to the conference while
remaining muted.
Adjust SilenceIT Sensitivity and Unmute
Used by the muted participant to return to the
conference unmuted while reducing the noise
detection sensitivity. This option should be used if you
do not want the system to identify a faint noise as a
noisy line.
Everyone
4
Disable SilenceIT and Unmute
Disables the SilenceIT option, unmutes the line of the
participant who is placed on hold by the SilenceIT
mode and returns the participant to the conference.
6-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
Table 6-5: Operations performed during a conference using DTMF codes
DTMF
Code
DTMF Function
Permission
Start Recording
Starts a recording session.
Stop Recording
Stops a recording session.
Pause Recording
*73
*74
*75
Chairperson
Chairperson
Chairperson
Pauses a recording session.
These operations are listed and defined in the IVR Service - DTMF Codes
dialog box. The same operations are also available from the MGC Manager
application.
For a detailed description of IVR enabled conferences, see the MGC Manager
User’s Guide Volume II, Chapter 2, “IVR and Entry Queue Services”.
Changing the Conference or Chairperson Password
During an On Going Conference, the conference password or the chairperson
password can be modified by the chairperson or by a participant (depending
on the user permissions), using DTMF codes.
When the user enters the DTMF code which activates the password
modification process, a voice message instructs the user to select whether to
modify the conference password or the chairperson password.
A sequence of voice messages and chairperson actions follows, to complete
the password modification. Table 6-6 describes this sequence:
Table 6-6: Password Modification DTMF/IVR Sequences
User Action
IVR Message
Chairperson or participant enters the
“change password” DTMF code.
“Press one to change conference
password. Press two to change the
chairperson password. Press nine to
exit the menu.”
Chairperson or participant enters 1.
“Please enter the new conference
password. Press the pound key to
complete.”
6-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 6-6: Password Modification DTMF/IVR Sequences (Continued)
User Action
IVR Message
Chairperson or participant enters 2.
“Please enter the new chairperson
password. Press the pound key when
complete.”
Chairperson or participant enters 9
and exits the menu.
Chairperson or participant enters the
new password. Password
confirmation request.
“Please re-enter the new password.
Press the pound key to complete.”
Chairperson or participant confirms
the password. System confirms
update.
“The password has been successfully
changed.”
While confirming the new password,
chairperson or participant enters the
existing password.
“The new password is invalid.”
If the user exits without confirming the password, the password is not
updated.
Changing passwords is not possible when a conference is in any of the
following modes:
•
•
•
•
Voting session
Invite session
Roll Call session
A participant is waiting in the Entry Queue
In an Entry Queue, both the conference and chairperson password need to be
unique and cannot be identical to any other conferences that are accessed via
the Entry Queue.
Managing Secure Mode Conferences
In the Secure mode, joining the conference, monitoring the conference or
controlling the conference in any way, is denied to outside participants,
including operators. In addition, operators cannot view the participants list or
6-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
any conference properties while the conference is in the Secure mode.
However, operators can terminate the conference even in this mode.
Special icons are used to indicate that a conference is in Secure mode. For a
list of these icons see Table 5-7 on page 5-27.
Chairpersons can enable or disable the Secure mode for an On Going
Conference, using the appropriate DTMF codes on the touch-tone telephone.
While the conference is in a Secure mode, the chairperson and conference
participants can perform various operations using the appropriate DTMF
codes, such as voting or question-and-answer sessions. These operations will
not be displayed in the MGC Manager monitoring panes. Once the
chairperson secures or unsecures the conference, an appropriate voice
message may be played indicating that the conference is secured.
The voice message will be played only if it is configured in the IVR Message
Service and if the appropriate audio file has been downloaded to the Audio card.
When the chairperson secures the conference, the following operations cannot
be performed by operators or outside participants:
•
•
•
•
Join or attend the conference
View and control the participants of the conference
View and monitor the conference properties
Implement Voting
6-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Sessions
On the conference level, you can terminate the gateway session in the same
way as with the standard conference.
On the participant level, you can perform the following operations, in the
same way as with the standard conference:
•
•
•
Mute or unmute the participant audio channel. For details, see page 6-26.
Mute or unmute the participant video channel. For details, see page 6-27.
Delete the participant from the conference (this will cause the
termination of the gateway session).
6-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Operations Performed During On Going Conferences
6-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Meet Me per Conferences and
Meeting Rooms
This chapter discusses Meet Me Conferences and Meeting Rooms. Meet Me
Conferences are conferences that allow undefined dial-in participants to
connect to them by dialing a predefined number.
Meeting Rooms are reserved conferences, based on Meet Me Conferences
without resource allocations. Meeting Room conferences are defined once
but can be activated many times, when required.
When using the Meet Me Per Conference option, there is no need to specify
the capabilities of each endpoint – they are automatically detected and are
assigned the conference parameters. Any participant who dials the
conference number can connect to the conference until all the MCU
resources are utilized or the maximum number of participants per
conference is reached. However, resources may be reserved for a specific
number of undefined participants. In such a case, additional undefined
participants may be allowed to join the conference if there are enough
resources available.
When the participant connects to the conference, all the channels with the
same Calling Line Identifier (CLI) number are identified as pertaining to the
same participant. In BONDING, each incoming call is identified as a new
participant, as one CLI number is used for all channels.
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms
Defining a Meet Me Conference
The Meet Me Per Conference option is enabled in three stages:
•
•
Enabling the Meet Me Per Conference option in the Conference
Properties - General dialog box.
Specifying that undefined participants may connect to the conference in
the Conference Properties - Participants dialog box and defining the
number of participants (if any) for which MCU resources should be
reserved. You can also define the maximum number of participants
allowed in the conference.
•
Defining the conference dial-in number(s) in the Conference Properties -
Meet Me Per Conference dialog box.
To define a new Meet Me Conference:
1. Connect to an MCU and expand its options tree.
2. Right-click the On Going Conferences icon, and then click New
Conference.
The Conference Properties - General dialog box opens.
You can also create a Meet Me Reservation or Reservation template.
Duration, Passwords (if required), and Numeric ID. You may also define
the user defined fields if they are enabled in your system. For more
details, see Chapter 4, “To define the conference General parameters:”
on page 4-37.
The numeric ID (or the conference name) is used as part of the dialing string by
H.323 dial-in participants in the Advanced dial-in mode. For details, see “Dialing
Into the Conference in the H.323 Environment” on page 7-11.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
4. Select the Meet Me Per Conf check box.
Conferences. For details see Table 4-4, “Conference Properties -
General,” on page 4-37.
6. Click the Settings tab.
The Conference Properties - Settings dialog box opens.
7. Define the conference settings parameters as for any Standard video
conference. For more details see Table 4-5, “Conference Properties -
Settings Parameters,” on page 4-45.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms
8. Click the Participants tab.
The Conference Properties - Participants dialog box opens.
9. If required, add defined participants to the conference as for On Going
Conferences. For more details, see Table 4-8, “Conference Properties -
Participants Options,” on page 4-66.
10. Define the following participant parameters:
The number of participants is limited by the maximum number of participants set
in the Max Participants field, or by the maximum number of participants allowed
for the conference (16 or 30 in a large Video Switching conference running on
the standard Audio card) or by the MCU resources being used up.
—
—
Select the Allow Undefined Parties check box to allow participants
to connect to the conference without prior setting of their parameters
(i.e., “undefined” participants).
In the Min Participant box, define the number of participants for
which the system should reserve resources. This option is enabled
when the Allow Undefined Parties option is selected. If you enter
“0”, no resources will be reserved for the conference. However,
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
participants are able to connect to the conference if there are
available resources.
The minimum number of participants the system reserves resources
for takes into account the defined participants. For example, if two
participants are defined and resources for three undefined
participants are needed, enter five (5) as the minimum number of
participants.
—
The Max Participants option allows you to limit the number of
participants that can connect to the conference. By default, this
option is set to Auto to allow as many participants as possible.
In the Max Participants box, enter the maximum number of
participants that can connect to the conference at one time.
During an On Going Conference, you can also limit the number of participants by
locking the conference in the Conference Properties - Settings dialog box or from
the On Going Conference right-click pop-up menu. For more details see
Chapter 6, “Locking/Unlocking a Conference” on page 6-68.
11. If you are defining a Continuous Presence and/or Lecture Mode
conference or, if you want to use visual effects in the conference, click
the Video Sources tab. For more details see Chapter 4, ”Video Sources”
on page 4-71.
Define the Video Layout and other video settings.
12. If required, click the Resource Force tab to select the cards to handle the
conference. This step is required only when the MCU contains standard
Audio and Audio+ cards and standard Video and Video+ cards and you
want to override the automatic selection of resources by the MCU.
For more details see Chapter 4, “Resource Force” on page 4-82.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms
13. Click the Meet Me Per Conf tab.
The Conference Properties - Meet Me Per Conf dialog box opens.
Defining Conference Dial In Numbers
The conference phone numbers may be assigned by the operator or
automatically by the system. When allocated by the system, a single number,
which is derived from the dial-in numbers defined in the ISDN Network
Service, is assigned to the conference. The assigned dial-in number can only
be viewed in the Status or Monitor panes of the Main Window, once the
conference or reservation is saved on the MCU. This number is then given to
all the conference participants to use for connecting to the conference. You
can manually assign a dial-in number to the conference in the Conference
Properties - Meet Me Per Conf dialog box.
If participants in the same conference use different ISDN Network Services,
the conference may be assigned different dial-in numbers for each of the
ISDN Network Services used to connect to the conference. In such a case, use
the manual allocation method.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
If the conference includes T1-CAS audio only participants and the MCU is
configured to allow T1-CAS participants in video conferences, you can
manually allocate the dial-in number for the T1-CAS participants.
T1-CAS participants are only able to dial-in to a conference using a Meet Me
Conference.
The list of dial-in numbers assigned to the conference is displayed in the
Meet-Me Services table. The first column displays the ISDN Network Service
name. The Dial-in Number (1) and Dial-in Number (2) columns display the
first and second dial-in numbers assigned to the conference, for each listed
Network Service.
If no dial-in number is defined, the system automatically assigns the first free
number in the dial-in numbers range defined in the default ISDN Network Service.
Before you manually allocate dial-in number(s) to the conference, check the
ISDN Network Service for the dial in numbers that can be allocated to
conferences.
This procedure is optional and should be used only if you want to allocate a
specific number to the conference. Otherwise, skip this procedure and the
MCU automatically allocates the dial-in number.
To manually allocate a dial-in number to the conference:
1. In the Conference Properties - Meet Me per Conf dialog box, in the Meet
Me Service - ISDN Service pane, click the Plus
button. The Meet Me
Service dialog box opens.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms
2. Define the dial-in numbers to be assigned to the conference as follows:
Table 7-1: Meet Me Service Options
Option
Description
Service Name
Enter the name of the ISDN Network Service or the
T1-CAS Network Service to be used by participants to
connect to the conference exactly as it is defined in the
Network Services list (the system is case sensitive).
Dial-in Number
(1)
Enter the first dial-in number to be assigned to the
conference. This number must be defined in the dial-in
numbers range defined for the selected ISDN Network
Service or the T1-CAS Network Service. For more
details regarding the dial-in numbers range, see the
MGC Administrator’s Guide, Chapter 3.
Note: When connecting ISDN lines via a private PBX
to the MCU, the PBX may truncate the dialed numbers.
In that case, the dial-in numbers defined in the ISDN
Network Service may include only part of the dialed
string. The operator must add the truncated digits to
Dial-in Number
(2)
Enter the second dial-in number to be assigned to the
conference. This number is optional.
3. Click OK. The dial-in numbers are added to the table in the Meet Me
Service - ISDN Service pane.
4. If participants use more than one ISDN Network Service to connect to
the conference, repeat steps 1 to 3 to define dial-in numbers for these
additional ISDN Network Services.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
To manually assign H.323 Service Prefixes to the conference:
H.323 dial-in participants can dial into Meet Me Conferences by simply
dialing the H.323 Prefix (from the IP Network Service) and the conference
Numeric ID or the conference name. For more information, see “Dialing Into
the Conference in the H.323 Environment” on page 7-11.
1. In the Conference Properties - Meet Me per Conf dialog box, in the Meet
Me Service - H.323 Service pane, click the Plus
button. The H.323
Service dialog box opens.
2. Define the dial-in H.323 Service Prefix to be assigned to the conference
as follows:
Table 7-2: H.323 Network Service Options
Option
Description
H.323 Network
Service Name
Enter the name of the IP Network Service to be used
by participants to connect to the Conference exactly as
it is defined in the IP Network Services list (the system
is case sensitive).
H323 Service
Prefix
Enter the H.323 prefix (from the IP Network Service) to
be assigned to the conference. This number must be
defined in the H323 dialog box of the selected IP
Network Service.
3. Click OK. The H.323 Service Prefix is added to the table in the Meet Me
Service - H.323 Service pane.
4. If participants use more than one IP Network Service to connect to the
conference, repeat steps 1 to 3 to define H.323 Service Prefixes for these
additional IP Network Services.
5. In the Conference Properties dialog box, click OK to complete the
conference definition.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms
To delete a service name or dial-in number from the conference:
1. In the Conference Properties - Meet Me per Conf dialog box, select the
ISDN/IP Network Service name or dial-in number to delete.
2. Click the associated Minus
button.
The service name and dial-in numbers are removed from the conference
definition.
Connecting to a Meet Me Conference
Dial-in participants can be defined or undefined before a conference starts.
Dial-out participants can only be defined. If Auto Detect is selected for the
dial-out participant, you may define the participant’s name and phone number
and the system will automatically detect the participant capabilities and
connect him/her accordingly. Dial-in “undefined” participants may connect to
the conference if “Allow Undefined Participants” is selected in the
Participants tab and if there are available resources. The conference may also
include defined dial-in participants. These participants are identified by their
CLI number (ISDN) or Alias (H.323).
When the Auto Rate Detect option is active for a dial-out participant, the system
automatically detects the participant’s line rate, and connects the participant at
the line rate appropriate to the endpoint, up to the maximum line rate defined in
the conference settings. This option is advantageous when all participants are
connected at the same line rate defined for the conference.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Conference1
Dial-in Number 9251222
9
2
5
1
2
2
2
9251222
ISDN
Conference2
Dial-in Number 9251223
Figure 7-1: Direct Dial-in (Meet Me Conference)
Dialing Into the Conference in the H.323 Environment
The IP Network Service for H.323 is registered in the gatekeeper using a
prefix. In a Meet Me Conference, a participant must enter the H.323 Service
Prefix followed by the conference numeric ID or conference name (H.323 ID
format) as the dial-in string. For example, if the H.323 Service prefix is 100
and the conference numeric ID is 1234, the dial-in string that is dialed in by
the participant is 1001234. When a participant dials in, the call arrives at the
gatekeeper. The gatekeeper identifies the IP Network Service and tries to
connect to the first free IP card. If the resource is available, the gatekeeper
forwards the string that was dialed by the endpoint to the MCU. According to
the string that was dialed in (the system ignores the prefix), the system
searches for a Meet Me Per Conf - Allow Undefined Participants conference
with this numeric ID. If such a conference exists, the system connects the
participant to the appropriate conference. If no such conference exists, the call
is rejected.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms
If you are using the conference name to dial in, the gatekeeper ignores the
letters in the dialed string and uses just the digits to identify the Network
Service. The call is forwarded to the MCU with the conference name, which
is used by the MCU to identify the destination conference.
•
•
•
Currently, Polycom PathNavigator, RadVision and VCON gatekeepers are
known to support the Prefix option. Using gatekeepers of other brands may
cause problems when running such a conference.
Sharing of resources between MGC323 modules is unavailable. If five ports
are taken by currently defined participants, it will be impossible to add a sixth
participant who requires two ports for the same conference.
The number of undefined dial-in participants is limited by resource availability
and the maximum number of participants allowed for the conference.
Figure 7-2 illustrates the H.323 dial-in.
Figure 7-2: Meet Me Per Conference H.323 Participants Dial-in
Monitoring Meet Me Conferences
When an undefined participant in a Meet Me Conference dials into the
conference, the system tries to connect the participant using the Bonding or
H.221 protocol. If the connection uses the Bonding protocol, during the
negotiation with the endpoint the number of additional channels to be
connected is communicated, and the connection proceeds as in a standard
Bonding connection.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
If no Bonding is used, the MCU tries to connect the endpoint using the H.221
standard (aggregation). If this fails, the connection with the endpoint is
terminated.
When connecting to the conference, the name of an Undefined participant
appears in the format <conference name_(X)> where X is the participant’s
sequential number. For example, if the conference name is Finance, the name
of the first participant to connect to the conference is “Finance_(000)”.
In the Monitor pane the participant Phone /IP Address column shows the
number or IP address dialed by a participant to connect to the conference. In a
Meet Me Conference Pxxxx is the participant CLI number as identified by the
MCU and Myyyy is the conference/MCU number dialed by a participant to
connect to the conference.
In a dial-out connection, this column shows the participant’s number dialed
by the MCU to connect the participant to the conference.
All the operations that can be performed during a standard conference may be
performed during an On Going Meet Me Conference.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms
Meeting Rooms
A Meeting Room is a reservation set to Meet Me Per Conference.The
conference is saved on the MCU in passive mode, without using any of the
system resources. When the first participant dials into the conference, the
conference is automatically activated. Other participants may join the
conference by dialing in. If dial-out participants are also defined for the
conference, the system automatically dials out to these participants the
moment the conference is activated. The operator or conference initiator may
lock the conference to additional dial-in participants at any time.
The Meeting Room is set by default to Allow Undefined Parties and a 2 hour
duration. It is generally intended as a dial-in conference and can have any of
the available conference attributes. It is recommended to define it as an Auto
Terminate conference. You can select the number of times the Meeting Room
may be activated. The Meeting Room remains in sleep mode (passive) in
The dial-in numbers allocated to the Meeting Room can be automatically
the carrier and defined in the ISDN Network Services. Alternately, they can
be allocated manually in the service section, as described for the Meet Me Per
Conference mode. In the same way, the H.323 Network Service prefix can be
automatically or manually assigned to the Meeting Room. For details see
“Defining Conference Dial In Numbers” on page 7-6.
For details about creating connections to a Meeting Room by means of an
Entry Queue, see “Defining a New Entry Queue” on page 8-7.
An IVR-enabled Meeting Room can be configured to start only when the
chairperson connects to the Meeting Room. In that case, participants
connecting to the Meeting Room conference prior to the chairperson’s
connection are placed on hold, hear background music (when available) and
see the Welcome video slide (in video Meeting Room conferences). If the
chairperson does not connect in a predefined time period the conference is
automatically terminated. The time period (default is 20 minutes) is defined
in the “system.cfg”: Greet and Guide/IVR section by the
LEADER_WAITING_TIME_OUT flag.
The conference is automatically terminated when the last participant quits the
conference (if Auto Termination is selected or in an IVR-enabled conference,
when the chairperson exits the conference), or manually by the operator, or
conference initiator. Once the conference is terminated, the MCU checks the
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
conference recurrence setting. If the conference is still valid for re-activation,
the conference resumes its passive state, waiting for another initiating call.
Otherwise, the conference is deleted from the MCU upon termination of the
conference.
An operator may cancel the conference via the MGC Manager to prevent its
re-activation.
•
•
The Meeting Room is not erased when the MCU is reset.
Meeting Rooms can be defined only if the appropriate Customer Permission
is defined in the “system.cfg” file.
Defining a New Meeting Room
To define a new Meeting Room:
1. Connect to an MCU and expand its tree.
2. Right-click the Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues & SIP Factories icon, and
then click New Meeting Room.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms
The Conference Properties - General dialog box opens.
The Meeting Room option is automatically selected in the Conference
Type box. The Meet Me Per Conference check box is automatically
checked (and cannot be cleared).
The MCU box displays the name of the MCU to which you are
connected, and on which the Meeting Room is saved.
3. Define the Meeting Room Name and Duration.The default Duration is
set to 2 hours but may be modified. The maximum duration that can be
set for a Meeting Room is 99 hours.
4. Define the Billing Code if applicable.
5. Select whether the Meeting Room has Entry Queue Access or not. If you
select this check box, the Meet Me per Conference check box is
enabled. Clear this check box if you do not want to allocate an additional
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
dial-in number (for direct dial-in) to the conference, where access to the
conference is only through the Entry Queue.
If the Meeting Room is accessed via an Entry Queue, its line rate must be the
same as the Entry Queue properties, otherwise participants will not be able to
move from the Entry Queue to the Meeting Room.
6. In an Entry Queue Access conference or an IVR-enabled conference
with password request, enter the Conference Entry Password and the
Chairperson Password (optional). If you leave these fields blank, the
allocates the Numeric ID once the Meeting Room is saved on the MCU.
8. If relevant, enter the information in the User Defined fields.
9. Define the Media type as Audio or Video and Audio.
10. Select the video session type as in a standard video conference. For more
details see Chapter 4, “To define the conference General parameters:” on
page 4-37.
11. Click the Settings tab.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms
The Conference Properties - Settings dialog box opens.
The Meeting Room settings are defined in the same way as a Standard
On Going Conference.
12. Define the correct conference Line Rate. It is recommended to enable the
Auto Termination parameters for this type of conference to make sure
that the conference ends when participants are no longer connected to the
13. If the MCU includes an Audio+ card and you want participants to control
their conference via their endpoints, assign an IVR Service to the
Meeting Room.
When an IVR Service is assigned, the Start Conf. Requires Chairperson
and Terminate After Chairperson Exits options are enabled.
For a detailed description of the Settings parameters, see Chapter 4, “To
define the conference media and additional settings:” on page 4-45.
14. Click the Participants tab to define the participant connection to the
conference.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The Conference Properties - Participants dialog box opens.
The Allow Undefined Parties check box is automatically selected to
allow participants to connect to the conference without the prior setting
of their parameters (i.e., “undefined” participant). In such a case,
participants can connect to the conference until the maximum number of
participants in a conference is exceeded.
15. In the Min Participant box, define the number of participants for which
the system reserves resources once the conference is activated. The
system takes into account the number of defined participants, therefore,
if the conference includes one defined participant and you want to save
resources for four participants, enter five (5) in this box. If you enter 0,
no resources are reserved for the conference. However, participants are
able to connect to the conference if there are available resources. The
number of participants is limited by the maximum number of participants
set in the Max Participants box or by the maximum number of
participants allowed for the conference.
16. In the Max Participants box, enter the maximum number of participants
that can connect to the conference at one time. By default, this option is
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms
17. If required, add pre-defined participants to the Meeting Room. For more
information, see Chapter 4, “Adding Participants to the Conference” on
page 4-56.
18. If you have selected Continuous Presence as the conference Video
Session, click the Video Sources tab to select the appropriate Video
Layout for the conference. For more details, see Chapter 4, “To define
the Video Sources settings:” on page 4-72.
19. Click the Meet Me Per Conf tab.
The Meet Me Per Conf dialog box opens.
This dialog box enables you to define the Meeting Room’s specific
parameters.
20. Select the Limited Sequences check box to limit the number of
activations. If this check box is cleared, the number of activations is
unlimited, and the Meeting Room can be saved on the MCU forever or
until deleted from the MCU.
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
21. In the Number of Occurrences box choose any number of Meeting Room
activations. 0 means that the conference has an unlimited number of
activations and can be in sleep mode (passive) forever.
1 means that the conference will be activated once, and then it will be
deleted from the system. 2 or more means that the conference will be
activated twice or more, and the conference will remain in sleep mode
(passive) in between recurrences.
When Meeting Rooms are accessed through the Entry Queue without the
participants accessing the Meeting Room directly, do not allocate a dial-in
number to the Meeting Room. This saves the dial-in numbers used.
22. If you want to manually assign dial-in numbers to the conference in the
Conference Properties - Meet Me Per Conf dialog box, follow the
detailed instructions beginning with
“Defining Conference Dial In Numbers” on page 7-6.
23. Click OK in the Meeting Room Properties dialog box to complete the
Meeting Room definition.
24. The new Meeting Room is added to the Meeting Rooms list.
•
If you try to define a Meeting Room without the appropriate customer
permission, a system indication is displayed, informing that you do not have
the Virtual Conference Suite installed in your system.
•
•
The number of Meeting Rooms is limited to about 2000.
The Meeting Room will fail to start when the dial in number allocated to the
conference is in use by another reserved conference, or if the MCU has run
out of resources.
7-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms
Managing Meeting Rooms
The Meeting Rooms are listed under the Meeting Rooms icon.
Listing Meeting Rooms
To view existing Meeting Rooms:
1. Connect to the MCU and expand its tree.
2. Click the plus [+] icon next to the Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues & SIP
Factories icon. The system displays the list of Meeting Rooms, Entry
Queues and SIP Factories.
Once the first participant connects to a Meeting Room, it is activated and
is also added to the On Going Conferences list to enable the operator to
monitor its status and its participants.
An Active Meeting Room
7-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Monitoring active Meeting Rooms is similar to monitoring any other Meet Me
Conference. For details, see “Monitoring Meet Me Conferences” on page 7-
12.
Meeting Room Icons
The following icons indicate the different statuses of Meeting Rooms:
Table 7-3: Meeting Room Types and Icons
Icon
Description
Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues & SIP factories. A category
in the MCU tree that lists the Meeting Rooms, Entry
Queues and SIP Factories defined in the system.
Active Meeting Room - Video. A video Meeting Room that
was activated when the first participants or chairperson
connected to it.
(green)
(green)
Active Meeting Room - Audio. An Audio Only Meeting
Room that was activated when the first participants or
chairperson connected to it.
7-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms
Table 7-3: Meeting Room Types and Icons (Continued)
Icon Description
Passive Meeting Room - Video. A video Meeting Room
that is in a passive mode, waiting to be activated. This
Meeting Room uses both Audio and Video media.
(gray)
Passive Meeting Room - Audio. An Audio Only Meeting
Room that is in a passive mode, waiting to be activated.
(gray)
Meeting Room Right-Click Functions
Most of the right-click functions on the Meeting Rooms icon are displayed in
other menu options and are discussed elsewhere in this manual.
The following options are available when right-clicking the Meeting Rooms
icon:
Table 7-4: Meeting Room Right-Click Options
Right-click
Description
Option
New Participant
on page 6-44.
Copy Meeting
Room
Copies the Meeting Room properties to a template,
another MCU or the same MCU under a different name.
Paste Participant
Meeting Room. For details, see Chapter 6, “To copy the
participant properties from an On Going Conference or
Reservation:” on page 6-48.
Paste Participant
As
Pastes participant properties from the clipboard into the
Meeting Room while changing the participant name or
other parameters. For details, see Chapter 6, “To copy the
participant properties from an On Going Conference or
Reservation:” on page 6-48.
Delete
Deletes the Meeting Room from the MCU.
7-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 7-4: Meeting Room Right-Click Options (Continued)
Right-click
Option
Description
Print Meeting
Room
Prints the Meeting Room information to a printer, to a file,
or copies the data to the clipboard. For details, see
Chapter 6, “Printing Conference Data” on page 6-75.
Properties
Modifies the Meeting Room properties. For details, see
Chapter 4, “Defining a New Video Conference” on page 4-
35.
7-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Meet Me per Conferences and Meeting Rooms
7-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Entry Queues, Operator
Conferences, and Attended
Conferencing
Entry Queues and Entry Queue Services
An Entry Queue (EQ) is a special routing lobby to which one or several
dial-in numbers are assigned for both video and audio endpoints, including
PSTN, VoIP, H.320, H.323, SIP and T1-CAS endpoints. Participants with
the same capabilities (audio only or video line rate, video protocol, video
format, etc.) dial the same dial-in number and they are routed to the
appropriate conference according to the conference numeric ID or the
conference password they enter (depending on the MCU configuration).
An Entry Queue Service must be assigned to the Entry Queue to enable the
voice prompts guiding the participants through the connection process. For
video Entry Queues, the Entry Queue Service can include a video slide that
is displayed to the participants while staying in the Entry Queue (during
their connection process).
The Entry Queue remains in a passive state when there are no callers in the
queue (in between connections) and is automatically activated once a caller
dials its dial-in number.
Attended and Unattended Conferences and Entry Queues
Conferences can be attended or unattended. In unattended mode, connection
to the conference is automatic and the whole conference can be run without
operator intervention. In attended mode, the operator connects participants
to the conference, and actively manages the conference. Conferences are set
as attended when assigning an IVR Service set to attended mode.
Entry Queues can also be attended or unattended. For conferences accessed
by an Entry Queue, the attended or unattended mode of the Entry Queue
determines the connection mode of the conference. In an unattended Entry
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Queue, the routing to the destination conference is automatic. In attended
Entry Queues, routing to the destination conference is done by the operator
and requires the presence of an Operator conference.
•
The initial setting of an Entry Queue or conference as unattended or
attended is done in the definition of the Entry Queue Service or IVR Service,
by selecting or clearing the “On-hold for Operator Assistance” option in the
Welcome Message dialog box. When selected, callers have to wait for the
operator’s assistance in order to connect to the conference. If this check box
is cleared, the connection process is automatic. For a detailed description of
the Entry Queue or IVR Service definition, see the MGC Manager User’s
Guide, Volume II, Chapter 2, “IVR and Entry Queue Services”.
•
Unattended conferences can also be created using SIP factories. For more
information see the MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 3, “SIP
Factories”.
When an Entry Queue or conference is unattended, the participants are guided
to the conference using menu-driven scripts that are part of the Entry Queue
Service or IVR Service. DTMF codes entered using the telephone touch-tone
keypad or the endpoint’s DTMF input device, usually a remote control, are
the callers input to voice prompts. The operator is not involved in the
connection process unless the participant fails to enter the destination
conference password or numeric ID (depending on the system configuration)
and the operator assistance option is enabled in the Entry Queue Service or
IVR Service.
With some endpoints (video and IP telephones), the participants can add the
conference numeric ID or conference password to the dial-in number to form
one string in TCS4 or H.323ID format. Using this string the participant can
connect directly to the conference without accessing the Entry Queue first.
Operator Conferences
An Operator conference is a side conference that enables the operator to assist
participants without disturbing the On Going Conferences and without being
heard by other conference participants. The operator can move a participant
from the Entry Queue, conference IVR Queue, Participants Queue, Welcome
Queue (Greet and Guide), or On Going Conference to a private, one-on-one
conversation in the Operator conference. An Operator conference can have up
to two participants only: the operator and a participant. An Operator
conference is required to manage attended conferences.
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Entry Queue Access
When the Entry Queue Access option is designated for an Audio Only or
Video conference, all the participants connecting to that conference are first
connected to an Entry Queue. From the Entry Queue they are routed to their
conference according to the conference numeric ID or conference password
they enter (depending on system configuration), or they wait for operator
assistance. In addition, an IVR Service can be assigned to the conferences
accessed from the Entry Queue.
Using an Entry Queue minimizes the number of dial-in numbers that the
MGC unit must have available to handle conferences and dial-in participants.
In addition, it enables service providers to advertise their services with one or
two telephone numbers that can be used for all the conferences (for example,
1-800-POLYCOM).
The Entry Queue is defined separately in the MGC Manager application, and
for each Audio Only conference or Video conference you select whether it is
accessed via an Entry Queue and/or IVR Service depending on your
configuration.
Video switching conferences that are accessed from an Entry Queue must have
the same video, audio algorithm and line rate properties as defined for the Entry
Queue used for accessing these conferences. If you offer more than one type of
video switching conference, it is recommended that you define more than one
Entry Queue, one for each conference type or set of parameters.
Entering a conference via an Entry Queue involves the following three stages:
•
•
•
Dialing to the Entry Queue
Routing from the Entry Queue to the conference
Entry to the conference
One or several dial-in numbers are allocated to an Entry Queue (for ISDN
participants). H.323 participants use a dial-in string, and SIP participants use
a URI. In addition, a numeric ID is assigned to each conference and a
conference password and chairperson password may be defined. The dial-in
number (which is usually the same for all participants regardless of the
conference they attend), the dial-in string or the URI, and the appropriate
conference numeric ID and/or passwords are communicated to the conference
participants.
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Dialing in to the Entry Queue
The participants dial the Entry Queue dial-in number, dial-in string or URI
that was communicated to them and enter the Entry Queue lobby.
ISDN participants dial the Entry Queue dial-in number.
H.323 participants dial a string of the format:
<H.323 Service Prefix><Entry Queue Numeric ID>
SIP participants dial a URI of the format:
<Entry Queue name>@<domain name>
•
•
When a SIP participant dials from within the same domain, they only need to
enter the Entry Queue name.
For more information about dialing in to Entry Queues when using Microsoft
Office Communicator or Windows Messenger version 5.1, refer to the
Polycom—Microsoft Deployment Guide.
Routing from the Entry Queue to the Conference
Attended participants wait for the operator to connect them to the conference.
Unattended participants can be routed to their destination conference in one
of the following methods:
•
•
Using the conference numeric ID
Using the conference password
The Entry Queue routing method is set by a flag in the system.cfg (for
detailed description of the system.cfg flags, see the MGC Administrator’s
Guide, Chapter 5, “Edit system.cfg”).
A Numeric ID is assigned to all conferences and Meeting Rooms, regardless of
the routing method, for IP participant dial-in and for billing purposes (and added
to the CDR file).
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Conference Numeric ID Routing
When participants connect to the Entry Queue they are requested to enter the
target conference Numeric ID. According to this conference ID, participants
are routed to the appropriate conference.
MCU
Conference1
Numeric ID: 1234
Password: 34567
IP Endpoint
1234
9251222
Network
1234
1300
ISDN/PSTN
Endpoint
Numeric ID: 1222
ISDN/PSTN
Endpoint
IP Network Service
Prefix - 925
Conference2
Numeric ID: 1300
Password: 71356
Figure 8-1: Conference Access Via Entry Queue Using Numeric ID
Password Routing
When participants connect to the Entry Queue they are requested to enter the
target conference password. According to this password, participants are
routed to the appropriate conference.
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Conference1
MCU
Numeric ID: 1234
Password: 34567
Chairperson: 89900
IP Endpoint
9251222
Network
ISDN/PSTN
Endpoint
2
2
2
1
5
2
9
Numeric ID: 1222
ISDN/PSTN
Endpoint
IP Network Service
Prefix - 925
Conference2
Numeric ID: 1300
Password: 71356
Figure 8-2: Conference Access via Entry Queue using the Conference Password
Conference Entry
When no IVR Service is assigned to the conference, or if the assigned IVR
service is not configured to prompt for passwords, participants are moved
directly from the Entry Queue to the conference.
When an IVR Service that is configured to prompt for passwords is assigned
to the conference, participants are guided to the conference by voice prompts.
For Conference Numeric ID routing, the participants are requested to enter
the target conference/chairperson password. They can also be prompted for
additional information such as their billing code. For password routing
participants may be requested to enter the required chairperson password or
wait to be automatically connected to the conference. They can also be
prompted for additional information such as their billing code.
If a participant fails to connect to the target conference, and the Operator’s
Assistance option is enabled in the IVR Service assigned to the conference, the
participant is moved to the Participant’s Queue to wait for operator assistance.
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Defining a New Entry Queue
If the destination conference is set to Video Switching, its audio, video, and
line rate settings must be identical to the Entry Queue settings, otherwise
participants cannot move to the target conference.
•
•
Entry Queues can only be defined in MCUs containing an Audio+ card.
If you have not already done so, define the Entry Queue Message Service in
the MCU - IVR Services before defining the Entry Queue. For more details,
see the MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 2, “IVR and Entry
Queue Services”.
•
•
Entry Queues can be encrypted. For more details, see the MGC Manager
User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 1, “Media Encryption”.
The definition of the Audio Only Entry Queue is described in the MGC
Manager User’s Guide, VoicePlus Edition, Chapter 5.
To define a new Video Entry Queue:
1. Connect to an MCU and expand its tree.
2. Right-click the Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues and SIP Factories icon,
and then click New Entry Queue.
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
The Entry Queue Properties dialog box opens.
3. Define the following parameters:
Table 8-1: Entry Queue Definitions Parameters
Option
Description
Entry Queue Settings
Name Enter the name of the Entry Queue using up to 20
characters.
If the name is already used by another Entry Queue,
Meeting Room, or conference an error message is
displayed when completing the Entry Queue
definition.
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 8-1: Entry Queue Definitions Parameters (Continued)
Option
Description
Numeric ID
A Numeric ID is a unique number assigned to the
Entry Queue identifying it to the system. It is used as
part of the dialing string by IP participants to connect
to the Entry Queue. A Numeric ID can be assigned
either automatically or manually.
To manually assign the Numeric ID, use the number
of digits defined in the appropriate flag in the
“system.cfg” file.
If the Numeric ID is already in use in another Entry
Queue or conference, an error message is
displayed.
If you do not manually assign the Numeric ID, the
MCU assigns one after the completion of the Entry
Queue definition. The assignment is done once,
when the Entry Queue is saved on the MCU.
Note:
If the MCU is configured to support only automatic
assignment of Numeric Conference IDs, this field is
disabled and the system automatically assigns a
Numeric ID after you save the Entry Queue on the
MCU.
Entry Queue
Service
Select the name of the Entry Queue Service for
playing audio prompts and displaying the video slide
to participants waiting in the Entry Queue. Leave this
field blank to use the default Entry Queue Service (if
an Entry Queue Service was set as default).
Note:
•
The same Entry Queue Service can be used for
Audio Only and Video participants
Cascade
Select this check box to define an Auto Cascade
Entry Queue.
Defining an Auto Cascade Entry Queue is part of the
setup process to enable automatic cascading of Ad
Hoc conferences. For details see the MGC Manager
User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 3, “Ad Hoc Auto
Cascading”.
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Table 8-1: Entry Queue Definitions Parameters (Continued)
Option
Description
VTX 1000
Select this check box to create a VTX 1000 enabled
Entry Queue.
Participants connecting to VTX 1000 enabled Entry
Queues are initially assigned wide band resources. If
the endpoint is not identified as VTX, the wide band
resources are subsequently released.
Ad Hoc
Select this check box to enable Ad Hoc
conferencing. When an Ad Hoc conference needs to
be created, the Target Conference properties are
taken from the Profile assigned to the Entry Queue.
For more details, see the MGC Manager User’s
Guide, Volume II, Chapter 3, “Ad Hoc Conferencing
and External Database Authentication”.
Note:
•
Profiles must be defined before enabling the Ad
Hoc conferencing option.
•
The Entry Queue can also be used for standard
conferencing. In that case, participants can be
moved to target conferences with properties
identical to the Target Conference Setting
Properties defined in the Entry Queue.
Profile
Select the Profile to be used for the definition of the
target conference in Ad Hoc conferencing.
The Profiles list includes all the profiles currently
saved on the MCU.
Note: Profiles must be defined before enabling the
Ad Hoc conferencing option.
Target Conferences
Audio Only
Select this check box to create an Audio Only Entry
Queue whose target conferences are Audio Only
conferences. Select this option if your MCU has only
VoicePlus capabilities.
Note: Audio Only participants can also connect via a
video Entry Queue.
8-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 8-1: Entry Queue Definitions Parameters (Continued)
Option
Description
IP Only
Select this check box to create an IP Only Entry
Queue, whose target conferences are IP Only
conferences. The target conferences can be set as
VoIP conferences (Audio Only, IP Only) or Software
Continuous Presence (video). For a detailed
description of SWCP, see the MGC Manager User’s
Guide, Volume II, Chapter 1, “Software Continuous
Presence Settings”.
Encryption
Select this check box to encrypt this Entry Queue.
When enabled, only encrypted participants can join
this Entry Queue, while non-encrypted participants
are disconnected from the MCU. For more details
about encryption and encrypted Entry Queues, see
the MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II,
Chapter 1, “Media Encryption”.
Video Switching
Select this option to set the Entry Queue as a Video
Switching Entry Queue, and save video resources
(as no video ports are used for participant
connections). The participants connect to this Entry
Queue using the line rate and video settings of the
Entry Queue. Therefore, to move from the Entry
Queue to a destination Video Switching conference,
the destination conference line rate and video
settings must be identical to the Entry Queue
settings, otherwise the endpoint will experience
connection failure.
If the participants are moved from a Video Switching
Entry Queue to Transcoding or Continuous Presence
conference, they retain the video settings of the
Entry Queue, hence not using the endpoint’s best
capabilities. To use the endpoint’s highest
capabilities, set a different Video Switching Entry
Queue for each combination of line rate and video
settings used by most endpoints, or define a
Transcoding or Continuous Presence Entry Queue
(using video resources).
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Table 8-1: Entry Queue Definitions Parameters (Continued)
Option
Description
Transcoding/
Continuous
Presence
Select this option to define a Transcoding/
Continuous Presence Entry Queue. When
participants connect to this Entry Queue, they use
the MCU’s video resources.
Participants connecting to this Entry Queue maintain
their highest capabilities when moved to a
Transcoding or Continuous Presence conference.
If the target conference is a Video Switching
conference, the audio, video, and line rates of the
Entry Queue and the target conference must match
or the endpoints will not be able to connect to the
target conference.
Target Conference Settings
Audio Alg.
Select the audio algorithm for the Entry Queue. If
target conferences are Audio Only conferences,
select G.711. If IP Only, you have an additional
option G.723/G.729. If set to Auto the system tries to
connect the participants using the best possible
audio algorithm, selecting it in the following order:
G.728, G.722, G.711.
Video Format
Select the Video Format for the Entry Queue
according to the target conference settings. The
Video Format options are enabled only when
defining a Video Switching Entry Queue and when
the video protocol is H.261 or H.263.
Select Auto to let the system select the appropriate
video format according to the participant properties.
Select one of the video formats to force the
participant to connect using one of these frame
resolutions.
For a detailed description of the Video Format
options, see Chapter 4, “Video Format” on page 4-
61.
8-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 8-1: Entry Queue Definitions Parameters (Continued)
Option
Description
Frame Rate
according to the target conference settings.
This option is enabled only for Video Switching
conferences set to H.261, H.263, or H.264.
Select Auto to let the system select the appropriate
frame rate. Select one of the frame rates to force the
participant to connect using this frame rate. For a
detailed description of the frame rates values, see
Chapter 4, “Frame Rate” on page 4-63.
Video Protocol
Select the video compression protocol of the Entry
Queue according to the target conference settings.
Auto - select this option to let the system
automatically select the appropriate compression
method for connecting the participant to the target
conference.
For a detailed description of the Video Protocol
options, see Chapter 4, ”Video Protocol” on page 4-
60.
Annexes
Annexes are additions to the Video Format when
quality of the video display.
Select the Annexes for the Entry Queue if these
annexes are used in target conferences. Annexes N,
P and F are enabled only when defining a Video
Switching Entry Queue and the Video Protocol is set
to H.263. For more details on Annexes, see
Chapter 4, “Annexes” on page 4-64.
Line Rate
Select the maximum line rate at which the endpoint
will connect to the Entry Queue and the target
conference. For a Video Switching Entry Queue,
select the highest line rate common to all
participants. For Transcoding and Continuous
Presence Entry Queues, set the line rate to the
highest line rate that can be used by the participants
in the conference.
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Table 8-1: Entry Queue Definitions Parameters (Continued)
Option
Description
Line Rate (cont.)
If the target conference is Video Switching, the Entry
Queue line rate must be the line rate that is set for
the target conference to enable the participant to
move from the Entry Queue to the target conference.
Restricted
Select this option to enable participants using
Restricted lines (the Line Rate for each channel is 56
Kbps instead of 64 Kbps) to connect to the Entry
Queue and be moved to a Video Switching
conference set as Restricted lines.
Network Services
Table
The Network Services table displays the list of ISDN/
PSTN dial-in numbers assigned to the Entry Queue.
Dial-in numbers are relevant to ISDN participants only.
IP participants use a dialing string composed of the H.323 Network Service
Prefix and the Entry Queue Numeric ID. H.323 participants can dial in to an
Entry Queue by dialing the IP Network Service Prefix and the Numeric ID of the
Entry Queue using the following format: [(Prefix) (Entry Queue Numeric ID)].
For more information, see “Connecting to the Entry Queue” on page 8-19.
4. Click the Plus
button to assign dial-in numbers to the Entry Queue.
The Meet Me Service dialog box opens.
8-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
5. Define the ISDN dial-in numbers assigned to the Entry Queue.
Table 8-2: Dial-in Numbers Table
Option
Description
Service Name
Type the name of the ISDN Network Service to be used
by participants to connect to the Entry Queue exactly
as it is defined in the ISDN Network Services list (the
system is case sensitive).
Dial-in number
(1)
Enter the first dial-in number to be assigned to the
Entry Queue. This number must be part of the dial-in
numbers range defined for the selected ISDN Network
Service. For more details regarding the dial-in numbers
range, see the MGC Administrator’s Guide, Chapter 3.
Note: When connecting ISDN lines via a private PBX
to the MCU, the PBX may truncate the dial-in number.
The operator must know the digits which are truncated
by the PBX and convey them to the participant.
Dial-in number
(2)
Type the second dial-in number to be assigned to the
Entry Queue. This number is optional.
6. Click OK.
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
The dial-in numbers are added to the Network Services Table.
7. Repeat the steps 4 to 6 to define additional dial-in numbers for the Entry
Queue. Up to 16 numbers may be assigned to the Entry Queue.
To delete a dial-in number from the Entry Queue:
1. Select the service name or dial-in number to delete in the Entry Queue
Properties dialog box.
2. Click the Minus
button.
The service name and phone numbers are deleted.
If no Dial-in numbers are manually assigned by the operator, the MCU
automatically allocates the dial-in numbers from the dial-in numbers range
defined in the default ISDN Network Service.
8-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
3. Click OK to complete the Entry Queue definition.
The new Entry Queue is added to the Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues &
SIP Factories list.
Listing Entry Queues
All Entry Queues are listed in the Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues & SIP
Factories list. To save dial-in numbers, usually a limited number of Entry
Queues are defined per MCU.
To view the list of Entry Queues:
1. In the Browser pane of the main window, expand the MCU tree.
2. Expand the Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues & SIP Factories tree.
A list of Entry Queues, Meeting Rooms and SIP factories is displayed
below the Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues &SIP Factories icon.
The number of Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues and SIP Factories
currently defined for the selected MCU is displayed between parenthesis
next to the Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues &SIP Factories icon. Each
Entry Queue is identified by a name and icon
.
You can also view the list of Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues and SIP
Factories in the Status pane. This enables you to easily retrieve the dial-
in numbers assigned to the Entry Queue and is especially useful when the
dial-in numbers were automatically allocated by the system.
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
3. To view the list of Entry Queues in the Status pane, click the Meeting
Rooms, Entry Queues & SIP Factories icon.
The list of Entry Queues, Meeting Rooms and SIP Factories is displayed
in the Status pane.
The dial-in number allocated to the Entry Queue is listed in the Dial-in
Number column. This is the number that should be used by all ISDN/
PSTN callers connecting to conferences which are accessed from the
Entry Queue. If more than one Entry Queue is defined (for example,
when the audio messages and prompts are played in different languages
or for different video settings), the dial-in number determines which
Entry Queue is used to access the conference.
In addition, the H.323 Service Prefix is displayed, as well as the Entry
Queue numeric ID. Using these two numbers, you can compose the
dialing string for H.323 endpoints. In the example shown here, the Entry
Queue named Engineering is assigned the numeric ID 5555, and the
Service Prefix is 925, hence, the dialing string from H.323 endpoints is
92555555.
Although the list displays a conference password and a chairperson
password, they are not relevant to the Entry Queue, only to the Meeting
Rooms that are displayed in the same list.
8-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Connecting to the Entry Queue
ISDN Participants
If the conference is set as Entry Queue Access, ISDN participants connect to
the conference by dialing the Entry Queue dial-in number.
Entry Queue Access for an ISDN TCS4 participant
An ISDN video participant with TCS4 support can dial in to an Entry Queue
and connect to the destination conference in one action, without the need to
listen to IVR messages or input additional DTMF codes.
•
The Entry Queue dial-in number is entered as the dial-in number for the
connection.
•
To bypass the Entry Queue IVR service, the following dial string is input
as additional information in TCS4 format (in the Extension field):
[Conference Numeric ID]
•
If the conference is assigned a Conference Entry Password or
Chairperson Password, the participant may bypass the Conference IVR
service as well, by adding the password to the dial string, separated by
the pound (#) symbol:
[Conference Numeric ID]#[Entry/Chairperson Password]#
For example, if the Entry Queue dial in number is 925 1000, the
Conference Numeric ID is 5678 and the Conference Entry Password is
4444, the dial-in number will be 9251000 and the TCS4 string will be
5678#4444#.
H.323 Participant
H.323 dial-in participants can dial into Entry Queues by simply dialing the
H.323 Service prefix and the Entry Queue Numeric ID or name. For example,
if the prefix is 100 and the Entry Queue numeric ID is 2356, the participant
dials 1002356. If using the Entry Queue name (Polycom) the dialing string is
100POLYCOM. When a participant dials in, the call is transferred to the
gatekeeper, where, using the prefix, the gatekeeper identifies the MCU. If the
resource is available, the gatekeeper forwards the dialed string (numeric ID or
Entry Queue name) to the MCU. According to this string, the MCU searches
for the appropriate Entry Queue and connects the participant to the Entry
Queue. If no such Entry Queue or conference exists, the call is rejected.
8-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Once the participants connect to the Entry Queue they are routed to their
conference by entering the numeric ID of the target conference.
MCU
H323
module A
1002356
Gatekeeper
Entry Queue
Numeric ID: 2356
Name: POLYCOM
LAN
Network
Service A -
Prefix = 100
H323
module B
Dials: 1002356 or 100POLYCOM
Figure 8-3: H.323 Endpoint Dial-in to Entry Queue
H.323 participants can also bypass the Entry Queue voice messages and the
conference IVR messages by adding the correct Numeric ID of destination
conference and, if necessary, Conference Entry Password to the initial dial
string.
•
To access an Entry Queue, input the Network Service Prefix and
Numeric ID assigned to the Entry Queue in the dial string:
[Network Service Prefix][EQ Numeric ID]
•
To be routed directly to the conference, add the Numeric ID of the
destination conference to the dial string:
[Network Service Prefix][EQ Numeric ID] [##Destination
Conference Numeric ID#]
•
To be routed directly to the conference and bypass the Entry Queue and
the conference IVR queue, add the Conference Entry password, enclosed
by pound signs, to the dial string:
[Network Service Prefix][EQ Numeric ID] [##Destination
Conference Numeric ID#][#Password#]
For example, if the Network Service Prefix is 23, the Conference
Numeric ID of the Entry Queue is 2000, the Conference Numeric ID of
8-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
the destination conference is 6577 and the Conference Entry Password is
4444, the dial string will be: 232000##6577##4444#
SIP Participants
The Entry Queue registers with the SIP proxy. Usually, for SIP conferencing,
an Ad Hoc Entry Queue is used. In this scenario, the first participant dials the
Entry Queue and creates a new conference, while the other conference
participants dial directly to the conference using the conference name or
numeric ID. The SIP participant uses the Entry Queue URI to access the
Entry Queue.
The Entry Queue URI is dialed in the format: Entry Queue name@domain
name. For example, [email protected], when the Entry Queue name is
EQ1.
When dialing from a Microsoft Windows Messenger endpoint (which does
not have DTMF capabilities), the first participant (who creates the new
conference in Ad Hoc conferencing) enters the Entry Queue name followed
by the target conference name and the numeric ID in the format:
EQ name(target conference name)(target conference numeric ID).
For example, EQ1(sales)(12345). In this example, the Entry Queue name is
EQ1, and a new On Going Conference by the name sales with the numeric ID
12345 will be created on the MCU.
You do not need to add the domain name to the conference name as it is
automatically added by Microsoft Windows Messenger when sending the
request to the SIP server.
The other conference participants will enter either sales or 12345 to connect
to the On Going Conference.
8-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Enabling Entry Queue Access for Conferences
On Going Conferences are accessed from an Entry Queue if the Entry Queue
Access option is selected during the conference definition in the Conference
Properties - General dialog box.
To enable an Entry Queue Access conference during the conference
definition:
In the Conference Properties - General dialog box, select the Entry Queue
Access check box.
The routing from the Entry Queue to the conference is done either according
to the conference numeric ID or the conference password, depending on the
system configuration. According to the selected routing method, you must
assign this conference a numeric ID and/or conference password.
8-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
If the routing method is password, define a conference and chairperson
password or leave it blank, and the MGC Manager will allocate a password
automatically.
Even if the routing method is according to conference password, a numeric
ID is assigned to the conference. If you leave the Numeric ID field blank, the
MGC Manager will automatically allocate a Numeric ID. The Numeric ID
length is defined in the “system.cfg”.
If no IVR is assigned to the conference or the assigned IVR Service is not
configured to prompt for conference Entry Password, you do not need to
define one.
The Web or Chairperson Password can be assigned to the conference if the
conference is monitored from the WebCommander application or if an IVR
Service is assigned to the conference and you want to enable the chairperson
functionality.
8-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Using an Existing Entry Queue to Define a Target
Conference
You can define a new On Going Conference, Reservation, or Meeting Room
Conference using an existing Entry Queue, ensuring that the target conference
will have the same properties as the Entry Queue. This results in a smooth
connection between the Entry Queue and target conference.
To define a new On Going Conference, Reservation, or Meeting Room
Conference using an existing Entry Queue:
1. Expand the Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues & SIP Factories tree.
A list of Entry Queues, Meeting Rooms and SIP Factories is displayed
below the Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues & SIP Factories icon.
2. Right-click the Entry Queue icon to be used for creating the new target
conference, then click Create Reservation From Entry Queue.
8-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The Conference Properties - General dialog box opens.
The conference name is derived from the Entry Queue name and the
conference properties are taken from the Entry Queue properties. You
can modify the conference name by entering a new name.
3. In the Numeric ID box enter the conference numeric ID. If left blank, the
system automatically assigns a numeric ID (depending on the
“system.cfg” settings).
4. If required, define the Conference Entry Password and the Chairperson
Password. If left blank the system automatically allocates them (if
configured in the “system.cfg” settings). These passwords are required if
an IVR service is assigned to the conference and is configured to prompt
for them. Otherwise, you can leave these parameters blank.
8-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If required, enter general information in the User Defined fields. For
more details see Chapter 4, ”User Defined 1-3” on page 4-40.
6. Click the Scheduler tab to define the conference start date and time. For
more information, see Chapter 9, “Rescheduling Reservations” on
page 9-11.
The current date and time are shown in the Scheduler dialog box. Do not
change them if you want to start an On Going Conference.
7. Click the Settings tab.
The Conference Properties - Settings dialog box opens.
The dialog box displays the conference properties as defined for the Entry
Queue.
8-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
You can modify the current line rate and video settings if required,
although it is not recommended, as the conference will not be compatible
with the Entry Queue.
Select the IVR Service for the conference. If no IVR Service is selected,
participants access the conference directly from the Entry Queue without
password prompting, and the chairperson functionality is disabled for the
conference.
8. Complete the conference definition and click OK.
8-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Operator Conferences
In attended conferences, participants accessing the Entry Queue or the
conference IVR queue are moved to the Participants Queue where they wait
for the operator to assist them. The operator then moves the participants from
the Participants Queue to the destination conference. During an On Going
Conference the operator can take part in the conference and perform various
session, and place participants on hold.
An active Operator conference is required to assist participants during an
attended conference.
A chairperson using DTMF codes or the WebCommander application can
perform some conference management tasks in an unattended conference
where no operator is required. These functions are described in Chapter 6,
“Operations Performed During On Going Conferences”. However, a
chairperson cannot assist or manage participants.
Operator Functions Requiring an Active Operator Conference
On Going Attended Conferences require an active Operator conference to run
on the same MCU as the attended conference. The attended mode is usually
defined in the Entry Queue Service or the IVR Service as “On-hold for
Operator Assistance”. In attended conferences, the MGC Manager operator is
usually responsible for connecting participants to their destination
conferences, placing participants on hold, and tending to participants in need
management of participants waiting in the queue.
All participants in the Entry Queue, Attended and On Hold stages and those
who have requested or need the operator’s assistance appear in the
Participants Queue. You can view the participants' statuses either by
expanding the Participants Queue tree or by clicking the Participants Queue
Window button. For more information regarding the Participants Queue
window, see “The Participant’s Queue Window” on page 8-39.
The system simultaneously lists the participants of all the On Going
Conferences waiting in the Participants Queue. Only one participant at a time
can be moved to the Operator conference for assistance.
8-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
When participants require or request operator assistance, or while the operator
attends a participant, the participant’s icon changes and it appears with a
special exclamation point in the Name column.
In addition, a special icon is displayed in the Status column of the Monitor
and Status panes, indicating the status of the participant (Wait for Assistance,
Attended, or Hold).
A participant can request help using the appropriate DTMF code from his/her
can request Private assistance (default DTMF code *0) or Conference
assistance (default DTMF code 00).
Participants waiting in the Participants Queue or conference for assistance are
moved to the Operator conference for a one-on-one conversation with the
operator.
For more information regarding the Participant Status icons, see Chapter 5,
“Additional Participant Statuses” on page 5-19.
In attended mode, the MGC Manager operator can perform one of the
following actions:
•
Once the participant connects to the Entry Queue or conference IVR
Queue, he/she enters the Participants Queue, where he/she is moved by
the operator to the Operator conference for assistance.
•
After a short conversation with the operator, the operator can move the
participant to the appropriate conference (Home conference), or place
him/her on hold to wait until other participants in the conference are
assisted.
•
•
The operator can connect participants belonging to the same destination
conference to their conference simultaneously by selecting the
appropriate participants and moving them to the Home conference
(interactively or using the right-click menu).
The operator can move a participant from an On Going Conference to the
Operator conference for a one-on-one conversation.
8-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Defining an On Going Operator Conference
An On Going Operator Conference can be defined directly from the On
Going Conferences right-click pop-up menu. In that case, the Operator
conference name is derived from the operator name currently connected to the
MCU from the same workstation.
To define an Operator Conference:
1. Connect to an MCU and expand its tree.
2. Right-click the On Going Conferences icon, and then click New
Operator Conference.
The Conference Properties – General dialog box opens.
8-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The conference type is set to Operator. The name of the On Going
Operator Conference or Reservation is taken from the Operator’s login
name. This name cannot be modified. No password is required.
Only one Operator Conference can be run for each login name at any time.
3. You can modify the conference duration.
4. In the Media box, select Audio to create an Audio Only Operator
conference. This type of conference is described in the MGC Manager
User’s Guide, VoicePlus Edition. Select Video, Audio to create a video
Operator conference.
The Operator conference is automatically set to Transcoding, supporting all
available network connections. These parameters cannot be modified.
5. Click the Settings tab.
The Conference Properties – Settings dialog box opens.
8-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
In an Operator conference, all fields not relevant to the operator conference such
as, T.120 Rate, Attended, Msg Service Type and Name, Video Format and
Frame Rate are disabled.
level.
The conference encryption setting is part of the conference reservation and
cannot be changed once the conference is running. The participants’ encryption
options, however, may be changed.
7. Define the remaining parameters as described in Chapter 4, “Conference
Settings” on page 4-44.
8. Click the Participants tab.
The Conference Properties - Participants dialog box opens.
In an Operator Conference, only one participant is defined - the operator.
The operator adds the second participant interactively during an On
Going Conference.
8-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
9. Define the operator as a new participant, or if the operator is already
defined in a Participant Template file or in the Participant database, add
the operator to the conference as described in Chapter 4, “To add
participants from the database:” on page 4-69.
10. If required, select the Resource Force tab to define the resources to be
used in the conference as described in “Resource Force” on page 4-82.
By default, the Operator conference is scheduled to run on the Standard
Audio card. To enable the operator to assist participants in an Entry
Queue/IVR Queue or an IVR enabled conference, the operator must run
on the Audio+ card. In that case, select the Advanced card type in the
Conference Properties - Resource Force dialog box.
8-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
11. Click OK. The Operator conference is added to the list of On Going
Conferences.
To save this conference for future use, copy the conference to a Group in the
Reservations database by selecting the Copy Conf. option from the right-click
pop-up menu. For more details, see the MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II,
Chapter 8, “Templates Handling”.
The Operator conference is identified by two icons:
- Video Operator conference.
- Audio Only Operator conference.
The Operator icon
is used to identify the operator participating in an
Operator conference.
8-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Defining an Operator Reservation
You can define an Operator reservation directly. The definition procedure is
similar to the definition of an On Going Operator Conference.
To define a new Operator Reservation:
1. Expand the MCU tree.
2. Right-click on the Reservations icon, and then click New Operator
Reservation.
“Defining an On Going Operator Conference” on page 8-30.
4. Click the Scheduler tab.
The Conference Properties – Scheduler dialog box opens.
5. Define the conference Start Date and Time.
6. Define the remaining parameters as described in “Defining an On Going
Operator Conference” on page 8-30.
8-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Starting an Operator Conference from a Reservation Template
To start an Operator Conference from an Operator Reservation
template:
1. Connect to the MCU.
2. Log in to the Database. For more details about Logging into User tables,
see the MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 7, “Logging
into the User Tables of the Database”.
3. Display the Reservation in the Database window. For more details about
Opening a Reservation in the Database window, see the MGC Manager
User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 7, “Logging into the User Tables of the
Database”.
4. In the Reservations database, click the plus [+] icon next to the Groups
icon to expand the Groups tree, until you locate the Group containing the
Operator Reservation template.
The Operator Reservation template is listed together with the standard
Reservation templates, and is identified by an Audio
or Video
Operator Conference template icon.
5. To list the participant in the Operator Reservation template, click the plus
[+] icon next to the Operator Reservation icon.
8-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
6. Right-click the Operator Reservation icon, and then click Start
Immediately to start an On Going Operator Conference, or click Start to
schedule an Operator Conference reservation to start sometime in the
future.
If you have selected Start, the Conference Properties - Schedule dialog
box opens.
—
Define the conference Start Date and Time and click OK.
The Operator conference is added to either the On Going Conferences or
the Reservations list as relevant. The conference name is automatically
taken from the operator’s login name and not from the Operator
Template name.
8-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Attended Conferencing
When participants connect to an Entry Queue or IVR-enabled conference
they initially hear a welcome message. If the Entry Queue or IVR-enabled
conference is set to attended mode (the Entry Queue service or the IVR
service is configured to “wait for Operator Assistance”), they are then moved
to the Participant’s Queue where they must wait for an operator to attend to
them.
The participants can be in one of the following stages: Greeting (Welcome),
Attended, On Hold, or Conferencing. The operator controls the participant
connection to the conference moving the participant from one stage to
another. The move is performed either interactively using drag-and-drop,
using the right-click pop-up menu, or the using appropriate buttons on the
Participants Queue toolbar. Special icons are used to indicate the participant
status in an attended conference.
Greeting - In the Greeting stage, participants connect to the Entry Queue or
directly to an IVR-enabled conference. They hear a Welcome message, view a
Welcome video slide, and are then moved to the Participants Queue where
they wait for the operator to connect them to the conference.
Attended - In the Attended stage, participants are moved to the Operator
conference, where after a short conversation with the participant, the operator
moves each participant to the appropriate conference (Home conference) or
places them on hold.
On Hold - In the On Hold stage, participants wait in the Participant’s Queue
where they hear background music, view the same Welcome video slide, and
wait for the operator’s assistance. Participants are also placed on hold and
moved to the Participant’s Queue when they enter the wrong conference
Numeric ID (while in the Entry Queue) or the wrong password. This option
must be enabled in the Entry Queue or the IVR Service and an Operator
conference must be running on the MCU.
Conferencing - In the Conferencing stage, the participant is already
connected to the On Going Conference. During the conference, operator
assistance can be requested via DTMF codes, but only if it is already
configured in the IVR Service assigned to the conference. For information
about configuring IVR Services, refer to the MGC Manager User’s Guide,
Volume II, Chapter 2, “IVR and Entry Queue Services”.
8-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The Participant’s Queue Window
The Participants Queue window lists all the participants waiting for the
operator’s assistance. Participants are automatically added to the Participants
Queue in the following circumstances:
•
The IVR/Entry Queue Service is set to attended mode (On Hold for
Operator assistance) and the operator is required to connect the
participant to the conference
•
The participant fails to connect to the conference by entering the wrong
conference Numeric ID or conference password and waits for the
operator’s assistance
•
•
The participant requests Operator’s Assistance during the On Going
Conference
The participant is placed on hold
The Participants Queue provides robust tools for the operator to manage
participants waiting for assistance. The Participants Queue is organized in one
list. Participants waiting in the Participants Queue can be listed in the Status
pane, or in a separate window. This enables you to list the On Going
Conferences in the Status pane while assisting the participants waiting in the
Participants Queue.
The Participants Queue management options are available only if an Operator
conference is active and running on the MCU.
The main working tool is the Attended Participant dialog box that opens
when a participant is being attended by the operator. This dialog box enables
the operator to enter the participant name, general information, indicate the
participant status (VIP yes/no), change the listening or broadcasting volume
and move the participant to the destination conference (Home conference).
The Attended Participant dialog box also provides tools to easily filter the list
of On Going Conferences for the appropriate destination conference, create a
new On Going Conference, start an existing Meeting Room, and place a
participant on hold. When moving the participant to the destination
conference, the next participant waiting in the Participants Queue can be
automatically moved to the Operator conference (to the Attended stage)
speeding up the operator’s work.
8-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Listing Participants in the Participants Queue Window
The Participants Queue list contains all the participants who are currently
waiting for operator assistance and the participant that is currently being
assisted by the operator in the Operator conference.
When starting the MGC Manager for the first time in a new installation or after
upgrading to version 6.0 the Participants Queue window is automatically
displayed (empty). To bring the window on top, from the window menu, select
the Participants Queue window.
To display the Participants Queue window:
•
On the Main toolbar, click the Participants Queue Window icon
.
The Participants Queue window opens.
The following participant parameters are displayed in the Participants
Queue window:
Table 8-3: Participants Queue Parameters
Field/Option
Description
Name
The participant’s name and an icon indicating the
participant status. Possible statuses are On Hold,
Attended, or Wait. For more information about
participant statuses, see Chapter 5, “Additional
Participant Statuses” on page 5-19.
State
The reason the participant is moved to the
Participants Queue, and the connection status.
Queue Access
Time
The date and time the participant entered the
Participants Queue.
8-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 8-3: Participants Queue Parameters (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Destination
Conference
The name of the destination conference, when
known, or the name of the Entry Queue to which the
participant has connected. The conference name is
known when the participant was connected to the
conference and is moved from the conference to the
Participants Queue or the Operator conference. For
example, when the participant has requested
assistance.
Operator
The login name of the operator who is assisting the
participant. This information is useful when there are
several operators logged into the same MCU (from
different computers).
Called Number
VIP
The number the participant has dialed. Usually
identifies the dial-in number assigned to the Entry
Queue or Meeting Room.
Indicates whether the participant status is defined as
VIP.
The Participants Queue window can be moved to any position on screen
and you can configure its size as you can do with the MGC Manager
Main Window and the Templates window.
The new placement of the window at the time you close the MGC Manager
application is saved for the next time you start MGC Manager - it is displayed in
the same location.
8-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Using Participants Queue Filters
You can determine the types of participants to be displayed in the Participants
Queue window by creating filters that set criteria according to which
participants appear/do not appear in the list.
Use this option if you want to view participants connecting to a specific Entry
Queue according to the Entry Queue’s dial-in number, or to list all the
participants of the selected status(es).
Filters may be used in two modes: when you are connected to the database
and locally without logging into the database.
When you are connected to the database, filters created and saved in the past
may be used for the current session.
If you are not connected to the database, you can only create a filter to be used
immediately and locally - without an option to save the filter for future use or
add it to the list of filters.
Two types of filters may be defined: personal filters and public filters.
Personal filters are created by all the operators and are for their personal use.
Public filters may only be defined by a database user with permission to
create public filters and who has logged into the database.
For more details about defining permissions to create public filters, see the
MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 6, “Defining Permissions”.
To define Participants Queue filters:
The default Filter is All; all participants waiting in the Participants Queue
appear in the Participants Queue window. You can create a new filter and save
it for future use.
1. Log into the database.
2. In the MGC Manager window, from the Filter toolbar, in the Filter list
select New Filter.
8-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
3. Click the Participants Queue Filter button.
The Participants Queue Filter dialog box opens.
4. Define the filtering options. You can select the status(es) of participants
to be monitored or select to monitor the participants that dialed specified
dial-in numbers.
8-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
You can define the following filtering parameters:
Table 8-4: Participants Queue Filter Parameters
Field/Option
Description
Filter Name
Enter the name of the filter.
If you are modifying the parameters of an existing
filter, enter a new name to modify the filter name.
Participant Status in Participants Queue
Help Request
Select this check box to display participants who
have requested help.
Waiting for
Operator
Assistance
Select this check box to display participants who are
waiting for the Operator Assistance because they
failed to enter the correct conference numeric ID,
Conference or Chairperson password, or because
they need to be connected to the conference as the
Entry Queue Service or IVR Service is set to
attended mode.
On Hold
Select this check box to display participants who
have been placed on hold.
Welcome (no wait)
Welcome (wait)
Attended
Select this check box to display participants who are
in Welcome (no wait) status.
Select this check box to display participants who are
in Welcome (wait) status
Select this check box to display participants who are
currently being attended.
Dial-In Numbers
Dial-In Numbers
Define the dial-in numbers used by participants to
access Entry Queues, Meeting Rooms, or
conferences. Only participants dialing these
numbers are displayed in the Participants Queue
window.
8-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 8-4: Participants Queue Filter Parameters (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Dial-In Numbers
(cont.)
To define the dial-in numbers:
1. Click the plus [+] icon to add a range of dial-in
numbers.
The Add Dial-in Range dialog box
opens.
2. In the First Phone Number box enter the first
dial-in number in the range of numbers to be
used for filtering.
3. In the Last Phone Number box enter the last
dial-in number in the range of numbers to be
used for filtering.
To use one number, enter the same dial-in
number in the First and Last Phone Number
boxes.
4. Click OK.
The dial-in numbers range appears in the
Participants Queue Filter dialog box.
Repeat steps 1-4 to define additional dial-in number
ranges to be filtered.
To remove a range of dial-in numbers, select the
range to remove and click the minus [-] icon.
When no dial-in number ranges are defined in the
filter, dial-in number is not used as a criterion for
displaying a participant in the Participants Queue
window.
8-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Table 8-4: Participants Queue Filter Parameters (Continued)
Field/Option
Actions
Description
Add to Personal
Favorites
This check box is selected by default.
Select this check box to save the filter for future use
and add it to the list of filters that you can use. When
viewing the list of Filters in the Filter list in the MGC
Manager Toolbar, the Filters are labeled Personal:
[Filter Name].
Add to Public
Favorites
This check box appears only if you have the
permission to create/modify Public filters.
Select this check box to save this Filter as a Public
Filter for use by all users. When viewing the list of
Filters in the Filter list in the MGC Manager Toolbar,
Public Filters are labeled
Public: [Filter Name].
5. Click the Preview button to apply the filter to the Participants Queue
before saving it and adding it to the Favorites list.
6. If you are not satisfied with the filtering options, you can modify them
and preview the results before saving the filter.
7. Click OK to save the filter in the Favorites list.
To use filters:
You can filter the list of participants displayed in the Participants Queue
window at any given time by selecting a different filter from the list of saved
filters.
You must be logged into the appropriate databases to use existing, pre-defined
filters. For more information on how to log into the database see Chapter 3,
“Templates Database” on page 3-33.
•
To filter the Participants Queue window, select a filter from the list.
8-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The Participants Queue window displays only the participants that
match the selected filter.
To modify a filter:
You can modify your personal filters or public filters (if you have the
appropriate permission and you are logged into the database).
1. In the Filters list, select the filter to modify, and then click the
Participants Queue Filter button. The Participants Queue Filter dialog
box opens.
2. Select or deselect any of the filter criteria as needed.
3. Click the OK button.
To delete a filter:
You can delete a personal filter or a public filter (if you have the appropriate
permission and you are logged into the database).
1. In the Filters list, select the filter to delete, and then click the Delete
Filter button. A confirmation dialog box opens.
2. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
The filter is removed from the Filters list.
The Attended Participants Dialog Box
In attended conferences, all participants connecting to the Entry Queue or
directly to an IVR enabled conference are automatically placed in the
Participants Queue where they wait for the operator to connect them to the
conference.
To connect the participant to the appropriate conference, the operator has to
move the participant to the Operator conference (Attend state) so he/she can
talk to the participant and find out the name or details of the destination
conference. In addition, the operator usually needs to enter the participant’s
general parameters such as name, E-mail, billing information, and more.
8-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Once the information is entered and the target conference is identified, the
participant is moved to that conference, and the operator moves the next
participant in line to the Operator conference.
An active Operator conference must run on the same MCU as the Participants
Queue to be able to assist Participants waiting in the Participants Queue.
To move a participant to the Operator conference:
•
In the Participants Queue list (in the Browser pane) or in the
Participants Queue window, double-click the icon of the participant you
want to move to the Operator conference.
The participant is automatically moved to the Operator conference and
the Attended Participant window opens.
Attended Participant
parameters
Operator options
Conferences list
Action options
In the Attended Participant area, enter the participant name, and general
information (User Defined fields), change the participant status to VIP
and/or chairperson, and modify the listening and broadcasting volumes.
In the Operator area, you can modify your listening and broadcasting
volumes.
In the Conferences area, you can list all the On Going Conferences,
Meeting Rooms, and Reservations, depending on the selected listing
criteria and search the list for the required destination conference.
8-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Once the destination conference is located, you can move the participant
to that conference or place the participant on hold.
If the Auto Attend Next Participant check box is selected, the next
participant waiting in the Participants Queue is automatically moved to
the Operator conference when the current attended participant is moved
out of the Operator conference (either to the destination conference,
placed on hold, or disconnected).
The following parameters and functions are displayed in the Attended
Participants dialog box:
Table 8-5: Attended Participant Dialog Box Fields
Field/Option
Description
Attended Participant
Participant Name
If the participant is undefined, the system-assigned
participant name is displayed in this field. Type the
name of the participant, using up to 80 characters.
VIP
Select this check box to change the participant
status to VIP.
Chairperson
Select this check box to designate this participant as
the conference Chairperson.
User Defined 1-4
(Title)
In any or all of the four User Defined fields, enter
general information for the participant, such as the
participant’s E-mail address, telephone number,
The titles of the User Defined fields can be modified
in the Database Manager -> Defaults -> User
Defined Defaults and loaded to the MGC Manager
application. For details of defining the titles see the
MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 6,
“Defaults”. For a description on how to load the user
defined default titles, see Chapter 3, “Loading the
User Defined Default Set to the MGC Manager
Application” on page 3-36.
8-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Table 8-5: Attended Participant Dialog Box Fields (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Broadcasting
Volume
If necessary, adjust the level of sound transmitted by
this participant, heard by the operator (and later by
other participants).
To adjust the volume, move the slider. The volume
scale is from 1 to 10, where 1 is the weakest and 10
the strongest volume. The volume of each
endpoint’s audio at connection time is set to 5. One
movement of the volume slider increases or
decreases the volume by one unit, equivalent to
3db.
Listening Volume
If necessary, adjust the level of sound heard by this
participant.
To adjust the volume, move the slider. The volume
scale is from 1 to 10, where 1 is the weakest and 10
the strongest volume. The volume of each
endpoint’s audio at connection time is set to 5. One
movement of the volume slider increases or
decreases the volume by one unit, equivalent to
3db.
Disconnect
Apply
Click this button to disconnect the participant from
the MCU.
If you have modified any of the participant volume
levels (Broadcasting or Listening), click this button to
apply the changes and affect the participant volume.
If any of the other participant properties were
modified, click this button to update the Participant
Properties - Identification parameters.
Operator
Broadcasting
Volume
If necessary, adjust the level of sound transmitted by
the operator to this participant.
Listening Volume
If necessary, adjust the level of sound heard by the
operator.
Join
To join a conference, select the conference in the
Conferences list and then click this button.
8-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 8-5: Attended Participant Dialog Box Fields (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
End Join
Click this button to end the Join operation.
Click this button to mute the operator audio.
Mute/Unmute
Audio
Conferences
Search Value
Enter the first letters of a conference name or the
information in one of the User Defined fields to
determine the conferences to be listed according to
the selected Search In criteria.
Search In
Select the list that is to be used to search for the
destination conference according to the Search
Value.
•
Ongoing meetings - the system searches for
the destination conference in the list of On Going
Conferences running on the connected MCU.
•
Ongoing meetings + 12h reservations - the
system searches for the destination conference
in the list of On Going Conferences and
Reservations scheduled to start in the next 12
hours on the connected MCU.
•
•
Ongoing + MRs - the system searches for the
destination conference in the list of On Going
Conferences and Meeting Rooms on the
connected MCU.
All: Ongoing Meetings + 12h + MRs - the
system searches for the destination conference
in the list of On Going Conferences, Meeting
Rooms and Reservations scheduled to start in
the next 12 hours on the connected MCU.
Conferences List
This table displays the result of the search according
to the Search Value and Search In criteria.
To move the participant to the destination
conference, select the conference from the list and
then click the Move button (or use the displayed
shortcut key).
8-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Table 8-5: Attended Participant Dialog Box Fields (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Conferences List
(cont.)
Note: if the participant’s destination conference is
known, for example when the participant has
requested help, the destination (Home) conference
is automatically listed. Click the To Home Conf
button to move the participant back to his/her
original conference.
New Conference
Click this button to create a new On Going
Conference and move this participant to it.
The Conference Properties - General dialog box
opens, letting you define the conference
parameters.
Start Meeting
Room
You can move a participant to a Meeting Room only
if the Meeting Room is active. However, the first
participant connecting to the Meeting Room cannot
be moved from the attended Participants Queue to
the Meeting Room unless it is first manually
activated.
To manually activate a Meeting Room:
1. In the Search In list, select an option to list
Meeting Rooms.
2. In the Conferences list, select the Meeting Room
to activate and then click the Start Meeting
Room button.
Actions
Auto Attend Next
Participant
Select this check box to automatically attend to the
next participant in line. When the current attended
participant is moved to his/her destination or Home
conference, the system automatically moves the
next participant in line to the Operator conference.
The sequential order of participants in the queue is
determined by the Next By selection.
8-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 8-5: Attended Participant Dialog Box Fields (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Next By
Determines the sort order of the Participants Queue.
When the Auto Attend Next Participant is selected,
this field determines who is the next participant in
line that should be automatically moved to the
Operator conference.
The list may be sorted according to the following
criteria:
•
Time - The amount of time participants have
been waiting in the Participants Queue. This is
the default sorting criteria. When a participant is
placed on hold, his/her time counter is reset.
•
•
Name - The Participants Queue list is sorted by
the participant name
VIP + Time - Participants identified as VIP are
listed first (and the VIP list is sorted by time). The
remaining (Standard) participants are sorted
according to the amount of time they have been
waiting in the queue.
•
•
Requested Help + Time - Participants who have
requested the operator’s assistance are listed
first (and the list is sorted by time). The
remaining (Standard) participants are sorted
according to the amount of time they have been
waiting in the queue.
VIP + Requested Help + Time - Participants
identified as VIP are listed first (and the VIP list is
sorted by time). Participants that have requested
the operator’s assistance are listed next. The
remaining (Standard) participants are sorted
according to the amount of time they have been
waiting in the queue.
8-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Table 8-5: Attended Participant Dialog Box Fields (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Include On Hold
Participants
Select this check box to include participants placed
on hold in the list of participants to which the Auto
Attend Next Participant option applies. When
selected, the participants placed on hold will be
attended according to the selected sort order (Next
By), as all other participants waiting in the queue.
When cleared, participants placed on hold will not be
automatically moved to the Operator conference for
assistance and you have to manually select them in
the Participants Queue.
To Home Conf. /F3 Click this button to move the participant to his/her
original conference, when the conference is known
(without selecting the conference name).
The participant’s destination conference is known in
advance when participant is defined prior to
conference start, or when the participant was moved
from the conference to the Participants Queue for
assistance.
Hold /F4
Click this button to place the participant on hold.
When placed on hold, the participant hears
background music and an icon indicating that the
participant is on hold is displayed in the Status
column of the Monitor and Status panes. In addition,
the participant icon in the Participants Queue
window changes to On Hold.
Note: When placing a participant on hold, the
waiting time in the queue is reset to zero.
Move /F5
Next /F6
Click this button to move the participant to the
selected conference in the Conferences list.
This button is disabled when the Auto Attend Next
Participant option is selected.
Click this button to attend the next participant listed
in the Participants Queue sorted according to the
Next By criteria.
Close
Click this button to close the dialog box.
8-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
•
•
Initially, the command buttons are displayed with the default shortcut keys. If
you modify the shortcut key configuration, the command button shortcut key
display is updated accordingly.
You cannot close the Attended Participant dialog box when a participant is
being attended (and is currently located in the Operator conference). To
close this window you must first move the participant from the Operator
conference to the destination conference (click the Move button) while
clearing the Auto Attend Next Participant check box.
To connect a participant to his/her destination conference:
•
In the Conferences area of the Attended Participant window, select the
destination conference of the attended participant, and then click the
Move button.
The participant moves to the selected conference.
Alternatively, press the selected shortcut key combination as it appears
on the Move button (the default shortcut key is <F5>).
•
•
If the participant’s conference is not running, you can click New
Conference in the Conferences area to start a new conference for the
participant, then select the conference and click Move.
If the participant’s Meeting Room is not active, select the Meeting Room
from the list and then click Start Meeting Room. Once the Meeting
Room is active click Move.
8-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
•
When you move the attended participant to his/her
Home/destination conference and he/she is also the last participant in the
Participants Queue, the following message appears:
•
If the Participants Queue includes only On Hold participants the
following message is displayed:
Click Yes to attend a participant that was placed on hold. Click No to
leave the participant on hold in the Participants Queue.
8-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
To move a participant to the Home conference:
•
In the Attended Participant window, click the To Home Conf. button.
Alternatively, press the selected shortcut key combination as it appears
on the To Home Conf. button (the default shortcut key is <F3>).
•
When you move the presently attended participant to his/her
Home conference and he/she is the last participant in the Participants
Queue, the following message appears:
•
If the Participants Queue includes only On Hold participants the
following message is displayed:
8-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Click Yes to attend a participant that was placed on hold. Click No to
leave the participant on hold in the Participants Queue.
To place a participant On Hold:
•
In the Attended Participant window, click the Hold button.
Alternatively, press the selected shortcut key combination as it appears
on the Hold button (the default shortcut key is <F4>).
•
When you place the presently attended participant on hold and he/she is
the last participant in the Participants Queue, the following message
appears:
Click Yes to attend a participant that was placed on hold. Click No to
leave the participant on hold in the Participants Queue.
8-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Attended Participants Management
Operators can manage attended participants by performing the following
operations:
•
•
•
Move a participant to an Operator conference (Attend a participant).
Move a participant to the Home (destination) conference.
Place a participant on Hold.
Attended participant operations can be performed in many ways. The
participants can be selected from different places, and the operations can be
performed using different tools.
The participants can be selected from the following places:
•
Browser, Status, and Monitor pane, On Going Conference list
8-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
•
Browser and Status pane, Participants Queue list
•
Participants Queue window
The operations can be performed using the following methods:
•
•
•
•
Using the participant right-click menu
Using the Participants Queue toolbar
Using shortcut keys
Using drag and drop (only applicable to moving a participant to the
Operator or Home conference)
•
Double-clicking the participant’s icon (only applicable to moving a
participant to the Operator conference)
8-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Performing Operations using the Right-Click Menu
Moving a Participant to the Operator Conference
To move a participant to the Operator conference from the On Going
Conferences list:
1. In the Browser, Status, or Monitor panes, display the list of participants
in the On Going Conference.
2. Right-click the icon of the participant to be moved to the Operator
conference, and then click Attend.
The participant is moved to the Operator conference while his/her icon
remains in the conference list and in the Participants Queue list. An
exclamation point appears next to the Participant icon in the Name
column of all panes and in the conference tree.
In addition, the Attended icon
is displayed in the Status column of
the Participants List in the Monitor and Status panes.
8-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
To move a participant to the Operator conference from the Participants
Queue tree or Participants Queue window:
1. Display the list of participants in the Participants Queue in the Browser
or Status pane, or in the Participants Queue window.
2. Right-click the icon of the participant to be moved to the Operator
conference, and then click Attend or Attend with Details.
If you click Attend, the participant is moved to the Operator conference
and still appears in the Participants Queue.
If you click Attend with Details, the participant is moved to the
Operator conference and still appears in the Participants Queue. In
addition, the Attended Participant window opens. For more details, see
“The Attended Participants Dialog Box” on page 8-47.
The participant is moved to the Operator conference while his/her icon
remains in the conference list and in the Participants Queue list. An
exclamation point appears next to the Participant icon in the Name
column of all panes and in the conference tree.
In addition, the Attended icon
is displayed in the Status column of
the Participants Queue in the Monitor and Status panes.
Moving a Participant to the Home Conference
To move a participant to his/her Home conference from the Ongoing
Conference list or the Operator conference list:
1. In the Browser, Status, or Monitor panes, display the list of participants
in the conference.
2. Use one of the following options:
a. Using the Move Participant option in the right-click menu:
—
Right-click the icon of the participant to be moved to the Home
conference, and then click Move Participant.
8-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
A list of conferences appears.
—
Click the name of the Home conference to which to move the
participant.
b. Using the To Home Conference option in the right-click menu:
Right-click the icon of the participant to be moved to the Home
conference, and then click To Home Conf.
The participant connects to the Home conference and is removed from
the Participants Queue and/or the Operator conference. The Attended or
Hold icon in the Status column of the Monitor and Status panes
disappears.
8-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
To move a participant to his/her Home conference from the Participants
Queue tree or the Participants Queue window:
1. Display the list of participants in the Participants Queue in the Browser
or Status pane, or in the Participants Queue window.
2. Move the participant to the Home conference using one of the following
options:
a. Using the Move option in the right-click menu:
—
Right-click the icon of the participant to be moved to the Home
conference, and then click Move.
A list of conferences appears.
—
Click the name of the Home conference to which to move the
participant.
b. Using the To Home Conference option in the right-click menu:
Right-click the icon of the participant to be moved to the Home
conference, and then click To Home Conf.
The participant connects to the Home conference and is removed from
the Participants Queue and/or the Operator conference. The Attended or
Hold icon in the Status column of the Monitor and Status panes
disappears.
8-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Placing a Participant On Hold
A participant can be placed on hold while in the Participants Queue or when
participating in an Operator conference.
Usually, the participant waiting in the Entry Queue or Participants Queue is
first assisted by the operator and is then placed on hold until all the
participants pertaining to the same conference are assisted and placed on hold.
Once all the participants are on hold, they can all be connected at the same
time (in one operation) to the conference.
In addition, a participant in an On Going Conference can be placed on hold
when he/she is to be excluded from the conference for a short period. To do
so, you have to first move the participant from the conference to the Operator
conference and then place him/her on hold.
To place a participant on Hold in the Operator conference:
1. In the Browser, Status, or Monitor pane, display the list of participants in
the Operator conference.
2. Right-click the icon of the participant to be placed on hold, and then
click Hold.
The Participant icon changes to Hold in the Status column of the Home
conference participants list in the Monitor and Status panes, and in the
Participants Queue.
8-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
To place a participant on hold in the Participants Queue tree or the
Participants Queue window:
1. Display the list of participants in the Participants Queue in the Browser
or Status pane, or in the Participants Queue window.
2. Right-click the icon of the participant to be placed on hold, and then
click Hold.
The Participant icon changes to Hold in the Status column of the Home
conference participants list in the Monitor and Status panes, and in the
Participants Queue.
Performing Operations using the Participants Queue Toolbar
You can perform operations using the Participants Queue toolbar from the
following panes and lists:
•
•
•
Browser, Status, and Monitor panes, On Going Conferences list
Browser and Status panes, Participants Queue list
Participants Queue window
To move a participant or place him/her on hold using the Participants
Queue toolbar:
1. Select the icon of the participant to be operated on.
2. Click the relevant button in the Participants Queue toolbar, as follows:
Table 8-6: Participants Queue Toolbar Buttons
Button Operation
To move the participant to the Operator conference.
8-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 8-6: Participants Queue Toolbar Buttons (Continued)
Button Operation
To move the participant to the Home (destination) conference.
For further details on the individual operations refer to the explanations in the
section “Performing Operations using the Right-Click Menu” on page 8-61.
Performing Operations using Shortcut Keys
You can perform operations using shortcut keys from the following panes and
lists:
•
•
•
Browser, Status, and Monitor panes, On Going Conferences list
Browser and Status panes, Participants Queue list
Participants Queue window
To move a participant or place him/her on hold using shortcut keys:
1. Select the icon of the participant to be operated on.
2. Use the appropriate shortcut key, as follows:
Table 8-7: Shortcut Keys
Default
Shortcut
Key
Operation
<F2>
<F3>
<F4>
To move the participant to the Operator conference.
To place the attended participant on Hold.
To move the participant to the Home (destination)
conference.
For further details on the individual operations refer to the explanations in the
section “Performing Operations using the Right-Click Menu” on page 8-61.
8-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
Moving a Participant Interactively
You can drag and drop a participant to the Operator or Home conference from
the following panes and lists:
•
•
•
Browser, Status, and Monitor pane, Operator conference list
Browser and Status pane, Participants Queue list
Participants Queue window
To drag and drop a participant to the Operator conference:
1. Expand the On Going Conferences list in the Browser pane, to display
the Operator Conference icon.
2. Drag the icon of the participant to the Browser pane and drop it on the
Operator Conference icon.
To drag and drop a participant to the Home conference:
1. Expand the On Going Conferences list in the Browser pane, to display
the Home Conference icon.
2. Drag the icon of the participant to the Browser pane and drop it on the
Home Conference icon.
Moving a Participant to the Operator Conference by Double-
Clicking the Participant’s Icon
You can move a participant to the Operator conference by double-clicking the
participant’s icon in the following panes and lists:
•
•
Browser and Status pane, Participants Queue list
Participants Queue window
To move a participant to the Operator conference by double-clicking the
participant’s icon:
•
Double-click the icon of the participant you want to attend.
The participant is automatically moved to the Operator conference, and
the Attended Participant window opens. For more details, see “The
Attended Participants Dialog Box” on page 8-47.
8-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Moving Multiple Participants to the Home Conference
When several participants are placed on hold, they can all be selected (using
standard Windows multi-selection options), and then moved to the
appropriate conference together.
To move several participants who are on hold to the Home conference:
1. List the participants who are on hold in the appropriate conference or in
the Participants Queue tree, or the Participants Queue window.
2. Select the participants that are on hold.
3. Move the selected participants to their destination conferences, using one
of the following methods:
a. Using the To Home Conference option in the right-click menu:
—
Right-click the icon of one of the highlighted participants, and
then click To Home Conf.
b. Using the Move option in the right-click menu:
—
Right-click the icon of one of the highlighted participants, and
then click Move.
—
—
A list of conferences appears.
Click the name of the conference to which to move the
participants.
c. Using the Participants Queue toolbar:
—
—
Click the icon of one of the highlighted participants.
Click the To Home Conf.
button on the Participants
Queue toolbar.
d. Dragging and Dropping the Participant icon:
—
Expand the On Going Conferences list in the Browser pane, to
display the Home Conference icon.
—
Drag the icons of the participants to the Browser pane and drop
them on the Home Conference icon.
The selected participants are immediately connected to the conference.
8-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Entry Queues, Operator Conferences, and Attended Conferencing
8-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Conference Reservations
A Reservation is a conference scheduled to start later. Reservations enable
you select the conference start date and time or define a recurrent
reservation.
Scheduling a conference reservation involves defining the conference
parameters, assigning the conference to an MCU, setting the date and time at
which the conference is to start and the duration of the conference. How you
schedule a conference reservation depends on a number of factors, as shown
in Table 9-1.
The MGC Manager allows you to set up and run conferences in mixed
networks: H.323, SIP, ISDN, T1-CAS, ATM, and MPI (serial connection). The
type of network used is defined individually for each participant in the
conference.
Table 9-1: Factors in Deciding Conference Reservation Methods
For these conditions
Do this
The conference
parameters are stored
in a Reservation
template
Start the conference from a template. You can start
the conference immediately (On Going Conference)
or start it at a later time (Reservation).
9-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 - Conference Reservations
Table 9-1: Factors in Deciding Conference Reservation Methods (Continued)
For these conditions
Do this
There is no
Reservation template
containing a
conference with the
properties needed for
this conference
If the conference is to start immediately, you can
details,see Chapter 4, “Defining On Going
Conferences”. Alternatively, define a conference
Reservation in which the current date and time are
selected as the conference start date and time. For
more details, see “Defining a New Reservation” on
page 9-3.
Define a new Reservation directly. For more details,
see “Defining a New Reservation” on page 9-3.
Define a new Reservation template either in the
Database or in a Reservation Template file and use
this reservation template to start a new On Going
Conference or schedule a reservation. For
instructions on setting up a Reservation template in
the database, see the MGC Manager User’s Guide,
Volume II, Chapter 7, “Defining a Reservation
Template in the Database”. For instructions on
setting up a Reservation template in a Reservation
Template file, see the MGC Manager User’s Guide,
Volume II, Chapter 8, “Creating a new Reservation
Template file”.
9-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Defining a New Reservation
To schedule a new Reservation directly:
1. Connect to an MCU and expand its tree. For details, see Chapter 3,
“Connecting to an MCU” on page 3-21.
2. Right-click the Reservations icon, and then click New Reservation.
9-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 - Conference Reservations
The Reservation Properties - General dialog box opens, allowing you to
define the general parameters of the Reservation.
3. In the Name box enter the Reservation name.
Define the Reservation type, duration and other general parameters as for
an On Going Conference. For more details, see Table 4-4, “Conference
Properties - General”, on page 4-37.
9-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
4. Click the Scheduler tab.
The Reservation Properties - Scheduler dialog box opens.
The Scheduler dialog box is used to define the reservation’s date and
time.
5. Define the Scheduler parameters as follows:
Table 9-2: Scheduler Parameters
Option
Description
Starting Date
By default, the system displays the current date as
the scheduled date. If the current date and time is
selected for the Reservation it becomes an On
Going Conference. To select a date on which the
conference should start, use the arrows in the
calendar heading to select the month, and then click
the required day.
9-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 - Conference Reservations
Table 9-2: Scheduler Parameters (Continued)
Option
Description
Starting Time
By default, the system displays the current time as
time using the time format taken from the operating
system. Highlight the hours or minutes in the box
and either use the spin buttons to modify the
displayed time, or type a time directly.
Reservation
Recurrence
Click this button to define a recurrent reservation
For more details, see “Recurrent Reservations” on
page 9-17.
6. Click the Settings tab.
The Reservation Properties - Settings dialog box opens.
7. Define the Settings parameters, as for the On Going Conference. For
details, see Chapter 4, “Conference Settings” on page 4-44.
8. Click the Participants tab.
The Reservation Properties - Participants dialog box opens.
9. Select the conference participants from the list, or define new
“Participants” on page 4-65.
10. If you are defining a Continuous Presence reservation, click the Video
Source tab. Otherwise, skip this step.
The Reservation Properties - Video Sources dialog box opens.
applicable to conferences run on the Video+ card), as described in
Chapter 4, “Video Sources” on page 4-71.
12. Optional. To force the system to use a specific audio, video, or data card
of the selected MCU, click the Resource Force tab.
The Reservation Properties - Resource Force dialog box opens.
13. Select the appropriate card type to handle the conference. For more
information, see Chapter 4, “Resource Force” on page 4-82.
9-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The MGC Manager provides a digital recording option with the Polycom
Conference Recorder, enabling recording of the conference audio
channel of both Audio Only and video conferences. For more
information, see the MGC Manager User’s Guide, VoicePlus Edition,
Chapter 8, “Recording”.
Completing the Reservation Definition
14. To complete the Reservation definition procedure, click OK from any
Reservation Properties dialog box.
When adding a new participant to a Reservation, the system checks whether a
participant with the same name is already defined in any of the other
conferences scheduled for the same time. If the participant name already exists
in any other conference scheduled to run at the same time, the Participants
Scheduling Conflicts window opens. For more details see Chapter 4, “Resolving
Scheduling Conflicts” on page 4-86.
The reservation is saved on the MCU, and it is added to the Reservations
list.
9-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 - Conference Reservations
Listing the Current Reservations
To list the reservations currently scheduled on an MCU:
1. Connect to an MCU on which the Reservation was scheduled and expand
its tree.
2. Double-click the Reservations icon, or click the plus [+] icon next to the
Reservations icon. The Reservations list for the selected MCU is
displayed.
Once a Reserved conference starts, it is moved to the On Going Conferences
list.
Reservations Icons
Each reservation in the Reservations list is identified by an icon and its
name. Table 9-3 describes the reservation icons used to identify the
reservation type.
Table 9-3: Conference Reservation Icons
Icon
Description
Conference Reservations category. Includes the list of all
reservations currently scheduled on the MCU.
Video Conference Reservation. A reserved video
conference scheduled to start at a designated time.
9-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 9-3: Conference Reservation Icons (Continued)
Icon Description
Audio Reservation. A reserved Audio Only conference
scheduled to start at a designated time.
Audio Operator Conference Reservation. A reserved
Audio Only Operator conference scheduled to start at a
designated time.
Video Operator Conference Reservation. A reserved
video Operator conference scheduled to start at a
designated time.
9-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 - Conference Reservations
Deleting a Reservation
If the conference reservation is cancelled before it has started, you can
remove it from the Reservations list on the MCU and free the MCU resources
for other conferences.
To delete a Reservation:
1. In the Browser pane, expand the Reservations list.
2. Right-click the Reservation icon to delete, and then click Delete.
A confirmation dialog box opens.
3. Click Yes to delete the reservation or No to cancel the deletion operation.
If you have selected Yes, the reservation is removed from the
Reservations list.
9-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Rescheduling Reservations
In some cases, you may want to reschedule a conference reservation so it will
start earlier, immediately, or later than scheduled.
If the MCU time is changed, for example, to adjust to daylight savings time, the
reservations are automatically updated.
To reschedule a conference reservation:
1. Expand the Reservations list or double-click the Reservations icon.
2. Right-click the Reservation icon, and then click Properties.
The Conference Properties dialog box opens.
3. Click the Scheduler tab to define the conference start date and time.
9-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 - Conference Reservations
The Scheduler dialog box opens.
4. Select the required date and start time.
To start the conference immediately, change the date to the current date
and the starting time to the current time.
5. Click OK.
The Conference Properties dialog box closes.
If the conference start Date and Time is scheduled in the future, the
conference remains in the Reservations list.
If the reservation is scheduled to start immediately, the conference is
launched, and it is moved from the Reservations list to the On Going
Conferences list.
9-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Scheduling a Conference Reservation from a
Reservation Template (Database)
You can use Reservation templates to schedule a conference Reservation to
automatically start at a predefined date and time.
To schedule a conference Reservation using a Database Reservation
template:
1. Connect to the MCU on which to run the reservation. If you are already
connected and logged in, continue with step 4 on page 9-14, otherwise
connect to the database as described in steps 2 through 3.
2. Click Login on the Database menu.
The Database Login dialog box opens.
For a detailed description of the database login process and default login names,
see Chapter 3, “Templates Database” on page 3-33.
9-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 - Conference Reservations
3. Enter your Login Name and Password and click OK.
4. On the Database menu, click Open D.B. Reservation Template and
then select the database storing the Reservation Template.
The Reservations in Database window is displayed.
5. Expand the Groups hierarchy until you locate the desired Reservation
template.
9-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
6. Right click the Reservation template icon that you want to schedule and
then click Start.
The Conference Properties - General dialog box opens, allowing you to
modify the conference general parameters.
7. Select the MCU on which to run the conference.
If only one MCU is connected to the MGC Manager, the MCU is displayed in the
MCU box. If several MCUs are connected, they are listed alphabetically, and the
first MCU on the list is displayed in the MCU box.
9-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 - Conference Reservations
If required, modify the conference name, duration and passwords. You
can also add Remarks to the conference or read the notes added to the
Reservation Template when created. For more details, see Table 4-4,
“Conference Properties - General”, on page 4-37.
8. Click the Scheduler tab to define the conference start date and time.
The Scheduler dialog box opens.
Conference, skip this tab.
To schedule the conference to start later, select the start date and time for
the conference start. For more details, see Table 9-2, “Scheduler
Parameters”, on page 9-5.
At this point, if no changes are required in the template you can complete the
conference definition. Otherwise, the remaining tabs are the same as for On
Going Conferences, continue with step 6 on page 9-6.
9. Click OK.
The Reservation is saved on the selected MCU.
9-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Recurrent Reservations
You can preset conferences to occur repeatedly. To do this, you need to set the
frequency that you wish the conference to occur while defining the
reservation parameters. The MGC Manager automatically creates duplicates
of the original reservation, scheduling them according to the selected
recurrence frequency. The number of duplicate reservations depends on the
number of repeats defined for the reservation.
A recurring reservation can be defined in three ways:
•
•
•
During the definition of a new reservation.
By modifying the properties of an existing reservation.
By using a reservation template from the Reservation database or the Res
Template file.
Defining the Reservation Recurrence Properties
The reservation’s basic parameters are defined using standard parameter
settings, as described in “Defining a New Reservation” on page 9-3. The
recurrence parameters of a reservation are defined in the Reservation-
Properties Scheduler tab.
To define Recurring Conference Properties:
1. Define a new Reservation or display the properties of an existing
reservation or reservation template.
9-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 - Conference Reservations
2. Click the Scheduler tab.
The Reservation Properties - Scheduler dialog box opens.
Select the date and
the start time of the
first reservation in
the sequence.
Click this button to
define the
frequency at which
the reservation
occurs.
3. Define the start date and time parameters of the first reservation in the
recurrence pattern.
For example, if you are planning a weekly reservation that occurs every
Monday, you need to select the date and time of the first Monday on
which the conference will occur. When defining a Monthly reservation,
the appropriate day of the month must be selected before defining the
frequency at which the reservation occurs.
9-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
4. Click the Reservation Recurrence button to define the frequency at
which the reservation occurs.
The Reservation Recurrence dialog box opens.
5. The following parameters may be defined:
Table 9-4: Reservation Recurrence Parameters
Field
Description
Recurrence Pattern
Select the frequency (Daily, Weekly or Monthly) at
which the reservation occurs.
If Daily is selected, the system automatically
highlights all the days of the week. To remove a
certain day of the week from the recurrence
schedule, click the desired day to clear its check
box.
If Weekly is selected, the system automatically
checks the day of the week according to the
current day set in the Scheduler dialog box. You
can also define the recurrence interval in weeks.
For example, if you want the reservation to occur
bi-weekly, enter the value 2 in the Week(s) box. To
define a twice a week recurring reservation, click
the check box of the additional day of the week at
which the conference is to be repeated and set the
recurrence interval to 1.
If Monthly is selected, the system automatically
sets the current day as defined in the Scheduler
dialog box.
9-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 - Conference Reservations
Table 9-4: Reservation Recurrence Parameters (Continued)
Field
Description
Recurrence Pattern
(cont.)
The reservation recurrence parameters change to
let you select the recurrence pattern; choose either
the specific “day” (default) of every x month(s) or a
specific sequence, such as the “first”, “Thursday”
of every x month(s).
Day dd of every x months - Repeats a
conference on a specified day of the month at a
specified monthly interval. For example, if the first
reservation is scheduled for the 6th of the current
month and the monthly interval is set to 1, the
monthly reservation will occur on the 6th of each of
the following months.
The 1st-last weekday of every x months -
Repeats a conference on a particular week, on a
specified day of the week at a specified monthly
interval. For example, a recurrent meeting on the
third Monday of every two months.
Range of
Recurrence
End After: x Occurrences - Ends a repeating
reservation after a specific number (X) of
occurrences.
End By: dd/mm/yy - Specify a date for the last
occurrence of the recurring reservation. The MGC
Manager calculates the number of occurrences
according to the selected frequency and the date
range.
9-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
6. Click OK.
7. Define the remaining conference parameters (if you are defining a new
reservation directly) using the standard workflow, as described in
Chapter 4, “Defining On Going Conferences” on page 4-34.
Once the reservation has been defined, the system automatically creates
the recurring reservations. The name of each recurring reservation is
derived from the name of the first reservation, followed by sequential
numbers, using the format <name>_X, where X is its sequential order.
For example, if the first reservation is named “Marketing”, and the
number of occurrences is three, the system creates three reservations,
naming the first Marketing _1, the second Marketing _2, and the third
Marketing _3.
The name of each of these reservations cannot be modified. However, the
parameters of an individual recurrent conference can be modified.
9-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 - Conference Reservations
Deleting Recurring Reservations from the Reservations List
When setting up recurring reservations, these reservations can be deleted as a
group.
You can delete an individual reservation out of the recurrence reservation
occurrences using the standard Delete procedure. For details, see “Deleting a
Reservation” on page 9-10.
To delete a recurring reservation from a recurrent reservation icon:
1. Right-click one of the recurrent reservations icons, and then click Delete
All Reservation Recurrences.
A confirmation box opens.
2. Click Yes to delete all recurring reservations.
To delete a recurring reservation from the Reservations icon:
1. Right-click on the Reservations icon, click the Delete All Reservation
Recurrences option to open the list of recurrent reservations, and then
select the reservation whose occurrences you wish to delete.
9-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
A confirmation box opens.
2. Click Yes to delete all recurring reservations.
9-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 9 - Conference Reservations
9-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Lecture and Presentation Options
This chapter describes three options for viewing a lecturer/presenter in full
screen during a conference:
•
Lecture Mode - all participants view the lecturer in full screen while
the lecturer views all conference participants in either a Continuous
Presence layout or, for conferences defined as Video Switching, by
scrolling through the other participants in full screen.
•
•
Presentation Mode - Continuous Presence conferences may be defined
to switch automatically to display the current speaker in full screen.
Lecture Show - broadcasting audio and video streams are muted for all
conference participants besides the lecturer, who is viewed in full
screen.
Lecture Mode
Lecture Mode enables automatic switching between the conference
participants in the speaker window, allowing the conference speaker to see
all the other conference participants (including Continuous Presence layout)
while he/she is speaking. The lecturer is the only one seen by all the other
participants throughout the conference, in full screen. While the lecturer is
speaking, the system automatically switches between participants according
to a predefined interval, showing them sequentially in the lecturer’s video
window. Lecture Mode is set at the conference level only.
Lecture Mode and Lecture Show are disabled in a Software Continuous
Presence conference.
The following features are available in Lecture Mode:
•
Selection of the conference lecturer
10-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 - Lecture and Presentation Options
•
Availability in Video Switching, Transcoding and Continuous Presence -
Classic conferences (in Continuous Presence - Classic conferences
running on a standard Video card, this option is unavailable for
asymmetrical video layouts in which at least one window is larger than
the others, such as 3+1, 5+1, 8+1, etc.)
•
•
The automatic switching is suspended when one of the participants
begins talking, and it is resumed automatically when the lecturer resumes
talking
Can be activated/deactivated during an On Going Conference
Lecture Mode Definition
A conference can be set to Lecture Mode when defining a new On Going
Conference, Reservation or Reservation template.
To define a conference as Lecture Mode:
1. Set the conference as a Standard conference.
2. Define the Conference Properties - General, Schedule, Settings and
Participants parameters as described in Chapter 4, “Defining a New
Video Conference” on page 4-35.
3. Ensure that a participant to be designated as the conference lecturer is
added to the list of conference participants in the Conference Properties -
Participants dialog box.
10-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
4. Click the Video Sources tab to display the Lecture Mode parameters.
The Conference Properties – Video Sources dialog box opens.
When the Same Layout is selected, Lecture Mode options are disabled.
10-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 - Lecture and Presentation Options
5. Define the following parameters:
Table 10-1: Lecture Mode options
Option
Description
Lecture Mode
The following options are available:
•
•
None - Disables the Lecture Mode.
Lecture Mode - Enables the Lecture Mode.
When enabling the Lecture Mode, an indication,
the Lecture Mode icon, appears at the top right
•
•
Presentation Mode - Enables Presentation
Mode. When enabling the Presentation Mode, an
indication, the Presentation Mode icon, appears
at the top right corner of the dialog box.
For more information, see “Presentation Mode”
Lecture Show - Enables the Lecture Show. You
must add at least one participant before selecting
the Video Sources tab to activate this option.
When enabling the Lecture Show, an indication,
the Lecture Show icon, appears at the top right
corner of the dialog box.
For more information, see “Lecture Show” on
page 10-14.
Timer
Select the Timer check box to enable the automatic
switching between participants.
Interval
This option is enabled when the Timer option is
checked. Define the number of seconds a participant
is to be displayed in the lecturer window before
switching to the next participant.
Lecturer name
Select the Lecturer name from the drop-down list.
The list displays the names of all the participants
defined for the conference.
10-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
6. Click OK to confirm the conference settings.
Forcing is enabled at the Conference level only. It applies only to the video layout
viewed by the lecturer (as all the conference participants see only the lecturer in
full picture).
If an asymmetrical Video layout is selected for the lecturer (i.e. 3+1, 4+1, 8+1),
each video window contains a different participant (i.e. one cannot be forced to a
large frame and to a small frame simultaneously).
Lecture Mode Monitoring
A conference in which the Lecture Mode is enabled is started as any other
conference. The conference runs as an audio activated Video Switching/
Transcoding/Continuous Presence conference until the lecturer connects to
the conference. In Continuous Presence conferences, the selected video
layout at the time of the reservation is the one that is activated when the
conference starts. Once the lecturer is connected, the conference switches to
the Lecture Mode.
The order in which the system switches from one participant to another is
defined by the order in which the participants were added to the conference.
The switching occurs according to the time interval defined for the
conference. In a Continuous Presence conference all the participants are
displayed on the lecturer screen, hence the Timer is insignificant. The Timer is
active when the number of participants exceeds the number of windows in the
selected video layout. In that case, when the switching is performed, the
system refreshes the display while replacing the last active speaker with a
speaker who was invisible during the last display interval.
When one of the participants is talking, the automatic switching is suspended,
showing the current speaker, and it is resumed when the lecturer resumes
talking.
If no lecturer is selected for the conference (Auto Select), the speaker becomes
the conference lecturer with all the inherent prerogatives and adopts the
lecturer’s status, including the video forcing options in Continuous Presence
conferences.
If the lecturer is disconnected during the On Going Conference, the
conference resumes the audio activation mode.
During the On Going Conference you can:
•
Enable or disable the Lecture Mode
10-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 - Lecture and Presentation Options
•
Select a new lecturer
If the Lecture Mode is used in a Video Switching conference, only the lecturer can
send an Annex D still image. Otherwise, the request to broadcast an Annex D still
image is rejected.
Below is an example of a conference in Lecture Mode.
Participant designated as
the Lecturer
Lecture Mode conference status
indication
To control the Lecture Mode during an On Going Conference:
1. Right-click the On Going Conference icon, and then click Properties.
The Conference Properties dialog box opens.
2. Select the Participants tab and ensure that there is at least one Participant
in the Conference Participants list.
10-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
3. Click the Video Sources tab.
The Conference Properties - Video Sources dialog box opens.
Icon indicating that
Lecture Mode is
active
4. You can perform one of the following operations:
—
Enable or disable the Lecture Mode - from the Lecture Mode drop-
down list, select None to disable the Lecture Mode or select
Lecture Mode to enable it.
—
Change the video layout for the lecturer (in Continuous Presence
mode) by selecting another video layout.
For conferences running on a standard video card, the asymmetrical
video layouts such as 3+1, 4+1, 5+1 and 8+1 are disabled in Lecture
Mode. The selected layout affects only the lecturer display. The
other participants only view the speaker (lecturer or the active
speaker) in full screen.
—
—
Select the conference lecturer by choosing his/her name from the
Lecturer name drop-down list. The list includes the names of all the
conference participants currently connected to the conference.
Enable or disable automatic switching between participants
displayed on the lecturer monitor window by selecting or clearing
the Timer check box.
10-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 - Lecture and Presentation Options
—
Change the number of seconds a participant is displayed in the
In the Status column of the Monitor and Status area, the Lecture Mode icon
and indication is displayed.
The lecturer is indicated with the following icon:
You can mute and unmute participants and perform additional operations as
described in Chapter 6, “Operations Performed During On Going
Conferences”.
10-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Presentation Mode
Presentation Mode is available in Continuous Presence conferences. In
Continuous Presence conferences set to Presentation Mode, when the current
speaker’s speech extends a predefined time, the conference layout
automatically changes to full screen, displaying the current speaker as the
conference lecturer on all the conference participant monitors. When the
Presentation Mode is active, the speaker views the previous conference
layout. When another participant starts talking, the Presentation Mode is
cancelled and the conference returns to its predefined video layout.
To enable the Presentation Mode, define the time period that participants are
able to speak before they automatically become the conference “speakers”
and are viewed in full screen by all the conference participants (default time
interval is 15 seconds).
Presentation Mode Guidelines:
•
Presentation mode is available with:
—
—
—
Auto Layout
Same Layout
Conference On Port (COP) conferences.
•
In a COP conference, when the speaker becomes the conference
presenter, the conference layout is automatically set to 1x1 (full screen)
and all participants including the active speaker view this layout.
•
•
If the speaker in a video conference is an Audio Only participant, the
Presentation Mode is disabled for that participant.
Video Forcing can be applied while the conference is in normal speaker
mode. Video forcing works in the same way as in Lecture Mode when
Presentation Mode is activated, that is, forcing is only enabled at the
conference level, and it only applies to the video layout viewed by the
lecturer.
•
•
•
Since the Presentation mode is available only in Continuous Presence
conferences, it cannot be selected for Operator conferences. In addition,
it is not available in Software Continuous Presence conferences.
When starting a conference in which Presentation Mode is set together
with asymmetric conference layouts and the conference is scheduled to
run on the Standard Video card, the conference is rejected by the MCU.
During an On Going Conference set to Presentation Mode that is running
10-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 - Lecture and Presentation Options
on the standard Video card, asymmetric conference layouts are blocked
and unavailable for selection.
•
•
When a conference set to both Auto Layout and Presentation Mode is run
on the Standard Video card, the definition of the layouts selected for
Auto Layout changes. For more details, see the MGC Administrator’s
Guide, Chapter 5, “Confer.cfg Flags”, Sections “AUTO_LAYOUT” and
“AUTO_QUAD_LAYOUT”.
Presentation Mode must be enabled in the “system.cfg” configuration
file, in the GENERAL section. For more details, see the MGC
Administrator’s Guide, Chapter 5, “Edit “system.cfg”.
Setting the Presentation Mode for a Conference
The Presentation Mode can only be set in Continuous Presence conferences.
It is selected in the Conference Properties - Video Sources dialog box.
To select a Presentation Mode Conference:
1. Click the Video Sources tab.
The Conference Properties - Video Sources dialog box opens.
10-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
2. In the Lecture Mode list, select Presentation Mode.
The Presentation Mode icon appears at the top right corner of the dialog
box.
Icon indicating
thatPresentation
Mode is active
3. In the Interval field select the amount of time (in seconds) to wait before
the speaker automatically becomes the conference lecturer and the video
layout changes to full screen.
4. Click OK.
10-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 - Lecture and Presentation Options
Presentation Mode Monitoring
When an On Going Conference is running in Presentation Mode, the
Presentation icon appears in the Status column of the Status and Monitoring
panes.
The icon of the participant who is the current lecturer changes to the Lecturer
icon.
Participant designated as
the Presenter
Presentation Mode status
indication
10-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Enabling the Presentation Mode during an On Going
Conference
To enable the Presentation Mode during an On Going Conference:
1. Right-click the On Going Conference icon and then click Properties.
The Conference Properties dialog box opens.
2. Click the Video Sources tab.
The Conference Properties - Video Sources dialog box opens.
Icon
indicating
that
Presentation
Mode is
active
3. In the Lecture Mode list, select Presentation Mode.
To disable the Presentation Mode, select None in the Lecture Mode list.
4. In the Interval field, select the amount of time (in seconds or minutes) to
wait before the speaker automatically becomes the conference lecturer
and the video layout changes to full screen.
The conference switches to the Presentation Mode.
10-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 - Lecture and Presentation Options
Lecture Show
The Lecture Show feature offers users the possibility of hearing or viewing a
broadcast without participating in the conference, as they can only hear and
see the lecturer. The participant hears the conference/broadcast and is unable
to interact or communicate, visually or verbally, as his/her audio and video
channels are automatically muted. The lecturer or moderator is not able to
receive any video or audio from any of the participants during the broadcast
of the lecture/show.
Lecture Show Guidelines:
•
•
Requires the selection of one participant as conference lecturer
Lecturer selection is mandatory at the reservation stage. The lecturer
cannot be changed or deleted during the On Going Conference
•
All participants excluding the lecturer have their audio and video
automatically muted by the MCU. Participants can only hear and see the
lecturer
•
•
Full screen (1x1) format is the only layout that may be selected for the
Lecture Show
Participants connecting to the conference prior to the lecturer/moderator
logon, hear and see only themselves
Lecture Show Definition
When defining a new On Going Conference, Reservation or Reservation
template set the conference as a Standard conference and define the
Conference Properties - General, Schedule, Settings and Participants,
parameters as described in Chapter 4, “Defining a New Video Conference” on
page 4-35.
You must first add a defined participant (from the Participants Tab) to attend
the conference prior to selecting the Video Sources tab and enabling the
Lecture Show option.
To define a new Lecture Show conference:
1. Click the Participants tab.
The Conference Properties – Participants dialog box opens.
10-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
2. Select the participant to act as the conference lecturer. You can also
select any number of participants to attend the conference. For details on
how to select participants refer to Chapter 4, “Participants” on page 4-65.
3. Click the Video Sources tab.
The Conference Properties - Video Sources dialog box opens.
4. In the Lecture Mode list, select Lecture Show.
The Lecture Show icon appears at the top right corner of the dialog box.
Icon
indicating
that Lecture
Show is
active
5. In the Lecturer Name list, select the name of the participant to act as the
conference lecturer.
6. Click OK to confirm the conference settings.
10-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 10 - Lecture and Presentation Options
Lecture Show Monitoring
A conference in which Lecture Show is enabled is started as any other
Continuous Presence conference until the lecturer connects to the conference.
If participants connect to the conference prior to the lecturer, the participants
view only themselves.
The operator can only add or disconnect participants to the On Going
Conference, extend the conference duration or terminate the conference
before its scheduled end time. For details how to perform these operations,
see Chapter 6, “Operations Performed During On Going Conferences”.
Participant designated as
the Lecturer
Lecture Show conference status
indication
10-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
Click&View
Click&View is an endpoint application displayed on video endpoints that
enables participants to modify their personal video layout and chairpersons
to modify the conference video layout. These operations are performed by
entering the appropriate code on the endpoint’s DTMF input device (usually
a remote control). The Click&View application is activated from the MCU.
•
•
•
Click&View requires Continuous Presence - Classic or Quad mode
Click&View requires the Video+ and Audio+ cards.
When Click&View is enabled for the conference, the Click&View splash
screen is displayed for 5 seconds on the participant endpoint. If
Click&View is disabled for the conference, no splash screen appears.
Figure 11-1: Click&View Main Display
11-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 - Click&View
Enabling the Click&View Application
The Click&View application must be enabled in the IVR Service assigned to
a conference so participants can select their personal Video Layout from their
endpoint. You can create a new IVR Service or you can modify an existing
IVR Service to enable the Click&View application.
To enable the Click&View application by defining a new IVR Service:
1. Connect to the MGC unit (MCU).
2. Click the plus [+] icon next to the MCU icon to expand its options tree.
3. Double-click the MCU Configuration icon, or click the plus [+] icon next
to it to display the MCU Configuration options.
4. Right-click the IVR Services icon, and then click New IVR Service.
11-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The IVR-Global dialog box opens.
This dialog box enables you to define the general parameters of the IVR
Service.
5. Follow the directions for defining a new IVR Service in the MGC
Manager User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 2, “Defining a New IVR
Message Service”.
6. As you proceed through the wizard, you will open the Video Services
dialog box.
11-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 - Click&View
7. Select the Enable Video Services check box. Selecting this checkbox
also enables the Click&View checkbox.
8. Select the Click&View check box.
9. Continue following the directions for completing the wizard until you
reach the DTMF codes dialog box.
This dialog box lists the default DTMF codes of the various functions
that can be performed during the conference by all the conference
participants or exclusively by the conference chairperson. For a list of
available DTMF codes see “Using DTMF Codes During a Conference”
on page 6-95.
10. To modify the DTMF code assigned to a function, in the Name field,
click the function whose code you wish to modify.
11-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The appropriate DTMF code appears at the bottom of the list.
11. Select Start Click&View in the Name field.
12. In the DTMF Code (left) field, enter the code. The default is a double
asterisk (**).
13. In the Permission (right) field, select Everyone to enable this function to
be used by all the conference participants.
14. Click Finish to complete the IVR Service definition.
The new IVR Message Service with the Click&View application enabled
is added to the IVR Services list.
The number of IVR Services defined for a single MGC unit may not exceed 30
Services.
To enable the Click&View application by modifying an existing IVR
Service:
1. Connect to the MGC Unit (MCU).
2. Click the plus [+] icon next to the MCU icon to expand its options tree.
3. Double-click the MCU Configuration icon or click the plus [+] icon next
to the MCU Configuration icon to expand the MCU’s Configuration
options.
11-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 - Click&View
4. Expand the IVR Msg Services tree.
The list of IVR Messages Services is displayed.
5. Double-click an IVR Message Service or right-click the IVR Service you
want to modify, and then click Properties.
The IVR Message Service dialog box opens.
6. Click the Video Services tab.
11-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The IVR Message Service - Video Services dialog box appears.
7. Select the Enable Video Services check box.
8. Select the Click&View check box.
9. Click the DTMF codes tab to view and/or modify the DTMF code
assigned to the activation of the Click&View application from the
participants endpoint.
11-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 - Click&View
10. Select Start Click&View in the Name field.
11. In the DTMF Code (left) field, enter the required code. The default
DTMF code is a double asterisk (**).
12. In the Permission (right) field, select Everyone to enable this function to
be used by all the conference participants.
13. Click OK to complete the definition of the IVR Service.
Enabling the Click&View Application for a Conference
To enable the Click&View Application in a Conference:
1. Connect to an MCU and expand its tree.
2. Right-click the On Going Conferences icon, and then click New
Conference.
11-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The Conference Properties - General dialog box opens.
3. In the Video Session box, click Continuous Presence and then select
either Classic or Quad Views.
11-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 - Click&View
4. Click the Settings tab.
The Conference Properties - Settings dialog box opens.
5. In the Msg Service Type field, select IVR to enable IVR services.
6. Select an IVR service from the Msg Service Name drop-down list in
which the Click&View option is enabled.
11-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Using the Click&View Application
When a participant connects to a Click&View enabled conference, a
Click&View splash screen is displayed. From this point on, until the end of
the conference, the participant may modify his personal video layout, or
return to the conference video layout. The chairperson may also modify the
conference layout. The Click&View application is activated from the
endpoint’s DTMF input device, such as a remote control or a virtual remote
control.
To activate the Click&View Application:
•
Enter the appropriate DTMF code via the DTMF input device.
The default DTMF code for activating the Click&View is double-
asterisk (**). This code can be modified in the IVR service.
On Polycom ViaVideo, you can
use the virtual remote control
to enter the appropriate DTMF
code
Click the asterisk key twice to
activate the Click&View
application
11-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 - Click&View
The Click&View application is displayed on the endpoint’s screen.
Figure 11-2: Chairperson Click&View Display
Figure 11-3: Participant Click&View Display
The conference view in the Click&View main display area is 1x1 (in Classic
conferences only).
11-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Click&View Menu Options
The Click&View application has two modes, Chairperson and Participant.
Conference
Layout
Help Menu
Personal
Layout
Back to previous
Back to
Conference
Layout
screen. In the Main
Menu screen, this
option closes the
Click&View
application
Request
Operator’s
Assistance
For the Chairperson, the Home screen presents six options with the
appropriate DTMF codes. For a Participant, five options are enabled while
the conference layout option is disabled. To activate each menu option, use
your DTMF input device to select a DTMF code (see the Help screen).
Table 11-1: Click&View Main Menu Options
DTMF
Code
Icon
Description
Action
Conference
Layout
1
Enables the Chairperson to modify
the conference layout for all
participants.
Personal
Layout
2
Enables each participant to modify
the video layout displayed on his/her
screen. This change does not affect
other participants.
11-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 - Click&View
Table 11-1: Click&View Main Menu Options (Continued)
DTMF
Code
Icon
Description
Action
Return to
Conference
Layout
3
Enables the participant to cancel his/
her personal layout and view the
layout currently selected for the
conference.
Help
Back
*
Displays the Help screen.
#
Displays the previous screen. When
selected in the Home Menu, closes
the Click&View application for this
participant.
Operator
Assistance
0
Requests Operator assistance. Adds
the participant to the Participants
Queue in the MGC Manager and
exits the Click&View application.
11-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Conference Layout (Chairperson Only) Options
The Chairperson can change the current conference layout for all
the conference participants viewing the conference layout. Participants who
view their personal layout will not be affected. However, when they return to
the conference layout, they will view the new conference layout.
To select another layout for the conference:
1. From your endpoint activate the Click&View application.
2. In the Click&View Home screen, enter 1 on the DTMF input device.
This DTMF value
activates the Change Conference Layout
screen.
11-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 - Click&View
The video layout options available in the Classic or Quad Views are
displayed in the Conference Layout menu.
The following video layouts are available in Continuous Presence -
Classic and Quad Views. Each layout is represented by a DTMF code.
Table 11-2: Available Video Layouts
DTMF Code
Classic CP
Quad Views CP
1
2
3
4
5
11-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Table 11-2: Available Video Layouts (Continued)
DTMF Code Classic CP Quad Views CP
6
3. On the endpoint’s DTMF input device, enter the DTMF code displayed
next to the desired layout. For example, if the desired layout in
Continuous Presence Classic is the 5+1 layout, enter 5 as the DTMF
code.
The Click&View application closes and the new conference layout is
shown on the endpoint’s screen.
The new layout is viewed from any endpoint that is not currently using a
personal layout.
Viewing the New Layout in the MGC Manager
The MGC Manager application is updated with the new layout selected for
the conference. The new layout can be checked in the Conference Properties -
Video Sources dialog box.
11-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 - Click&View
Personal Layout Options
Participants in a Click&View enabled conference may change
their personal video layouts. This layout is viewed only by the participant
modifying the layout. All other participants, except for participants currently
viewing their own personal layouts, see the conference layout.
To select a Personal Layout:
1. From your endpoint activate the Click&View application.
2. In the Click&View Home screen, enter 2 on the DTMF input device.
This DTMF value activates
the Personal Layout screen.
11-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
The available video layouts are displayed in the Personal Layout menu
screen. Table 11-2 on page 11-16 lists the available layouts for
Continuous Presence Classic and Quad Views.
3. On the endpoint’s DTMF input device, enter the DTMF code displayed
next to the desired layout. For example, if the desired layout in
Continuous Presence Classic is 2x2, enter 4 on the endpoint’s remote
control.
The Click&View screen closes and the new personal layout is shown on the
endpoint’s screen. The new layout is only viewed on the endpoint selecting it.
11-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 - Click&View
Figure 11-4: 2x2 Click&View Display
11-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
To View the Personal Layout in the MGC Manager:
The MGC Manager application is updated with the new layouts selected for
the participant.
The new video layout can be checked in the Participant Properties - Video
Sources dialog box.
The Personal Layout selected by the
participant
Indicates that this participant is
currently viewing a Personal Layout, as
opposed to viewing the Conference
Layout
Personal Layout may also be modified from the Participant Properties - Video
Sources dialog box by the operator, or from the WebCommander application.
11-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 - Click&View
Returning to the Conference Layout
If a participant has selected a video layout other than the
conference layout, the participant can return to the conference layout display
by entering the appropriate DTMF code in the Click&View application.
To return to the conference layout display:
1. From the endpoint, activate the Click&View application.
2. In the Click&View Home screen, enter 3 on the DTMF input device, to
activate this option.
Click&View closes and the endpoint’s monitor displays the conference
layout.
The Participant Properties are updated accordingly.
11-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Getting Help
You can get help for the Click&View options by entering the
appropriate DTMF code in the Click&View application.
To get help about Click&View options:
1. In the Click&View screen, on the endpoint’s DTMF input device, enter *
to activate the Help option.
Help topic describing the
Click&View Home options,
and how to select an option
using the DTMF input
device.
While viewing the Main Menu Help topic, you can get help on the
various Click&View options.
11-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 - Click&View
2. On the endpoint’s DTMF input device, if you enter a number or symbol
(1,2,3,0, or *) that corresponds to a Click&View DTMF command, the
appropriate help topic is displayed. For example, enter 2 on the DTMF
input device and the system displays the Personal Layout topic.
Help topic describing how to
change the participant’s
Personal Layout display.
Returning to the Previous Screen
If you are in the Video Layout menu screen, you can return to the
previous screen by entering the appropriate DTMF code (default code is
pound key, #) on the DTMF input device.
If you are in the Help screen, selecting the back option, closes the Help topic
and displays the Click&View Main menu screen.
To return to the previous screen:
•
Enter the pound key, # on the endpoint’s DTMF input device.
11-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Requesting Operator Assistance
You can request the operator’s assistance by entering the appropriate
DTMF code on the DTMF input device.
To request Operator Assistance from the Click&View screens:
•
On the DTMF input device, enter (zero) 0 to request the operator’s
assistance.
The Click&View application closes and you are returned to the
conference to wait for operator assistance.
There is no indication on your endpoint’s screen that you have been
added to the Participant Queue.
Assistance Request in the MGC Manager Application
When the participant requests help from the Click&View application, the
participant is added to the Participant Queue in the MGC Manager window.
In addition, an icon is displayed in the Status column indicating that this
participant is waiting for assistance.
The status of a
participantwho
has requested
assistance.
This
participant is
also added to
the participant
queue.
11-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 11 - Click&View
11-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A
Appendix A: Disconnection Causes
If a participant was unable to connect to a conference or was
disconnected from an On Going Conference, the Participant Properties -
Disconnection Cause dialog box indicates the cause category, whether it
is audio or video related, and details the cause message. In some cases, a
possible solution may be indicated.
This appendix details the cause messages displayed in the Cause field
and their explanation
For a full list of disconnection cause messages for the current MGC Manager
version, refer to the topic: “ACCOngoingParticipant:GetDisconnectCause”,
in the MGC C++ API e-book.
Table A-1: Primary Disconnection Reasons
Category
Cause Message
Description
Operator Disconnect
Disconnected by
operator
The operator
disconnected the
endpoint from the
conference.
No Net Connection
No net connection
The network failed to
connect to the network
card.
Participant Hang-Up
V-Gate No Response
Party hang up
The endpoint hung up.
V-gate does not respond
The V-Gate was unable
to negotiate a
connection with the
endpoint. (Video
participant parameter)
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Disconnection Causes
Table A-1: Primary Disconnection Reasons (Continued)
Category
Cause Message
Description
Security Failure
Remote device
capabilities do not
support encryption
The endpoint failed to
encrypt. (ISDN)
A common key
The endpoint does not
support the local
encryption key
exchange algorithm
could not be established
between the MCU and
the remote device
exchange algorithm.
Remote device did not
open the encryption
signaling channel
The endpoint did not
open the encryption
signaling channel.
Remote device key
exchange algorithm
message was not
The MCU did not
receive the remote
encryption algorithm
capabilities from the
endpoint.
received by the MCU
The encryption setup
process did not end on
time
The encryption setup
process did not end on
time.
Remote device cannot
encrypt
The endpoint failed to
encrypt. (ISDN)
The remote device failed
to start encryption
system
The endpoint failed to
start the encryption
system. (ISDN)
The remote devices'
selected encryption
algorithm does not
match the local selected
encryption algorithm
The encryption
algorithm selected by
the endpoint does not
match the MCU's
encryption algorithm.
(ISDN and IP)
Encryption key
exchange failed
Encryption key
exchange failed. (ISDN)
A-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide
Table A-1: Primary Disconnection Reasons (Continued)
Category
Cause Message
Description
Bonding Failure
Bonding failure
Bonding negotiation
failed. For example, the
endpoint didn't reply.
(ISDN only)
Long delay between
channels
The bonding channels
cannot be synchronized
by the MUX, because
the delay in data
transfer between the
channels is too long, or
downspeed is required
and the endpoint
supports
downspeeding, but the
MCU doesn't. (ISDN
only)
Internal error
Internal error occurred.
(ISDN only)
No answer from remote
part
Bonding failure due to
timeout. (ISDN only)
Error in dialing
additional channels
H.221 bonding error.
The endpoint declared
less channels than the
MCU wanted, or an
error occurred when
attempting to open
additional channels.
(ISDN only)
Bad H243
Connection
No established H243
connect
Not currently used.
Full bitrate connection
failure
The system can not
establish a connection
with the participant
using the maximum
possible line rate
capacity. (ISDN only)
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Disconnection Causes
Table A-1: Primary Disconnection Reasons (Continued)
Category
Cause Message
Description
Bad H243
Connection (cont.)
Capabilities exchange
failure in establishing
call
The initial capabilities
exchange failed. For
example, the endpoint
didn't send any
capabilities. (ISDN only)
Capabilities exchange
failure in change mode
Failure to exchange
capabilities when the
MCU requested that the
endpoint change
protocol. For example,
the endpoint didn't reply.
(ISDN only)
Unspecified
Unspecified error
occurred.
Not received end of
initial communication
The endpoint did not
send an initial
capabilities set. (ISDN
only)
Resource Deficiency
Resources deficiency
Net port deficiency
Insufficient resources
available. (ISDN only)
Insufficient network
resources to handle the
ISDN call. (ISDN only)
MUX port deficiency
Audio port deficiency
Video port deficiency
Insufficient MUX
resources. (ISDN only)
Insufficient audio ports.
(ISDN and IP)
Insufficient video
resources. (ISDN and
IP)
Data port deficiency
Not currently used.
A-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide
Table A-1: Primary Disconnection Reasons (Continued)
Category
Cause Message
Description
Resource Deficiency
(cont.)
Audio message port
deficiency
Insufficient audio
resources available for
IVR or Greet and Guide
messages. (ISDN and
IP)
H323 deficiency
Insufficient IP
resources. (IP only)
T123 port deficiency
Insufficient data
resources. (ISDN and
IP)
H323 call close
Gatekeeper connection
ID failed
Internal system error.
(IP only)
H323 call close. No port
left for audio
Insufficient audio ports.
(IP only)
H323 call close. No port
left for video
The required video
ports exceed the
number of ports
allocated to video in
fixed ports. (IP only)
H323 call close. No port
left for T120
The required data ports
exceed the number of
ports allocated to data
in fixed ports. (IP only)
H323 call close. No
control port left
The required control
ports exceed the
number of ports
allocated to control data
in fixed ports. (IP only)
H323 call close. Small
bandwidth
The gatekeeper
allocated insufficient
bandwidth to the
connection with the
endpoint. (IP only)
A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Disconnection Causes
Table A-1: Primary Disconnection Reasons (Continued)
Category
Cause Message
Description
Resource Deficiency
(cont.)
H323 call close. No port
left
There are no free ports
left in the IP card. (IP
only)
Gatekeeper Failure
Called party not
registered
The called endpoint is
not registered in the
gatekeeper. (IP only)
Invalid permission
Request denied
Not currently used.
Not currently used.
Not currently used.
Undefined reason
Caller not registered
The calling endpoint is
not registered in the
gatekeeper. (IP only)
Route call to gatekeeper Not currently used.
Invalid end point
identifier
Not currently used.
Rsrc unavailable
Security denial
Not currently used.
Not currently used.
Not currently used.
QoS control not
supported
Incomplete address
H323 call close. ARQ
timeout
The endpoint sent an
ARQ message to the
gatekeeper, but the
gatekeeper did not
respond before timeout.
(IP only)
A-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide
Table A-1: Primary Disconnection Reasons (Continued)
Category
Cause Message
Description
Gatekeeper Failure
(cont.)
H323 call close. DRQ
timeout
The endpoint sent a
DRQ message to the
gatekeeper, but the
gatekeeper did not
respond before timeout.
(IP only)
H323 call close. Alt
Gatekeeper failure
An alternate gatekeeper
failure occurred. (IP
only)
H323 call close.
Gatekeeper failure
A gatekeeper failure
occurred. (IP only)
H323 Failure
H323 call close. Remote
busy
The endpoint was busy.
(Applicable only to dial-
out and IP only)
H323 call close. Normal
The call ended
normally, for example,
the endpoint
disconnected. (IP only)
H323 call close. Remote
reject
The endpoint rejected
the call. (IP only)
H323 call close. Remote
unreachable
The gatekeeper could
not find the endpoint's
address. (IP only)
H323 call close.
Unknown reason
The reason for the
disconnection is
unknown, for example,
the endpoint
disconnected without
giving a reason. (IP
only)
H323 call close. Closed
by MCMS
The MCU disconnected
the call. (IP only)
H323 call close. Need
maintenance
A card failure occurred.
(IP only)
A-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Disconnection Causes
Table A-1: Primary Disconnection Reasons (Continued)
Category
Cause Message
Description
H323 Failure (cont.)
H323 call close. Small
bandwidth
The gatekeeper
allocated insufficient
bandwidth to the
connection with the
endpoint. (IP only)
H323 call close.
Gatekeeper failure
A gatekeeper failure
occurred. (IP only)
H323 call close.
The gatekeeper
Gatekeeper reject ARQ
rejected the endpoint's
ARQ. (IP only)
H323 call close. No port
left
There are no ports left
in the IP card. (IP only)
H323 call close.
Gatekeeper DRQ
The gatekeeper sent a
DRQ. (IP only)
H323 call close. No
destination IP value
For internal use. (IP
only)
H323 call close. Remote
has not sent capability
The endpoint did not
send its capabilities to
the gatekeeper. (IP
only)
H323 call close. Audio
channels not open
The endpoint did not
open the audio channel.
(IP only)
H323 call close. Need to
wait T120 board
For internal use. (IP
only)
H323 call close. Bad
remote cap
There was a problem in
the capabilities sent by
the endpoint. (IP only)
H323 call close.
Capabilities not
accepted by remote
The endpoint did not
accept the capabilities
sent by the gatekeeper.
(IP only)
A-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide
Table A-1: Primary Disconnection Reasons (Continued)
Category
Cause Message
Description
H323 Failure (cont.)
H323 failure
Internal error occurred.
(IP only)
H323 call close. Remote
stop responding
The endpoint stopped
responding. (IP only)
H323 call close. No
matching switch keys
alg
H323 call close. Rmt
doesn't support
encryption
H323 call close. Master
slave problem
A People + Content
cascading failure
occurred. (IP only)
SIP Failure
SIP bad name
The conference name is
incompatible with SIP
standards.
SIP bad status
A general IP card error
occurred.
SIP busy everywhere
The participant's
endpoints were
contacted successfully,
but the participant is
busy and does not wish
to take the call at this
time.
SIP busy here
The participant's
endpoint was contacted
successfully, but the
participant is currently
not willing or able to
take additional calls.
A-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Disconnection Causes
Table A-1: Primary Disconnection Reasons (Continued)
Category
Cause Message
Description
SIP Failure (cont.)
SIP capabilities don't
match
The remote device
capabilities are not
compatible with the
conference settings.
SIP card rejected
channels
The IP card could not
open the media
channels.
SIP client error 400
The endpoint sent a SIP
Client Error 400 (Bad
Request) response.
The request could not
be understood due to
malformed syntax.
SIP client error 402
SIP client error 405
The endpoint sent a SIP
Client Error 402
(Payment Required)
response.
The endpoint sent a SIP
Client Error 405
(Method Not Allowed)
response.
The method specified in
the Request-Line is
understood, but not
allowed for the address
identified by the
Request-URI.
A-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide
Table A-1: Primary Disconnection Reasons (Continued)
Category
Cause Message
Description
SIP Failure (cont.)
SIP client error 406
The endpoint sent a SIP
Client Error 406 (Not
Acceptable) resources.
The remote endpoint
can not accept the call
because it does not
have the necessary
responses. The
resource identified by
the request is only
capable of generating
response entities that
have content
characteristics not
acceptable according to
the Accept header field
sent in the request.
SIP client error 407
The endpoint sent a SIP
Client Error 407 (Proxy
Authentication
Required) response.
The client must first
authenticate itself with
the proxy.
SIP client error 409
The endpoint sent a SIP
Client Error 409
(Conflict) response.
The request could not
be completed due to a
conflict with the current
state of the resource.
A-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Disconnection Causes
Table A-1: Primary Disconnection Reasons (Continued)
Category
Cause Message
Description
SIP Failure (cont.)
SIP client error 411
The endpoint sent a SIP
Client Error 411 (Length
Required) response.
The server refuses to
accept the request
without a defined
Content Length.
SIP client error 413
SIP client error 414
SIP client error 420
The endpoint sent a SIP
Client Error 413
(Request Entity Too
Large) response.
The server is refusing to
process a request
because the request
entity is larger than the
server is willing or able
to process.
The endpoint sent a SIP
Client Error 414
(Request-URI Too
Long) response.
The server is refusing to
service the request
because the Request-
URI is longer than the
server is willing to
interpret.
The endpoint sent a SIP
Client Error 420 (Bad
Extension) response.
The server did not
understand the protocol
extension specified in a
Require header field.
A-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide
Table A-1: Primary Disconnection Reasons (Continued)
Category
Cause Message
Description
SIP Failure (cont.)
SIP client error 481
The endpoint sent a SIP
Client Error 481 (Call/
Transaction Does Not
Exist) response.
SIP client error 482
SIP client error 483
SIP client error 484
The endpoint sent a SIP
Client Error 482 (Loop
Detected) response.
The endpoint sent a SIP
Client Error 483 (Too
Many Hops) response.
The endpoint sent a SIP
Client Error 484
(Address Incomplete)
response.
The server received a
request with a To
address or Request-URI
that was incomplete.
SIP client error 485
The endpoint sent a SIP
Client Error 485
(Ambiguous) response.
The address provided in
the request (Request-
URI) was ambiguous.
SIP client error 488
SIP forbidden
The endpoint sent a SIP
Client Error 488 (Not
Acceptable Here)
response.
The SIP server rejected
the request.
The server understood
the request, but is
refusing to fulfill it.
A-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Disconnection Causes
Table A-1: Primary Disconnection Reasons (Continued)
Category
Cause Message
Description
SIP Failure (cont.)
SIP global failure 603
A SIP Global Failure
603 (Decline) response
was returned.
The participant's
endpoint was
successfully contacted,
but the participant
explicitly does not wish
to or cannot participate.
SIP global failure 604
A SIP Global Failure
604 (Does Not Exist
Anywhere) response
was returned.
The server has
authoritative information
that the user indicated
in the Request-URI
does not exist
anywhere.
SIP global failure 606
SIP gone
A SIP Global Failure
606 (Not Acceptable)
response was returned.
The requested resource
is no longer available at
the Server and no
forwarding address is
known.
SIP moved permanently
SIP moved temporarily
The endpoint moved
permanently. The user
can no longer be found
at the address in the
Request-URI.
The remote endpoint
moved temporarily.
A-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide
Table A-1: Primary Disconnection Reasons (Continued)
Category
Cause Message
Description
SIP Failure (cont.)
SIP not found
The endpoint was not
found.
The server has
definitive information
that the user does not
exist at the domain
specified in the
Request-URI.
SIP redirection 300
A SIP Redirection 300
(Multiple Choices)
response was returned.
SIP redirection 303
SIP redirection 305
Not currently used.
A SIP Redirection 305
(Use Proxy) response
was returned.
The requested resource
MUST be accessed
through the proxy given
by the Contact field.
SIP redirection 380
A SIP Redirection 380
(Alternative Service)
response was returned.
The call was not
successful, but
alternative services are
possible.
SIP remote cancelled
call
The endpoint canceled
the call.
SIP remote closed call
The endpoint ended the
call.
SIP remote stopped
responding
The endpoint is not
responding.
SIP remote unreachable The endpoint could not
be reached.
A-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Disconnection Causes
Table A-1: Primary Disconnection Reasons (Continued)
Category
Cause Message
Description
SIP Failure (cont.)
SIP request terminated
The endpoint
terminated the request.
The request was
terminated by a BYE or
CANCEL request.
SIP request timeout
SIP server error 500
The request was timed
out.
The SIP server sent a
SIP Server Error 500
(Server Internal Error)
response.
The server encountered
an unexpected
condition that prevented
it from fulfilling the
request.
SIP server error 501
The SIP server sent a
SIP Server Error 501
(Not Implemented)
response.
The server does not
support the functionality
required to fulfill the
request.
SIP server error 502
The SIP server sent a
SIP Server Error 502
(Bad Gateway)
response.
The server, while acting
as a gateway or proxy,
received an invalid
response from the
downstream server it
accessed in attempting
to fulfill the request.
A-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide
Table A-1: Primary Disconnection Reasons (Continued)
Category
Cause Message
Description
SIP Failure (cont.)
SIP server error 503
The SIP server sent a
SIP Server Error 503
(Service Unavailable)
response.
The server is
temporarily unable to
process the request due
to a temporary
overloading or
maintenance of the
server.
SIP server error 504
The SIP server sent a
SIP Server Error 504
(Server Time-out)
response.
The server did not
receive a timely
response from an
external server it
accessed in attempting
to process the request.
SIP server error 505
The SIP server sent a
SIP Server Error 505
(Version Not Supported)
response.
The server does not
support, or refuses to
support, the SIP
protocol version that
was used in the request.
A-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Disconnection Causes
Table A-1: Primary Disconnection Reasons (Continued)
Category
Cause Message
Description
SIP Failure (cont.)
SIP temporarily not
available
The participant's
endpoint was contacted
successfully but the
participant is currently
unavailable (e.g., not
logged in or logged in
such a manner as to
preclude
communication with the
participant).
SIP timer popped out
SIP transport error
SIP unauthorized
OUT (IP only)
The endpoint did not
respond in the given
time frame.
(IP only)
Unable to initiate
connection with the
endpoint.
(IP only)
The request requires
user authentication.
SIP unsupported media
type
The server is refusing to
service the request
because the message
body of the request is in
a format not supported
by the requested
resource for the
requested method.
A-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide
Table A-2: Secondary Disconnection Causes
Category
Cause Message
Possible Solution
Incoming video
channel does not
match conference
video settings
The incoming video
parameters are
incompatible with the
Conference Video
parameters
Match conference video
settings with remote
device video capabilities
Parameters in the
Software CP
Match conference video
settings with remote
conferences are
incompatible with the
incoming video
parameters
device video capabilities
Remote Device does
not support the
current video
Remote device is not
compatible with the
conference video
settings
Match conference video
settings with remote
device video capabilities
parameters
Inadequate video card
resources
Match conference video
settings with remote
device video capabilities
When moved to a
Transcoding or
Match conference video
settings with remote
Continuous Presence
conference, the
participant's video
capabilities are not
supported by the video
cards
device video capabilities
Video connection could
not be established
Match conference video
settings with remote
device video capabilities
The remote device lacks
VCPC or VCFX
capabilities
Match conference video
settings with remote
device video capabilities
A-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Disconnection Causes
Table A-2: Secondary Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Category
Cause Message
Possible Solution
Remote Device does
not support the
The participant video
settings are not
Match conference video
settings with remote
current video
parameters (cont.)
compatible with the
Conference On Port
video settings
device video capabilities
The participant video
settings are not
compatible with the
Conference protocol
Force the conference
video settings to match
remote device video
capabilities
Remote device failed
to change its video
parameters
New conference H.264
settings are not
compatible with remote
device settings
Force the conference
video settings to match
remote device video
capabilities
New conference video
settings are not
compatible with remote
device video settings
Force the conference
video settings to match
remote device video
capabilities
The endpoint cannot re-
open the video channel
after the conference
video mode was
Force the conference
video settings to match
remote device video
capabilities
changed
The outgoing video
channel failed to reopen
in a COP conference
Force the conference
video settings to match
remote device video
capabilities
Remote device shut its
video channels
Disconnect and
reconnect the remote
device
Video stream
violation during
session
Video stream violation
due to incompatible
annexes
Disconnect and
reconnect the remote
device
The incoming video rate
is incompatible with the
conference rate
Disconnect and
reconnect the remote
device
A-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide
Table A-2: Secondary Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Category
Cause Message
Possible Solution
Video channel
rejected by
H.323 card failure
Reset the H.323 card
inadequate H.323
card resources
Conferencing
Limitation
Video connection for
SIP participant is
temporarily unavailable
Set the video
conference to CP or
Video Switching with
defined video
parameters
A-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A: Disconnection Causes
A-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B
Appendix B: Glossary
This appendix lists the terms and abbreviations that are related to the MGC
functionalities and technologies, and are commonly used in the MGC
Manager documentation.
Abbreviation/
Explanation
Term
AMI
Alternate Mark Inversion. A T1 line coding format,
inverting alternate ones.
Asynchronous
A transmission method used by dial up modems. Data is
transmitted using a start bit at the beginning of a character
and a stop bit at the end. The time interval between
characters may be of varying lengths.
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode. High speed (up to 155
Mbps) high bandwidth network that integrates voice,
video and data. ATM provides connectivity to LANs,
WANs, private networks and sub-networks.
ATM supports applications requiring high transmission
speeds, large transmission capacities, and bandwidth on
demand.
Audio Bridge
B8ZS
Used to mix multiple audio inputs and to output composite
audio to each of the endpoints connected to a conference.
Bipolar 8-Zero Substitution. A T1 line coding format
substituting each group of eight consecutive zeros with an
established pattern. See also T1 line.
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Glossary
Abbreviation/
Term
Explanation
Bandwidth
Defines the information carrying capacity of a channel. In
analog systems, it is the difference between the highest
frequency that a channel can carry and the lowest,
measured in hertz. In digital systems, bandwidth is
measured in bits per second. The larger a connection's
bandwidth, the more data can be transmitted in a given
amount of time, allowing for greater video resolution and
more sites in a conference. See Line Rate.
BAS
Bitrate Allocation Signal. BAS codes are used to
exchange information about capabilities and commands
between devices at opposite ends of a digital video
connection.
B-Channel
Bonding
Bearer Channel. A channel in a span or in a group of
spans, that carries audio-visual data. The ISDN circuit-
switched bearer channel is capable of transmitting 64
Kbps of digitized information.
Bandwidth ON Demand INterpolarity Group. A
transmission protocol that aggregates two 64 Kbps B
channels to function as one 128 Kbps channel. When
using several BRI channels, Bonding means that only one
D-channel serves all BRI channels, while the remaining
D-channels are used for data transfer.
See also: BRI.
Bps, Kbps
BRI
Bits and kilobits per second; a unit of bandwidth, that is
the amount of data that can flow during one second over a
communications line (using a transmission medium).
1 Kbps=1000 Bps
Basic Rate Interface. A type of ISDN connection for
transmitting data, consisting of 3 channels: two B-
channels (each of 64 Kbps) and one D-channel (16
Kbps).
Carrier
A telephone or other company that provides
telecommunication transmission services.
Cascading
Conference
The use of two MCUs in a multipoint video conference,
allowing for multipoint conferences with more than 12
video participants.
B-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Abbreviation/
Term
Explanation
CAS
Channel Associated Signalling. An interface for Audio
Only conference participants. See also T1-CAS.
CIF, 4CIF, QCIF
Common Intermediate Format, an optional part of the
ITU-T's H.261 and H.263 standards. CIF specifies 288
non-interlaced luminance lines, that contain 176 pixels.
CIF can be sent at frame rates of 7.5, 10, 15, or 30 per
second. When operating with CIF, the amount of data to
transmit cannot exceed 256 K bits (where K equals
1024).The CIF video format has the capacity to transmit
video images of 352x288 pixels at 36.45 Mbps and 30
frames per second. A 4CIF format has four times the
capacity of CIF; QCIF has quarter the capacity of CIF.
Circuit
Codec
Another term for span; a T1 or E1 line.
Coder-decoder. A device that converts voice and video
into digital code, and vice versa. Refers to the endpoint
video camera and video board that are used for
videoconferencing.
Conference
Connection between two or more endpoints exchanging
video and audio information. If only two endpoints are
involved, a conference is called point-to-point and no
MCU is required. If more than two endpoints are involved,
it is called a multipoint conference, and an MCU
(Multipoint Control Unit) is required as the management
system. See also MCU.
CSU
Channel Service Unit. Customer-provided equipment that
is used as an interface between a communication network
and the data terminal.
D-Channel
The channel in a span or in a group of spans, which is
used to transmit signaling information between the (public
or private) switch and the MGC-100.
B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Glossary
Abbreviation/
Term
Explanation
DTMF
Dual Tone Multi Frequency. A system of coded signals
used by touch-tone telephones in which a specific sound,
frequency or tone is assigned to each key so that the
signal can be easily recognized by a computer. The codes
enable data input and control of voice-processing
systems. DTMF signals can pass through the entire
connection to the destination device and therefore are
used for remote control after the connection with the MCU
is established.
E1 line
Endpoint
FECC
A 2 Mb digital switched line used in Europe.
An endpoint is any videoconferencing unit.
Far End Camera Control. In certain video cameras, the
accompanying software that enables a participant to
control a remote camera. Used in Continuous Presence
video conferences in conjunction with the LSD option.
See also LSD.
Frame
A group of bits that make up an elementary block of video
data for transmission by certain protocols.
Frame Rate
The number of video frames displayed on-screen during
one second, measured in fps (frames per second).
G.711
ITU-T audio algorithm, 64Kbps, 3.4 kHz.
ITU-T audio algorithm, 64Kbps, 7 kHz.
ITU-T audio algorithm, 16Kbps, 3.4 kHz.
G.722
G.728
Gatekeeper
A type of server that performs two main functions:
translates LAN alias addresses of terminals and gateways
to IP addresses and provides bandwidth management.
H.221
H.230
ITU-T standard that defines how to multiplex video, audio,
control, and user data into one serial bit stream.
ITU-T standard that defines simple multipoint control
systems procedures and describes network maintenance
functions.
B-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Abbreviation/
Term
Explanation
H.231
H.242
H.243
ITU-T standard that defines a set of MCU functions and
operational requirements.
ITU-T standard that defines initiation of communications
between systems and capabilities negotiation procedures.
ITU-T standard that defines initiation of communications
between systems and capabilities negotiation procedures
in multipoint conferences.
H.261
H.263
ITU-T standard that defines the Px64 video coding
algorithm.
ITU-T standard that provides improved compression and
quality of video images at a line rate lower than 384 Kbps.
This standard is not supported by all codecs.
H.264*
H.264
A proprietary Polycom Video compression standard.
ITU-T standard that provides improved compression and
quality of video images in lower line rate connections and
is part of the Highest Common mechanism in Video
Switching conferences.
H.320
H.323
ITU-T standard that defines how the H-series video
conferencing recommendations work together.
ITU-T standard for audio, video and data communications
across IP-based (LAN) networks, including the Internet.
IMUX or Inverse
Multiplexing
A feature that allows high speed serial data streams to be
divided into multiples of 56 or 64 Kbps for transmission
over public digital switched networks (PSTN). At the
remote end, all the channels are phase-aligned and
synchronized to recreate the original data stream.
IP
Internet Protocol. The working protocol that forms the
basis of the internet.
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network. A set of protocol and
interface standards (voice, video and data) that comprise
a telephone network. There are two types of ISDN lines:
BRI and PRI.
B-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Glossary
Abbreviation/
Term
Explanation
ITU-T Standard
International Telecommunications Union,
Telecommunication Standardization Sector (formerly
CCITT). An international group that produces official
standards for telecommunications.
LAN
Local Area Network. A group of computers and other
devices linked via a network’s operating system.
Line Rate
Leased Line
LSD
The amount of bandwidth used by a communication
device, measured in Kbps (kilobits per second).
A dedicated PRI line supplied by the telephone company.
See also PRI line.
Low Speed Data. A data channel that allows the
participant to transfer commands from one endpoint to the
camera of another endpoint and control its camera from
far. See also FECC.
LDAP
MCU
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol.
Multipoint Control Unit. Device which allows more than
two sites to be connected in a video conference.
MPI
Multi Protocol Interface that supports connection to
endpoints using communication protocols such as V.35
RS-449 and RS-530 over a serial connection.
Network Service
A collection of spans from a fixed service provider.
Network services can be any of the following types:
•
•
Private Network
Public Utility, including:
•
•
•
•
Long distance service
Local service
PTT
PBX; local switchboard leased line
Null modem cable A serial cable designed to eliminate the need for
communication equipment when two digital devices are
directly connected to each other.
B-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MGC Manager User’s Guide - Volume I
Abbreviation/
Term
Explanation
Port
One of 23 channels in a T1 PRI; one of 24 channels in a
T1 leased line; or one of 30 channels in an E1 PRI.
POTS
PRI
Plain Old Telephone System. Conventional analog
telephone line.
Priority Rate Interface. An ISDN interface designed for
high volume data communication. Consists of 23 B
channels of 64 Kbps each and one D channel of 64 Kbps.
In Europe, the PRI line provides 30 B channels + one D
channel.
QCIF
QoS
Quarter CIF. A video format with image size of 176x144
pixels that transmits 9.115 Mbps at 30 frames per second
(a quarter of the capacity of CIF). See also CIF.
Quality of Service. QoS defines the performance of a
network service, such as the average delay between
packets.
RS-232
SIP
A standard for serial interface connection.
Session Initiation Protocol. An application-layer protocol
designed to work over IP networks. A SIP service defines
the properties and the IP addresses of the SIP network
components.
Span
An ISDN line or leased line. A span may be of either T1
(United States) or E1 (Europe) type. Also called a circuit.
Switched 56 line
T.120
A line using protocols pre-dating the ISDN protocols; also
called a robbed bit signaling line or a pre-ISDN line.
A standard for data and application sharing. Users can
share and manipulate data as if they were in the same
room.
T1 Line
ToS
An 1.5 Mb digital switched line used in the United States.
Type of Service. Tos defines optimization tagging for
routing audio and video packets.
WAN
Wide Area Network. A communications network that
services a geographical area larger than the LAN.
B-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B: Glossary
Abbreviation/
Term
Explanation
Whiteboard
An on-screen shared notebook for placement of shared
documents.
B-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|